w

LINIVERSIVY

OF

CALIFORNIA

UNIVERS

GRAMMAR
OF THE

TELOOGOOLANGUAGE,
COMMONLY TEEMED THE GENTOO,
PECULIAR TO THE HINDOOS INHABITING THE NORTH EASTERN PROVINCES
OF THE

INDIAN PENINSULA.

BY

A.

^CAMPBELL,
OF THE

HONORABLE EAST INDIA COMPANY'S

ON THE

CIVIL SERVICE

MADRAS ESTABLISHMENT, MEMBER OF THE BOARD OF SUPERINTENDENCE

FOR THE

COLLEGE

OF

FORT

ST.

GEORGE.

THIRD EDITION.
/

^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^

MADE AS:
PRINTED AT THE HINDU PRESS.

1849.

~f

AD VER TTSEMENT.
Since the establishment of the College of Fort William by

Marquis Wellesley, the labors of many distinguished

duals have added

indivi-

much

valuable information to the knowledge

before possessed of oriental literature, and afforded

lities

many

faci-

to the attainment of an improved acquaintance with the

several dialects peculiar to the provinces immediately subject

to the

Supreme Government. A similar Institution (on a modified and less extensive scale) has more recently been established at Fort St. George, and
time, to produce the

may be

expected, in course of

same favorable

results as regards the*lanlittle

guages of the South of India ; respecting which very

as yet
press,

has

appeared before the public through the medium of the

though the languages themselves had, even before the

establishment of the College, been cultivated with considerable

success by

many

individuals.
,

For the establishment of the College of Fort

for the

St.

George, and

encouragement afforded in many other respects to the advancement of the literature of Southern India, the Public
are in a great degree indebted to
"Sir

George Barlow; and the

rise to this

following
source.

is

one of several works which" owe their

C05

The Author, having been nominated

of Superintendence for the College,

to a seat at the

Board

had frequent opportunities of observing the disadvantage under which the Teloogoo Students laboured, from the want of a work on the elements of that
language.

An

attempt to remove this impediment was a duty

in

which the author's situation

some degree imposed

and

-actuated by this motive, as well as by a desire to rescue the

Teloogoo from' the undeserved neglect in which its great diffiand to extend among his countrymen the^ culty had involved it,
knowledge of a language spoken by a large portion of the native subjects of the British Government in the South of India, he
proceeded to arrange the notes, on the native grammars of the
to assist his own studies, in the language, which he had taken form which they have assumed in the following pages.
i

The

manuscript, tbus prepared, was submitted to the GoSt.

vernment of Fort

having been so fortunate as to obtain, the copy right was piirchased on the public account, and the Right Honorable the Governor
in

George, whose approbation

it

Council was pleased to direct that the work should be printat the

ed

College Press, whence

first

it

now

issues to the Public.

Every

attempt to

illustrate

the principles of a foreign

language is attended by peculiar difficulties; but to do justice to a language so highly cultivated as the
:

Teloogoo required

advantages to which the author makes no pretension nevertheless he hopes that in essential respects, the work will not be

found deficientthe difficulties

does not expect that it will remove ail which have hitherto opposed the acquisition
:

He

of the

if, by enabling the European Student to Teloogoo overcome the chief obstacles in his way, it lightens his labour,

and

facilitates his

access

to that eminence which

all

should

seek distinction in the public service, at some the author's utmost wishes will be accomplished
to attain
:

endeavour

who

future period, perhaps, the track which he has opened may be followed by others possessing more ability and leisure than himself, who, correcting those errors into which he- has fallen,

may

give to the world improved works, useful and polished languages of India.

on one of the most

TO HIS EXCELLENCY

THE RIGHT HONORABLE FRANCIS RAWDON HASTINGS,

EARL OF MOIRA,
$c.
$c.

K. G.
INDIA.

GOVERNOR GENERAL AND COMMANDER IN CHIEF IN

Sfc.

MY LORD,
In dedicating
in elucidation
to

your Lordship

the following elementary work,

useful,

of the principles of one of the most ancient,

and

elegant languages of India, permit me, most respectfully, to express

my grateful acknowledgements for

being permitted
to

the

honor which

it

derives,

from
<

appear under the sanction of so

illustrious a

name.
Public
utility, the

chief object of this work, constitutes also

'

its.

chief claim to the patronage of a Statesman whose liberal

and

encal~

lightened
dilated,

mind deems nothing beneath

to

its

notice

which may be

however remotely,

promote

the interests

of the Great
the civil

Empire

intrusted to his care. If) by diffusing

among

and
the

military servants on the Coast a

more extended knowledge of

language of Telingana^ and an improved acquaintance with the

character, customs,

and manners, of

the fine race

of men who

inhabit that country, the

work here presented

to the

to

your Lordship
of individuals,

should contribute in any degree

to the service

convenience

of the Government, or

to the security

and happiness
that,

of its

subjects,
its

I shall have
it

the satisfaction to reflect

however

imperfect

execution,

will not have proved altogether

jt

unworthy

of the distinguished patronage with which

has been honored.

to be,

I have
*

the

honor

My Lord,
with the greatest respect,

your Lordship's obliged and

*

*"'

very obedient h umble servant

A.

D.

CAMPBELL.

INTRODUCTION.
The language
of which a

Grammar

is

now

offered to the
It is
is

but improperly, termed by Europeans the Gentoo. authors, and, in the country where it is spoken, Trilinga, Telinga, Teloogoo, or Tenapgoo.

commonly, Andhra of Sanscrit known by the name of the

is

Public

the

This language is the vernacular dialect of the Hindoos, inhabiting that part of (he Indian Peninsula, which, extending from the Dutch settlement of Pulicat on
the Coast of Coromandel, inland to the vicinity of Bangalore, stretches northwards, the Tapti ; along the coast as far as Chicacole, and in the interior to the sources of

bounded on the
and cutting

east

passing through the western districts belonging to the

off

by the Bay of Bengal, and on the west by an irregular line, Soubahdar of the Deccan,

the most eastern provinces of the

new

state of

Mysore

-a tract in-

cluding the five Northern Circars of Ganjam, Vizagapatam, Rajahmundry, Mastili-*

patam, and Guntoor

the districts of

the greater portion of the

Nizam's extensive
;

territories;

the eastern Cuddapah and Beliari ceded by him to the British nor is this provinces of Mysore; and the northern portion of the Carnatick of of in the for the unknown descendants more Southern India, language parts
:

those Teloogoo families which were deputed by the

troul their southern conquests, or avoid famine or oppression, are scattered vinces and ever retaining- the
;

Kings of Vidianagara to conwhich occasionally emigrated from Teljngana to

over the Dravida and Oarnataca prolanguage of their forefathers, have diffused a
all

knowledge of
t

it

throughout the Peninsula' f

authorities which

Among numerous
much
in

may be quoted

in

statement, 1 subjoin the following passages from

the 'Travels of* Dr.

support of the concluding part of this Francis Buchanan, 4 work

containing
" "

statistical information,

regarding the provinces in the interior of the Peninsula

in their

Every where

K&rnata the palanquin-bearers are of Telinga descent, and

oWn

families

"

speak the language of then- original country"

Jinga origin,

The

Woddas

or

Woddaru
they
are

are a tribe of Te-

and

in their families

retain

that language; although

aeRttd

all

ov6r

11

INTRODUCTION.

tradition current in

Authors,

states the original

Telingana, and noticed by many of it's best native * name of this language, aa well as that of the country in

Teloogoo Modagat namely the language or country of the three lingums a name derived from the three lingums, or mystic symbols of the divinity, in the form, of which
lingum
;
:

which

it is

spoken, to have been

Tri-lingum, or in pure

Shiva, the destructive and re-producing

to have descended

upon

the mountains of Shri

power in the Indian Trinity, is reported Shuelum or Purvatum, Caleswarum,

and Bheemeswarnm or Dracharamum, where he is supposed still to hold his awful abode, and is worshipped under the respective names of Mullecarjoona, Calanadha,

and Bheemeswara.

known

These three lingums are said to have marked the chief boundaries of the country in modern times by the name of Telingana. The first, that of Shri Shuelum,

" the countries where the Tamil and Karnataca tongues are prevalent" Speaking of a cast known " Those in the North-eastern parts of the Mysore Rajah's by the name of Baydaru, he observes " dominions are of Telinga descent, and retain tbac language They seem to be the true Sudra " cultivators and military of Telingana, and to have been introduced in great numbers into the " southern countries of the Peninsula, when these became subject to Andray or Telingana princes.'*
*

See the Preface of Maumidi Vencayab, a learned native inhabitant of Masulipatam, to bia

Teloogoo Dictionary, the copy right of which has been purchased by the Madras Government ; and the original authorities therein referred to. Among others, the Adhurvana Vyacurnum. a
given in the

Andhra Cowmudi, from which the following

is

a quotation.

i$ i~?O ^psScfS"" v$f

*&s)&fl^

He (alluding to Andhra Vishtnoo the son of Soochundra hereafter mentioned) having built an immense wall, connecting Shri Shuelum, Bheemeswaram, and Caleswaram, with the Mahendra hills, formed in it three gates, in which the three eyed Ishwara, bearing the trident in his hand, and
attended by a host of divinities, resided in the

form of three lingums. Andhra- Vishtnoo, assisted by angels, having fought with the great giant Nishumboo, for thirteen yoogs, killed him in battle,
his residence with tHe sages

and took up

on 'the banks of the

Goddvery, since which

time,

this

country has been

named Trilingum.
and Moodoo

Then

follows the passage given in the last Teloogoo quota-

tion in the notes to this introduction.'

t Tri

in Sanscrit,

in the inferior, or

Modo

or Modooja in the superior dialect of the

pure Teloogoo, all mean three.

INTRODUCTION.
still

1H
described in the
extract

celebrated in

the

Deccan,

is

particularly

from
the
ro-

Captain
Asiatic

Colin

Mc'Kenzie's
of

journal

inserted in
is

the

5th

volume

of
is

Researches,

which a part

* It subjoined in a note below.

mantically situated in an unfrequented spot,

trable forest,

surrounded by an almost impene-

among

the wild mountains through which the impetuous current of

the Kistna forces

it's

passage from the high table land to the plains, and forms the
hills,

termination of that chain of

Tripetty, winds to

which, from the vicinity of the great temple at

separate ranges.

the north in irregular and

In Arrowsmith's

Map

of 1804,

it is

placed near the Nalmul

hill* in

Canoul (Kurnool)

under the

name

of Parrawottum,

upon the Kistna,

It is the

just before that river

takes a sudden but

short direction to the north.

second of the twelve Jyotee lingums men;

tioned as peculiarly holy, in the 38th Ac^iyaye of the Sheev Pooran

and, in the

Brahmanda Pooran,
mountains. In
ratta
tfye

it

is

also

mentioned as the

eighth of the second class of

year 1677, we find Sevajee, the celebrated founder of the

this shrine f
;

Mah-

Empire, performing penance at

Shivaratree, or the night

and, on the annual recurrence

of the

sacred to

Shiva,

immense crowds

of peoplg

still

flock thither

from

all

parts of Hindoostan. J

* " On entering the south gate," says Captain Mc'Kenzie, we descended by steps through a " small door to the inner court, where the temple are. In the center was the Pagoda of Mallecarjee, the principal deity worshipped here. It is ?quar<?, and the roof is terminated by a pyramid of steps, ' the whole walls and roof on the outside are covered with brass plates, which have heen guilt, out ' the gilding is worn off. From hence I was conducted to the smaller and more ancient temple of ' Mallecarjee, where he is adored in the figure of a rude stone, which I could just distinguish, ' thro' the dark vista of the front buildings, on pillars. Behind this building, an immense fig tree ' covers with it's shade the devotees and attendants, who repose on seats placed round it's trunk* " and carpeted ; among these was one Byragy who had devoted himself to a perpetual residence " here, his sole subsistence was the milk of a cow which I saw him driving before him an orange colored rag was tied round his loins, and his naked body was besmeared with ashes." " It np" pears that the GOD Mallecarjee is no other than the Lingum to which such reverence is paid by " certain casts of Gentoos." Captain McKenzie adds a curious account of the manner in which the lingum was shewn to him, by means of a mirror reflecting the rays of the sun upon it, and describes " a small " with dark it as oblong roundish white stone, rings, fixed in a silver case."
'

see Wilkes' South of India.

J The present Nabob of Kurnool, a tributary of the East India Company, in whose territory this Pagoda is situated, collects on this occasion a considerable revenue from the pilgrims ; to secure
which, he deputes an
officer

with a certain

number

of

Sepoy's

but, with that intolerant bigotry,

resisted every application
is

which more or

less influences all

who

profess the faith of

repair
this very

Mahomed, he has

from the Hindoos

to decav,

to be

permitted to

ancieot temple, which

now

fast falling

JV

INTRODUCTION.
The second
lingutn at Caleswarutn, visited
situated
is

occasionally by a great concourse

of pilgrims,

is

on the spot where Arrowsmith places Callysair Ghaut on

the Godavary, and

the

same

that

is

described by Captain Blunt, in the seventh

to

volume of the Asiatic Researches, under the name of a Pagoda sacred

standing on the very boundary of Telingana, where the

Call,

Baun Gunga

joins the

Godavary. f
I have not yet succeeded in establishing to

my

satisfaction

the site of the third

I

liogum, worshipped under the

believe
is

name

of Bheemeswara,
the

which

am

inclined to

the

same

as

Bheema Shenker,

sixth of the twelve Jyotee lingums,

in the

enumerated in the Sheev Pooran, and there stated to be situated

Deccan.

The

best informed natives give

asserting
it

a very vague account of the site of this temple,

it is

some
of

to

be in the Northern Circars, where

in the

known by
it,

the

name

Dracharamum, others

western Ghauts,
is

or, as

they describe

" towards

Poona"

Temple

of this

name

cursorily mentioned
hills

by Dr. Francis Buchaside

nan as standing in the immense chain of

of the
*

which runs along the western

Peninsula;

and, as this

is

near the southwest junction of the

Mahratta,

Mysore, and Telingana

it

territories, it is

perhaps the third lingum

Be

this as

may, the situations of the two other lingums

of the
tradition

sufficiently evince

the correct-

ness

which

describes

them

as

the
to

boundaries of
the

the

country
_

termed
the

Tri-lingum>

subsequently

known

Mahommedan
;

conquerors of
" " " " " " " " " " " "

Deccan under the modified name of Telingana

for

the

" I " be said to have entered upon those parts of India known f might now" says Captain Blunt by the^na^ne of Telingana The inhabitants of which are called Telingahs and speak a language This dialect appears to bear a strong resemblance to what in the Circars peculiar to themselves After the heat of the day, and length of the march, our situation close to the is called Gentoos I was highly delighted with the romantic view river had a very refreshing and pleasing effect which the confluence of the Godavery and Baun Gunga rivers now presented I could see quite wp to the fort Suruncha, and an opening beyond it likewise shewed the junction of the Inderwotty river with the latter The blue mountains and distant forests which terminated the prospect rendered the whole a very sublime and interesting scene There is a small Pagoda sacred to the Hindoo Goddess Cali, situated on the north east ba*nk of the river, at the confluence, which imparts it's name to this passage over the Gunga Godavery, called Calesair t haut, and annually draws a the great concourse of pilgrims, who fr,om ideas of purification come to wash in the waters of confluent streams."
* " Dr. Buchanan's travels Vol. Ill Chapter XVI Page 134 "'At Sheraly is a river called Sheraly-tari-which comes from a temple on the Ghauts that is termed Bhimesara" N. B. Sheraly the name of is placed by Arrowsmith to the South of Onore on the Coast of Canara, under Serowly" in the latitude of which the boundaries of the three countries abovem^utioncd meet.

"
*f
'*'

INTRODUCTION,
northern and southern limits of Telingana proper, as
will be

exhibited in our best maps,

found to coincide very nearly with the

it

sites

of these two temples.

In further confirmation of this tradition,

tions " Triglyphon vel Trilingum regia
"

may be

noticed that Ptolemy

it

men;

f but places

beyond the Ganges

and

that Pliny, alluding to the

makes

it

an island

in

same region, under it's purer name of Modogalingum " Insula in the Ganges gange estmagncs amplititdmis, gentem

continens

unam, Modogalingum nomine"

situation

Inaccuracies respecting
ancients relative to

are not

uncommon

in

the writings of

the

Indian geography, and those which have just been mentioned,

with some other similar inconsistencies,

that

may perhaps

be reconciled, by

supposing

under the name of the Ganges, either the Ganges proper, or the
occasionally be understood.

Godaverv,
is

may

In The Peninsula, each of these rivers

as

known
**

by the name of the Gunga, and they are looked upon

sister streams.
it's

The
first

Godavery

is

here considered the elder of the two, perhaps from

these regions
;

being the
is

known
more
or

to the inhabitants of

and the Ganges proper

deemed

the

holy, apparently early

from the present religion of

established,

India, having

originated,

been more

on

its

banks. The

ancient books*

of the

Hindoos, indeed, bear testimony

rivers have occasionally

that,

even in the most remote times, these two*

as

been considered

one

for,

in

more than ,one place

.

t He adds, in hoc
the Sicacollum of

galli gallinacei barbati esse dicuntur, et corvi etpsiltaci albidistrict, a

little

Arrowsmith, which stands in the Masulipataoa

the Sanscrit

above the "mouth

of the Krishna,
It has

ia

name

for a peculiar red or whitish crow.

been already stated that Tri and Modoga are synonimous terms.

So intimate is the connexion between these two rivers, that those who carry the sacred water of the Ganges to the south of India, when they arrive on the banks of the Godaverv, invariably replace the water of the Ganges, evaporated on the journey, by water taken from it's sister stream the Godavery. The whole is notwithstanding considered to be the pure water of the Ganges, and this ceremony is never omitted. If it were, it is believed, and perhaps with reason, that the

water would disappear before

* In the

it

could reach

Rameswarum.
'*

The Ganges flows through Vayu Puran the course of the Ganges is ihus described " the Gand.harvas, Cinnaras, Yacshas, Racshagas, Vidyad.haras. (Uragas or large snakes; these " fire tribes of demons god and bad in the hill.) Calapagratnacas, Paradas, Sviganas, Svasas, Ceratas, " Pulindas, Curavas, in Guru about Tanehsar, Sam-Bharatas, Pnnchalas, C'asi or Benares, Matayas, " Magadhas (or south Hehar) Brahmottaras, Angas, Panga?, Caliiigas," &c, Asiatic researches Vol. Sth. Essay on the sacred isles in the west.

VI
in

INTRODUCTION.
the Poorans, the

Ganges proper
to

is

described as passing through Calinga, a

country which we
fore, as

know

be the region watered by the Godavery*.

the Ganges through
to

So

far,

there-

regards the course of

it

Calinga, described in these

allude.
\ is

ancient books,

must be the Godavery

which they

From
or as

the adjective Trilinga,

by a general grammatical rule

derived Tilinga,^
the

it is

more generally written Telinga

the

From

Tilinga also, by corruption,

Native Grammarians derive

words Tenoogoo and Teloogoo which is the name

where
it

now
little

generally given to the language in the country

is

spoken.

The

resemblance between Tenoogo or Teloogoo, and Telinga,

question this derivation
:

may

induce an Engin a subsequent

lish reader to

but, as I have

remarked
to

part of this work, great

deference
it is

is

due by a foreigner
that

the testimony of

Native Authors;

and when

considered

many words have

other corrupted

passed into
dialects of

Teloogoo through the medium of the

the
'

Pracrit, or

Sanscrit,

and have been naturalized

in it for ages,

the

little

connexion

now

to be traced between

some

original words,

and

their corruptions,

ought not alone

It

to invalidate the established etymologies

of

successive

Grammarians.

may

not be irrelevant, however, to observe, that Teloogoo

i

may

possibly be derived from

the adjective Tellu. ** fair, white, an appellation which might with

much

propriety
;

be applied to the people of Telihgana,

In the Brahmanda Pcoran,
'

compared with the neighbouring nations

is

also, the

course of the Ganges

thus described. "

;

The southern branch

Gadhaman-

goes' to

Gadhamandana from

hill to hill,

from stone

to stone

it

encircles the forest of

" dana or Deva-nandana, whence it is called Alacananda, it goes to the'Northern lake, called Manasa, " thence to,the king of mountains with three summits, thence to the Mountains of Calinga," Asiatic " Researches Vol. 8th. Essay on the sacred isles in the west* Asiatic Researches Vol. Ill article 3d.

The reader
t Tilinga
is

is

mentioned

requested to refer to the conclusion of the second Chapter of the grammar. in the Brahmanda Puran as an inland Country, situated betweea CasicosaJa
8tji.

or Benares, and Magadha. Vol.

of the Asiatic Researches. Essay on the sacred

as

isles in

the west.

** The
jectively,

participle

9^0

(the

same

9OX>?5^ ma y be added
Tellugoo and

to each of these words, used adrespectively.

which thus became ~l?e>&>

QcS/fo

Tenugoo

These

deri-

vations, however, are not free

tical rules for

from objection,

for they are not in strict conformity to the

gramma-

Sund.hi.

INTRODUCTION.
and that Tenoogoo may be translated
sweet,

Vll

from Tene, honey, a denomination by no

been termed the Italian of the East>
or Trilihgum appears to

means inapplicable

to a language that has often

The Country known by

have been subdivided,
at a

the

name of Modogalingum

very early period, into the Calinga and Andhra provinces.

the

the coast, from Calinga* stretched northwards along

Godavery towards the

Ganges ; including those regions which are situated

lingum
nation
at
is

in

the vicinity of the second

it's

Caleswarum, from which

it

probably took

name Calingum**
'

The

mentioned by Pliny as " Calingce prozimimari" and

Gentes gangaridum

Calinffaruni"

and the people and language of Telingana are

still

known

to the inha-

bitants of the Eastern islands

by no other name than Caling or Keling4

Andhra,

whence the

first

ancient dynasty of Hffictoo Emperors appear to have derived their

to

name,*** seems

have been an inland subdivision to the south of the Godavery,

Pliny, after specifying the
as a superior

greater in extent than Calinga.

nations, alludes to the

names of several Indian

Andhrae

people

" Validior deinde gens Andhrte

regi prcebet peditum

"
"

plurimis vicis
C.

XXX oppidis, guce muris turribusque muniuntur

and Andhra, which
is

M. equitum M. M. ekphantos -M"

all

the

name given
it,

to the

Teloogoo by

Sanscrit

Grammarians who have written respecting

continues to

be the current appellation of the language in many parts of the Country.

The most
books
*
is

ancient Teloogoo

Grammarian of whom mention

is

is

made

in the native

the sage Kunva,

who

said to have been the first that

composed a

treatise

It has been already noticed that Telinga is mentioned in the Brahmunda Pooran, as situated between Casi-cosala and Magadha, that is between Benares and Bahar proper-Calinga is mentioned in the same Pooran, as situated between Cosala and Banga ; in other words, between Benares and

Bengal proper-Sth Vol

of the Asiatic Researches

Essay on the sacred

isles

of the west

This

proves the two to have been at least contiguous, but the one is'generally understood to have been a * subdivision of the other.

** Caleswarum
deity, only
If.

is

one of the names of the

God

Shiva,

Calingum

is

the

same name

for

the

same

uader a different form, namely the form of the mystic lingum. Marsdens Malay Grammar.
:

*** See article VII Vol

2d of the Asiatic Researches.

INTRODUCTION.
on the principles of the language.
It f is stated that

he executed
J

this

work by com-

mand

of a king of Andhra,

named Andhra royoodoo, son

of

Soochundra who

reigned at Siccacollum on the banks of the Krishna.

On

the death of Soochundra,

his residence

Andhraroyoodoo quitted the

on the banks of the Godavery
mentioned

capital of Siccacollum,

and established

possibly at Rajahmundry, which

we

afterwards find

as the capital of the

Kings of the Chalookia

in,

race.

Many fabulous

accounts

of the feats of this prince are current

Telingana, and such has been the veneration

of the people for his virtues, that they have deified him as an incarnation of the God Vishtnoo, in which character he is still worshipped at the ancient capital of
Siccacollum

near Masulipatam.
of Kunva, of

The works

Audharvan Achary, and of

i

several other ancient

Gram-

marians, are not

now to be

found. All the treatises on Teloogoo grammar, at present

extant, consist of Sanscrit commentaries, (5n*a series of concise apothegms written in

Sanscrit by a

Bramin named Nannapa, or Nunniah Bhutt. The

text of

Nunniah

Bhutt, as explained by his best commentators, has been

my

principal guide in the

illustrations,

work which
sons/ and
,

now

offer

to

the

Public

but

as

the

compari-

arrangement
in

of

these

Authors

are

borrowed
a

exclusively

from

the

language

which

they

compose,

and

from

system

of

grammar

*the most

artificial

perhaps ever

invented by

human

ingenuity., I

have adhered

Kunva

He who speaks irreverently of my Grammar, composed by the command of Vishtnoo, shall be considered as guilty of irreverence to his Priest." And.hra Cowmudi.
I

said "

And hra

Hari The King of Andhra,

in the Caliyoog of the

the great Vishtnoo, the destroyer

of the giant Nishumbhoo, formerly,

grand period
Cacolum.

Soochundra, ruling
first

at

Swayumbhoova, was born as the son of the chief of kings Andhra Cowmudi. Then follows the passage quoted in the
called

note.

In Teloogoo, the name of

this place,

and of Chicacole

in the

Ganjam

District, are

the same

hut the two must not be confounded.

INTRODUCTION.
to

ix
assist

them

in these respects, so far only as they are calculated to

I

an

English

Student.

have often been obliged to deviate from them, and, in imitation of

my

guides, to
in

accommodate

my

illustrations &c. &c. to the

grammar

of

the language

which

I write.

Nunniah Bhutt,

the author of the

apothegms above mentioned, undertook

also

the herculean labor of translating the voluminous

Mahabarut from Sanscrit

work, which was

into

Teloogoo verse

and although he did not

live to finish this

subse-

quently completed by

Tickuna Somiazooloo, he succeeded

in immortalizing his

memory

in this part of India,

by rendering

this

book the great standard of Teloo-'

goo poetry.
The

We

learn from the introduction to * the Teloogoo Mahabharut that

is

following

an extract

from the passage here alluded "*

to

cO~
|J

^23S5b<>T^55boS^O,

So

v-x

INTBODUCTION.

Nunniah Bhutt was cotemporary with the King Vishtnoo Vurdhana, ** of the
Shiva sect and Chalookia race,

who

on the banks of the reigned at Rajahmundry

Historical

Godavery. Colonel Wilkes,

in his

Sketches of the South of India,

makes the Chalookia race more ancient than the Cadurnba kings of Bunawassi,
whose dynasty
Christian aera.
is

stated to have

been subverted

in the second century of the

If this be

admitted, the works of

Nunnia Bhutt may

boast of

great antiquity.

Affectionately protecting the inhabitants of his Empire receiving, with satisfaction, the tribute of foreign Sovereigns, whose kingdoms had been subdued by him, and humbling the pride of those princes who haughtily withheld payment illuminating the corners of the world with his commands protecting the whole race of Brumins shielding the timid wh<> solicited shelter compassionately bestowing the most excellent and extensive Agraharams on the first born men (BraminsJ enlightening vast wealth by celestial enjoyment and thus following the precepts of Menu, lived Vishtnoo Vurdhana, the increaser of his race. He, the ornament of the Chalookia family, constantly enjoying *the glory of his vast empire residing, with excessive delight, and with the splendour of the great Indra, in his capital of Rajahmahendra, which is the chief gem of the Vegu Empire, the great ornament of the goddess of the Earth, (encompassed by the waters of all the oceans] attended, in his suptrb palace, which is the sent of glory of the whole world, by Ministers, Priests, Generals, Chamand surrounded by bf-rlains. Counsellors, 'Magistrates, neighbouring princes, and beautiful damsels Grammarians, skilled in the boundless doctrines of articulate sounds, Historians, acquainted with the Bharata, Rdmayanum, and all the Poorans, Great Poets, celebrated jor clothing the most pleasing and gentle images in the sweetest verse, famous Philosophers, skilled in all the sublime sciences, and diving into the ocean of abstruse reasoning, and many other learned men amusing himself with study deeply interested in agreeable history, and experienced in the rules of justice sitting, with delight, thus affectionately addressed the venerable and virtuous Nannapa, the Brahmin and affectionate adherent of his family, incessantly devoted to sacrifice and meditation, auther of a copious grammar, skilled in the Sumhetas, fully versed in various Poorans, such as the Bramhanda tyc. a meritorious man, thefollower of the aphorisms of Apastamba, born in the gotram of Mudgola, commended by

for composing poetry

virtuous men, pure in his actions, experienced in worldly affairs, in wisdom like Broohusputee, celebrated in both languages, famed for genius, a speaker of truth which is everlasting. The king then proceeds to request that ha will translate the Mahabharut.

** Thi8 prince must not be confounded with another Vishtnoo Vurdhana, who reigned in the eleventh century of our era, but who was neither of the Chalookia race, nor of the Shiva sect ; he was a Tilinga king of the Belial dy nasty, and was converted from the jain religion to the sect of Visbtnoo, by the famous Rama Anuj Achary, the head of the Shri Vaishnavas or Ayengars, one of the three great sects into which the Hindoos of the Peninsula are now divided.

Page 12 of Vol

1st.

INTRODUCTION.
Although the Teloogoo would thus appear
guage
at a to

XI
have been a
cultivated lan-

very

early period,

it is

hardly

to

be expected, among the different

often
violently

political

and religious

convulsions which have so

agitated

the

Deccan, that many of the productions of so

these times.

remote an age should

have reached

Accordingly, with

the exception of the abovementioned

works of

Nunniah Bhutt, and some books composed towards

tury, during the reign
of

the close of the twelfth cenof the last kings of the Belial

Pertaub Roodroo, one

of dynasty, which succeeded that

Cadumba, we

find that nearly all the

Teloogoo

works now

current in the country were written after the dissolution of the ancient
the establishment of the

government of Telingana, and

Vidianagara.

more modern

empire of

On
by the

the capture of
Pattans, A.

Warunkul, t Tftecapital of the

1323, certain officers of

Belial Kings of Telingana,

D.

these ancient

princes are stated

to have emigrated to the southern

provinces, where they

founded the celebrated

the Bijanagur of city of Vidianagara or Vizianagara,

a

Arrowsmith, and established

new dynasty

of twenty princes*
their

known by
all

the

name of Raya
of India,

or

Rdtjaloo,

who gradually extended

sway

over the South

and reigned

from the commencement of the fourteenth to the close of the sixteenth century. Of these kings, the most celebrated was Krishna Royaloo, a prince who reigned

He is highly renowned* in sixteenth century. -during the earlier part of the in the numerous for his repairing piety temples in the Carnatick, Telingana
t This word is pure Teloogoo 2o5b*f ex), and 2o&?feX) a touch stone.
*"**

signifies a single stone,

a solid rock, or perhaps

indebted to the friendship of that able and distinguished officer Colonel McKanzie C. B. India, for the following translation of an extract from the Gutpurtee Manuscript in his valuable and extensive collection, containing, in the form of a prophecy, a chronological account of these kings. Numerous inscriptions, and grants of land, in the possesion of Colonel McKenzie confirm the correctness of this account.
I

am

of the

Madras Engineers, now Surveyor General of

A,S.

INTRODUCTION.
* and
for the

great personal bravery he

Peninsula, but

displayed in the course of his extensive

conquests in the

Chiefly for his

munificent

encouragement of

Teloogoo

literature.

IXNBODUCTION.

A
still

great
to be

number
found
in

of books,

composed during

the reigu of Krishna Royaloo, are

the libraries of the present Polygars, of

whom many

in

the

Northern

Districts, as far as Nellore,

and several

in the South, are

:

descended from

the former officers of the Vidianagara government

but the intolerant zeal of the

Mahommedans, whose

irruptions into the South of India terminated in the overleft

throw of the Vidianagara Empire, has

little

of the more ancient Teloogoo works

else

remaining than the name.

still

The works

extant, however, are sufficiently

numerous and various

to evince

the great degree of refinement to which the Teloogoo has attained.

will
it

Few

languages

be found more copious, more nervous, or more regular in construction, and

boast, in a peculiar

may

manner, of great elegance of expression, and melody of

it is

sound.

Under

the fostering auspices of fhe British Government,

that place

confidently

hoped that the Teloogoo may recover

which

it

once held

among
f

the

languages of the East, and that the liberal policy of the Legislature
successful in renewing,

may bo

among

the Natives of Telingana, that spirit of literature

still

and science, which formerly so happily prevailed among them, and

endears to their remembrance the days of the most enlightened of
Rulers*

so

much
Hindoo

their,

Nearly the whole body of Teloogoo literature consists of Poetry, written iu

what may be termed the superior

from the

dialect of the language

but so different
all

is this

inferior or colloquial dialect, in

common

use

among

classes of the

Having heard that a number of poems, engraved on some thousand sheets of copper, had been preserved by the pious care of a family of Bramins in the temple on the sacred hill at Tnpetty, 1 deputed a Native for the purpose of examining them ; but, with the exception of a treatise oa Grammar, of which a copy was taken, the whole collection was found to contain nothing but
voluminous hymns in praise of the deity. t The following is an extract from the act of the British Parliament to which I allude. " And ' be it further enacted, that it shall be lawful for the Governor General in Council to direct, that out of any surplus which may remain of the rents revenues and profits, arising from the
'

'
"

'

sid Territorial acquisitions, after defraying the" expenses of the Military, Civil, and Comraercial Establishments, and paying the Interest of the Debt, in manner heroin-after provided, a sum of not lees than one Lack of Rupees in each year shall be set apart arid applied to the

'revival and improvement of literature, and the encouragement of the learned Natives of India, ' and for the introduction and promotion of a kuowledgw of the science unu>ny the InhabitatUs of the British Territories in India.

'

XIV

INTRODUCTION.
is

commentaries people, that even to the learned, the use of

correct understanding of many of their best works.
is

indispensable for the

dialects

This peculiarity of two

common
work,

to the
I

Teloogoo, with the Tamil and the Karnataca.

all

In the course of
as being that

this

propose to give
is

the rules for the superior dialect,

from which the other

the

derived, but 1 shall carefully notice

the peculiarities of

common

dialect.

The

reader will bear

is

in

mind

that in

conversation and

official business,

the inferior

used to the entire exclusion of the superior dialect,

and

that in
as

all

books or studied compositions, a contrary rule obtains.

Such
view
to

have acquired a knowledge of the Teloogoo language merely with a

the transaction of
official

colloquial intercourse with the people, or to

business, and have confined their studies exclusively to the

inferior dialect,

may

accuse

me

of entering on an unprofitable

and unnecessary

task, in

treating of the

other, which, in their estimation,

may be deemed

altogether foreign to the Teloogoo.

to a

An

attentive examination of the

all

two may possibly lead

is

very different conthe student to

clusion: at
<

events, as this

work

intended as
classical

much

to enable

understand the rules which regulate the

teach

compositions of the Natives, as to

it

him

to

speak or write the

common
by

Teioogoo, I have deemed

it's

my
more

duty

to

follow the Native Grammarians

tracing the language to

I

original source in
it's

the superior dialect

at the

same time,

have not neglected

useful

branches in the inferior

dialect, which,

as being vulgar,

Native authors have

of the learned. considered beneath the notice

The Teloogoo
i

is

spoken with the greatest purity

it's

in

the Northern

Circars,

and with much of

native simplicity by the

Ratsawars,

Velmawars, and other

superior classes in those districts.

More

conversant with arms, however, than

with books, the Ratsawars

*

and Velmawars are in general ignorant of the princii

affecting tale of the Zemindar of Boobily, related by Orme, is one of many that might be quoted, in elucidation of the nice sense of honor, and romantic bravery, inherent in this fine race of men. Our want of sufficient attention to their habits and customs, rather than any callous disregard for their prejudices, has occasionally driven others of this tribe to similar acts of
self destruction,

The

which are much to be deprecated, and which, indelibly imprinted on the minds of the people, materially affect the popularity of our Government.

INTRODUCTION.
pies of their

XV
classes of Telingana, unlike

own

tongue-

Indeed the three inferior

to

their neighbours of the

Tamil Nation, seem

have abandoned the culture of their

language, with every other branch of literature and science, to the sacred tribe*

The Vussoochuritru
Bramin.

is

the

only

Teloogoo work of note not composed by a

But, with the manners and habits of their ancestors, the Velmawars,
casts,

Comtees, and Soodra

descended from the aborigines of the country, retain a

great deal of the original language of Telingana, and are

more sparing

in the use

of Sanscrit words than the Bramins.

It

has been very generally asserted, and indeed believed, that the Teloogoo
origin in the language of the

has

it's

Vedums, and many

*'

of the most eminent

It is

oriental scholars have given their authority in support of this opinion.

not

without
to

much

deference, therefore, that I venture publicly to state

to contrary conclusion
;

my

...
inquiries

have led

me

but

do so with the
all

less hesitation, as I

find myself supported

by the concurrent evidence of

Native Authors

who have

ever written on the subject of the Teloogoo language.

On

this,

and on several other material points connected with the structure of

the Teloogoo, I regret that

my

sentiments should be entirely at variance with,

those of so celebrated an orientalist as Dr. Carey, one of the learned Professors in

the College of Fort William, to

whom

the Public are indebted for a very copious

Grammar

of the Sanscrit language, and for a series of works on the elements of

the spoken dialects of India.

In the preface

to a

Telinga Grammar, which issued

from the press

after the

present
as

Government, Dr. Carey writes

"
I.

work had been completed and submitted to " The follows, languages of the South of India
Cingalese, while they have

e.

the

and Telinga, Karnata, Tamil, Malayala,

(viz.

" the same origin with those of the North" " them in other respects
:

the Sanscrit) differ greatly from

and

a large proportion of especially in Having

;

words the

"origin of which
" in the country,

is

unascertained

or, as

he afterwards terms them, words current

"^^^, of which

the derivation is uncertain-"

XVI
While
I coincide in

INTRODUCTION.
these five languages, opinion with Dr. Carey, that, '-among

" the Telinga appears to be the most polished, and though confessedly a very

"

difficult

language,
it's

it

must be numbered with those which are the most worthy

it

" of cultivation, "

variety of inflection being such as to give

facility,

a capacity of

expressing ideas with a high degree of

justness, and elegance"; with

deference, I submit that he has given an erroneous view of the structure

and deriin India,

vation of the Teloogoo. In

common

with every other tongue

it

now spoken

modern Teloogoo abounds with

Sanscrit words, perhaps

has a greater proportion

is

of them than any of the other southern dialects; nevertheless there

believe that the origin of the

reason to

two languages

is

altogether distinct.
to

With

the exception of a few letters peculiar

Sanscrit words,

and evidently

taken from the Nagree alphabet, the round and flowing characters of the Teloogoo

bear no resemblance to the square Devanagree

and even

if

the

Teloogoo alphabet
that the

were found

to be derived

from the Nagree,

it

would only prove

people of
origin of

Telingana had borrowed the invention of a more civilized nation.

their language

The

might

still

be

as different

from that of their alphabet, as the origin

of our present
.

Roman

characters, from that of our

all

Saxon words.

It has already

been mentioned that

the Native Teloogoo

Grammars

arc

written by Bramins, in the Sanscrit tongue;

and that

th'eir

arrangement of the

alphabet, their illustrations, and their comparisons, are necessarily

the language in which
position that the
it

borrowed from

they write.

This circumstance might justify the sup-

Bramins were the

:

first

who

cultivated the Teloogoo,

and brought

under fixed rules

but

it

cannot be urged in proof of any radical connexion

between the Teloogoo and the Sanscrit.

It
fevJ

has also been noticed that, in speaking the Teloogoo, the Soodras use very Sanscrit words: among the superior classes of Vysyus, and pretenders to the
cast, Sanscrit

Rajah

terms ar? used only in proportion to their greater intimacy

with the Bramins, and their books; and,

as these classes do adopt,
as to

when we

find even such Sanscrit

words

pronounced by them
Bramins, who, at

in so

be a

common jest

to the

improper and rude a manner the same time, never question their

INTRODUCTION.
pronunciation of pure

XVH
we may
fairly

Teloogoo words,

think

infer

it

to he

the language probable at least that these Sanscrit terms were originally foreign to

spoken by the great body of the people.

Some Native Grammarians

\

* maintain that, before

the

King Andhraroyadoo

established his residence on the banks of the Godavery, the only Teloogoo

words

were those peculiar

generally

to

what

is

emphatically

termed the pure Teloogoo, now

they consider coeval with the
followers of this

named

the

language of the land,

it

which

people, or as they express

" created by the

God Brimha." The

Sanscrit

prince, say they, for the first time began to adopt

terms with Teloogoo

terminations, and by degrees corruptions from the Sanscrit crept into the language,

from the ignorance of the people respecting the

original words. This would imply that the

proper pronunciation of the

retain

nation

still

some

faint

remem-

brance of those times, in which their 'language existed independent of the Sanscrit
;

and

it is

certain that every Teloogoo

Grammarian, from the days of Nunnia

two languages as derived from sources
the words of the

Bhutt

to the present period, considers the

;

entirely distinct

for

each commences his work by classing

language under four separate heads, which they distinguish by the respective names
of ~&&$&x> language of the land, e#)3&55bo Sanscrit derivatives,
corruptions,
*

8&\x>
Cf

Sanscrit

and \^A^ SfcCS&> provincial terms.

/

To

these, latter authors have

e

See the Adhurvana Vyacurnum, as given

7an>

in the

Audhra Cowmudi.

^ "C

fr*~%'e-&r>%
tf

T^tfjSbsSn^cStfC o&&) S&Q

&

iS**T

3rraoS_tf2\
|

S5"o^8Ss#
^"^?

ae-tfC

^rC o-tf-^-S5^^-J|S)%l#2 #25\ iW ,6* IS'Sie "^"sr^TS'g ^T^S S^TT>0

Job^)
\

"^ ^SbSJ-

TS^eSb ^C55b^>v 15^2

the banks

The
||

adherents of

And, hra Vishtnoo

(before mentioHed)
derivatives).

who

then resided on

of

the

Qodavery spoke Tulsama words, (Sanscrit

In

the coarse

of time,

these

obliteration

of

letters,

words, not being properly articulated by the unlearned, by tJie changt or or by being contracted, a fourth, or a half, became Tudb havas, ('Sanscrit

corruptions.) Those words consisting

of nouns,

verbals,

and verbs, created by

the

God Brimha,

before the time

'

of

Hari, the

Lord of Andjira, are

is

called Uch,ha, (pure.)

f This

is

the prince

who

now

worshipped as a divinity at Siccacolluro on the river Krishna,

first

ami who was the patron of Kunva, the

Teloogoo Grammarian.

INTRODUCTION.
added &tf$~>$ &x>foreign words or those from other
lands.

As

this

arrangement
it

is

essential to a

proper illustration of the structure of the

the different

Teloogoo language,
classes of

will

be adhered to in the following work. Of

tree
first

words specified above, the

Dr. Carey; the

only are mentioned in the Telinga

Grammar by

first is

there stated to comprize " words current in

is

the country of which the derivaton

are allowed to

" uncertain", a large proportion" of which

;

be included
;"

in the language

the second

is

stated to

contain

"

pure Sungskrita words

and the third " words derived from

the Sungskrita,

" but

written and pronounced differently."

in the
first

The words included

class,

which I have denominated

the

language

" large proportion" of the land, are not only a

in the language, and
the

of words, but the most numerous

the other classes are

model by which'

those included in

modified and altered, from the diffrent languages to which they originally belong.

Why the origin

stated
;

of this class of terms

is

supposed to be unascertained has not been

nor can I conceive

how

so erroneous a conclusion could have been adoptall

ed; for the

name given

to

them by

Sanscrit

Grammarians, by the whole body

of the people, and by Dr. Carey himself, at once points out their derivation. This

name

is

"^^5^,

noun used

either as a substantive or an adjective, in the former

latter, in
it

sense denoting a country or land, in the

that which belongs to the country or land
;

which

it is

here used, implying

in

marks the words

question, not as
;

merely
it

" current in the country," but

difficult to define

as the

growth and produce of the land

origin of any
for the

would be

more

precisely the

words, and to

this class

must we look

for

the pure Teloogoo

true language of the

land.

The second
prefer
it

class

of

words

have

termed

Sanscrit

derivatives,

and

this

denomination* to
for

that; of

"pure Sungskrita
included in
in
it

words" given
contain the
in

to

by Dr. Carey;
of pure

although the

words

crude
their

forms

Sanscrit

words,

they cannot appear

Teloogoo

INTRODUCTION.
original shape,
to the

XIX

but invariably assume terminations or undergo changes peculiar

pure Teloogoo, or language of the land.

The third class of words which is generally mentioned by Dr. Carey as " derived from the it consists Sungskrita," I have named Sanscrit Corruptions of words which have passed into Teloogoo, either directly from the Sanscrit, or
;

through the medium of some of it's corrupted dialects, such as the Pracrit, and which, in order to be assimilated to the language of the land, have undergone
radical alterations,

these changes have

by the elision, insertion, addition, or subtraction of letters, been sometimes carried so far, that it is difficult to trace
it's

any connexion between the adulterated word and

In the course of
this

original in Sanscrit.

work,

it

will

be

obvious to
or words

the Sanscrit scholar that

the declension of the

plural

noun, by

particles

added

to

it

the use of a

pronoun (&>$x>) applicable

to the, first

and second persons conjointly

aorist,

the

conjugation of the affirmative verb

tive imperative

the existence of a negative

in

a nega-

and other negative forms

in

the

verb
the

the union of the neuter

and feminine genders

the

singular,

and of

masculine
the

and

feminine

genders in the plural, of the pronouns and verbs

syntax, are entirely

and

whole body of the

the

unconnected with

the

Sanscrit;
radical

while

Tamil

and
'

Karnataca scholar will at once recognize their

these languages.

connexion with each of

The

reader will

find

all

words denoting the different parts

or
utensils
in

of the

human

frame, the various sorts of food

common

use

among

the Natives, the several parts of their dress, the

of affinity

compartments of .their
them, in short

dwellings, the degrees

all

and consanguinity
or of things
the

peculiar to
necessarily

terms

expressive

of primitive ideas
to

named

in the

earlier

stages
It

of society,
is

belong

to

pure

Teloogoo

or

language of
ttyit

the land*.

true, (so

mixed

have the

two languages now become)

without
impropriety,
is

Sanscrit
occasionally

derivatives

or

corruptions

may,

be

used to denote some of these.

of

This, however,
info

not

common,
of

the great body

abstract
'

Sanscrit
of

words

admitted

the

language

consists

terms,

and

words

connected

with

science,

religion,

or

law

* The reader*

requested to refer to the irregular

o^ C5&D nouns.

xx
as
is

INTRODUCTION.
I

the

case,

in

great

degree,
:

with

the

Greek

and

Latin

words

incorporated

with our
into

own

tongue

but

even such Sanscrit words as are

to

thus introduced

Telogoo are not allowed

retain

their original forms,

they undergo changes, and

assume terminations and

inflections

unknown

to

the Sanscrit, and, except as foreign quotations, are never

until they appear in the dress peculiar to the language

admitted into Teloogoo

of the land.

This brief notice of the structure of the Teloogoo seemed necessary, in order
to explain

the principles on

which the

following chapters are founded

to

the

further consideration of the

subject I leave

others,
I

as

the prolonged disto

cussion of

it

is

foreign to a

work of

this

nature.
it's

am

inclined, however,

believe that the Teloogoo will be

found to have

origin in a

source different

from the Sanscrit, a source

dialects of the
this

common

perhaps to the Teloogoo,

with the superior

into

Tamil and Karnatca.

But the introduction of Sanscrit words

at so

language must have taken place

of inquiry.
fail to

remote a period,

as to

be

now almost

beyond the reach

With the

religion

of the Bramins, the people of

Tilingana could not

tribe
;

adopt

much

of the language of that extraordinary

their constant

intercourse with

each other for a long series of years has

of

necessarily confirmed this

intermixture

language,

and

it

must

be admitted

that the Teloogoo has been as

of words from the Sanscrit,

ing from the

much improved by as our own tongue

adopting an

indefinite

number

has been ameliorated by borrow-

more

refined languages of Greece and

Rome.

Having concluded
reader in

the

few

introductory

remarks which
I avail

had

to

offer

to the

explanation of 'the plan of

public acknowledgments
it's

my

work,

myself of

this occasion

to

make my

for

the assistance with which

I have

been

favoured in the course of

progress.
civil

To my friend me the favour to

ment, I owe
to

Mr. Stokes af the

service

on
it

this establishment, to the

who

did

peruse the manuscript

valuable suggestions
the

before
;

was submitted

Govern-

many

and

am

under particular obligations

my

colleagues in

Board of

Superintendence for a most laborious and

ITNRODUCT1ON.
critical

XXI

examination of the whole work. Mr. Ellis and Archdeacon Mousley are

in a special

manner

entitled to

my

thanks

for their criticisms enabled

me

to correct

many

imperfections that had otherwise escaped

inculcated

my

notice.
I

In examining the principles

assisted

by the best native grammarians,

was

by

my

Teloogoo instructor Woodiagherry Vencatanarrain Ayah, a young

acquirements, who, by his

bramin of superior intelligence and remarkable

merits alone,

own

subsequently
St.

rose to

the situation of

Head English master

office

at the

College of Fort
to the

George, and lately to the more honorable

at

of Interpreter

Supreme Court of judicature

I

the Presidency.
this

He
has

generally sat by

me

while
I

wrote

the notes

from which

Grammar

been compiled, and

may

therefore

be said to have availed myself of his aid and advice throughout

.

the work.
I

have only further to add that on

all intricate

points of

grammar

have inva-

riably consulted the learned

Pundit Putabhi

Rama

Sastry

Head

Sanscrit

and
at

Teloogoo master

at the College,

and where

found the native grammarians

to

variance, have been regulated chiefly by his opinions, in attempting

their difl'crences, or in selecting that authority to

reconcile

which the preference has

been
i

given.

JVOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION,

In support of what
on the subject of

have ventured

to

advance, in the preceding

introduction,
it

the structure
to

and
be

derivation of the
to

Teloogoo language,
the

is

peculiarly gratifying

me

to

allowed
the Jiead

quote
the in

high

authority of

my

friend Mr. Francis

W.

Ellis, at
Sf.

of

Board of Superintendence
the following

for the College of Fort

with
ivhich

George, as
me.

contained

observation*

he

has favoured
various

The
dialects

hnoicledge

which

this

Gentleman
to

possesses

of the
as a

spoken

of

the

Peninsula,

added
to

his

acquirements

Sanscrit

scholar,

peculiarly

qualify

him

pronounce

judgment on

this subject.

The
to

real affiliation of the

Telugu language appears not

to

have been kqpwn

any writer, by

whom

the subject has been noticed.

says

Dr. Carey in the preface

the Tamil,
the

to his Sanscrit

Grammar

" The Hindoostanee and

derived

with the

languages of Gujarat and Malayala, are evidently

the two

from

Sanscrit, but

former are greatly mixed with foreign words-

The Bengalee,

Orissa,

Maratta, Kurnata, and Telinga languages are almost wholly composed of Sanscrit

words"

In the preface to a

Grammar

of the

Telugu

lately published

by him
San-

he, also, says

scrit"
:

" The

languages of India are principally derived from the

in the

&c. " The structure of most of the languages

is

middle and north of

in

India,

generally the same, the chief difference in

them

lies

the termination

of the nouns and verbs, and in those deviations from Sanscrit orthography which

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

in
i.

custom has gradually established

languages of the s'-uth of India,

the countries where

e.

they are spoken.

The

The Telinga, Karnatic, Tamil, Malayala,

those

and Cingalese, while they have

from them in other respects
the origin of which
is
:

the

same origin with

of the north,

differ greatly

and especially

in having a large proportion of words,

this

unascertained."

To

testimony Dr. Wilkins adds the

to

weight of his authority, " the the Sanscrit

Tamil,
(the idiom)
scarcely

when he

says in the preface

his

Grammar

of the

Telugu, the Carnatic, the Malabar, together with that"

states

" of the Marratta

and of Gujarat so abound with Sanscrit, that

in either

a sentence can be expressed

also, in his dissertation

of them without

it's

assistance"

Mr.

Colebrooke,
7th

on the Sanscrit and Pracrit languages in the

Volume

of the Asiatick Researches, though he has not given so decided an

opinion, yet,

by including these under the general term

Pracrit,

appropriate only
his

to dialects of Sanscrit derivation

and construction, and by the tendency of

;

remarks, appears to favor the received notion of their origin

express terms that the Tamil (which

he states indeed in
it

word he

writes Tamla, deducing

is

from

Tamraparna the Sanscrit name of the

which
t

river of Tirunelveli)

written in a character

is

greatly corrupted

from the present Devanagari, and that both the

the

" Carnata" and " Telingana" characters are from

same source.

In arrange-

ment
in the

the

two

latter,

which are nearly the same, certainly follow the Nagari, but

form of the
;

le'tters,

mode

of combination,
is

and other

particulars, there
all

is

no resemblance
having

and the Tamil

totally

different,

rejecting

aspirates,
in

and

many sounds which cannot be expressed by any alphabet

js

which the

Sanscrit
It is

written.

the intent of the following observations to shew that the statements con;

tained in the preceding quotations are not correct

t

that neither the Tamil, the

;

Telugu, nor any of their cognate dialects are derivations from the Sanscrit
the latter, however
existence
;

that

it

may

contribute to their polish,

a distinct

is

not necessary for their

and that they form,

family

of languages, with

which the
it

Sanscrit has, in latter times especially, intermixed, but with

radical connexion.

which

has no

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

The members,
constituting the family of languages, which

O
may be
appropriately

called the dialects of Southern India, are the high

' ' '

and low Tamil; the Telugu,

;

grammatical, and vulgar

Carnataca or Cannadi, ancient and modern

St.

Malayalma

or Malayalam, which, after Paulinus a

Bartholomaeo

may be

divided into
the

Sanscrit (Grandonico-Malabarica) and

differs

common Malayalam, though

Sanscrit terms

former

from the

latter

only in introducing

and forms in unre-

strained profusion
to

and the Tuluva, the native speech of that part of the country
is

which in our maps the name of Canara

confined.

Besides these, there are a few other local dialects of the same derivation, such
as the
called

Codugu, a variation of the Tuluva spoken

by us Coorg;
the Cingalese, Maharastra

in the district of that

also,

name

and the Oddiya,

though not

of the same stock, borrow

many

of their

words and idioms from these tongues-

certain intercommunication of language

may

indeed, always be expected from

it

neighbouring nations, however dissimilar in origin, but

is

extraordinary that

the uncivilized races of the north of India should in this respect bear any resemb-

lance to the Hindus of the south

it is,

nevertheless, the fact, that,

if

not of the
,

same
terms

radical derivation, the language of the mountaineers

of Rajmahal abounds in
*

common

to the

Tamil and Telugu.

is

The Telugu,
it's

to

which attention

here more specially directed,

is

formed from

own

roots,

which, in general, have no connexion with the Sanscrit, nor with

dialects of
for the

those of any other language, the cognate

/

Southern India, the Tamil,

occasional variation

Cannadi &c. excepted, with which, allowing

similar sounds, they generally agree
;

of con-

the

actual difference in

the three dialects

here mentioned

is

in fact to
;

be found only in the affixes used in the formation of

sanif*.

words from the roots

the roots themselves are not similar merely, but the

like,

The

roots of the

Telugu Language,

those of the Sanscrit, are mostly the

in the

themes of verbs, but they may often be used

affix,

crude form, or with a single

in
is

as

nouns or adjectives, and many of them are used only

;

the latter the

root

acceptation

thus

^2&,

as a

noun,

signifies a

blow with the

fist

and

4
CO

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

fist ;

of the verb ^68S3s&o to strike with the

"

thus also,
sfc?/?,

$&>

nadu, with the affix

is all

?f ca,

<3"<

Nadaca,

signifies, as a

noun, a

progress, conduct, manner, and

the root of the verb #3>'c5Soo na davadamu

the dialects differ
serve as the
^\s,&es>p,
;

to walk.

In

this use

of the roots,

the root that

is

used as a noun only in Tamil and Telugu

may
term

theme of a verb
is

in Cannadi,
in

and

vice versa

thus in Tamil the

as

accarei

used as a north
it is

such impersonals sentences

yenac* accareiyillei,
accariy
is

not a

want to me

I do not require
accariyudu

it;

in

Cannadi
to be

the root of the verb

& _ eScfcooSlb
also, that a
it

to be

desired

endear-

ed

to*

It frequently

happens,

term occurs which cannot be referred to

it

any root of the tongue to which

in

belongs, though

is

readily traced to a radical

one of the cognate

signifies in

dialects; thus in the

compound 9Xs5c3*;&o agupadadamu,

which
it is

(which
as

Telugu

to take in the sense in

used in such sentences

it

C5a^Ts5b55co A^(0^o45XS5(Soa adi

"35

djmmamuga

ndcu agapadindi, I take

to

be smote-

'^i^<^e-s5aD7Jr

'Xs5c^

&&

ddnikin artfiamu ndc* agapada ledu, I do

seize,

not take, or comprehend, the sense

lls

t>fit,

but in Tamil to take in general,

obtain,
first

^s&eresr&ssuuiLi-^i curivt yenac' agapattadu,

I have caught

the bird) the

member
agam

&X aga or
no

&&> agu

has no separate meaning in Telugu, in Tamil JH*&

in signifies the interior and,

both languages, the root u(D padu

to suffer.

To shew

that

radical connexion exists between, the

Sanscrit and Telugu,

ten roots in alphabetic order, under the letters A, C, P, and F, have been taken

from the

common

d.hatu-mala or

list

of roots, and with

letters

them have been compared

a

ten Telugu roots,

under .the same

Sastri,

taken

from

Telugu d.hatu-mala
at

compiled by Patab,hi-rama
the College;

the
J,he

Head

Sanscrit
lists,

and Telugu Master

the

these will be found in

following

mere inspection of

which

will

shew, that, among the forty Telugu roots, not one agrees with any

Sanscrit root.

To

facilitate a

comparison of the several languages treated on,

each of which has a distinct alphabet, the

Roman

character

is

used throughout:

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

the orthography
is

generally that of Sir

Win. Jones, as explained

accent
is

in

the

1st

Volume
acute, to

of the Asiatic Researches, but the grave

used instead of the

Sandfii,

mark a naturally long

syllable

when
z

final

or formed by
in

and

K,

is

occasionally substituted for C, before

:

and

words belonging to the

southern dialects only

other variations of trifling importance will be observed.

ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER

SANSCRIT.

TEMJGU.
A.
/

Ac

to

mark-move-move

tortuously.

Accalu

to

contract

the

abdominal

muscles.

Ag

to

move-move tortuously.
>

Agalu

to

separate

break.

Anca'l
or > to mark.

Aggu
-

to worship.
to
sive.

Anga)
Ag.h
to

move - despise
quickly.

begin

move

Aggalu
Ats
,

be

insuperable

be

exces-

Ag,ha

to sin.

to

give by compulsion
to

incur debt.-

Ach

to

honour

serve.

Antu

touch

or

stick -

adhere

anoint the head.

,

Anch

to

move

speak unintelligibly

Adangu

to

be

destroyed

submit

be

speak

intelligibly.

subdued, or suppressed.

Aj
X

to

throw
/

move

shine.

Adaru
Adalu

to shine - shoot at. to

At

or At, h to move.
to

weep

bitteily.

Ad

occupy

undertake.

Adu to slap. HOOTS UNDER THE LETTER.

C.

Cac

to hint desire -

go.

Caccu
Cats
Crats
/v

to vomit.

Caec

to laugh.
to

to

play dice> chess

Cac h

laugh-

to wrarrt.

Ca'cc,h to laugh.

Cattu

to tie

build

become pregnant.

Gag

to

move.

Cadugu,

to

wash.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

SANSCRIT.

TELUGU. Cadangu
"i

Cach

to tie - shine.

or

>to swell, boil.

)

Canangu
/

Catacu
Caj
to hiccup.

~\

or
j

\to
I

lick as

a dog.

Cadagu J
j

Cat
i

to

move

skreen

rain.

Cadaru
Cadalu
Cadi
to

to call

aloud

exclaim.

Cat.h to fear

recollect anxiously.
-

to

move or shake.
-

Cad

to eat

rejoice

divide - preserve.

approach

obtain.

ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER

P.

Pach

to cook-explain-stretch.

Pagalu, or

>to break

make forked.

Pangalu }

Pad

to shine

move.

Panchu

to

devide

into

shares
-

-.

send

away

appoint

divide

by

figures.
<Pat,h to speak.

Pattu

to

seize -

touch

begin

knead

the limbs - understand - con-

tain

unite intimately? as co-

lour

with that which

Sfc.

is

co-

loured)

Pan
Pat

to traffic -praise. to rule to

Padu

to suffer -fall.

move.

Pandu

to

reprove

produce

- lie

down.

Pat,h

move.
-

Padayu
be fixed.

to obtain.

Pad

to

move

Pantangu
Padaru

to
to

vow.
act
-

Pan

to praise.

precipitately
threaten.
steers
to

speak
-

nonsense

Pamb

to

move.

Pannu

to

join

a plough

prepare.

ParbTb

to

move.

Panatsu

to

send

employ.

NOTE TO
SANSCRIT.

TE

INTRODUCTION.

ROOTS UNDER THE LETTER

TELUGU.
V.
"a

Vak
Vag

to be

crooked

move>
TT

( to

grieve
consult-

pretend

grief

Vagu J
to

to be lame.

Vagir
order-

speak

deceitfully

bark

as

a dog.

Vach
Vaj

to

speak
-

Vangu
Vats
to
-

to stoop.

to
to

move

reneiv or repair-

come.
to

Vat

surround

share

speak,

Vantsu
Vrats

bind- pour water from a

vessel-

Vata

to

surround

- share.

to divide.

Vanta
Vat,h

to shareto

Vatu
-

to

become lean.

go alone

be able.

Vad
i

to shine to

surround.

Vattru

to shine.

Vaddu to serve food. intimate radical connection exists between the Telugu and other dialects of Southern India, fifteen roots have been taken in alphabetical
sound.

Van

To shew

that an

order from the Dhatu-mala above

mentioned, under the

first

vowel

ancl

first

consonant, with which the correspondent roots of the Tamil the Tamil roots are from a list compiled by compared
:

and Cannadi are

the

Head Tami?
*

Master

at the College,

compared with the Sadur Agaradi and other dictionaries

list

and the Cannadi roots are from an old

explained in Sanscrit.

TELUGU.
Accarey
Tamil

CANNADI.
to feel

TAMIL.
affection

for,

love.

This root, in Telugu accara and in accarei, is used as i noun, only in these languages.
/

Accalu

to

contract

the

Accalu as in Telugu.

abdominal

mus-

cles. This root is never used without the formative syllable intsu in Telugu, MM in Can. which gives an active
sense to primitive roots, and a causal sense to the derivative themes of
verl)s.

Aggalu

to separate.

Agalu as

Telvgu~a\$o, to become extendedto extend - lament.

in

Agal as
to

in Telugu

also,

keep tance - pass beyond*

calf,

at a dis-

Agavu. to

play.

8
TELUGU.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

CANNADI.
y
'

TAMIL.
>

Agalu

to dig.

Agazh as

Cannadi in which language

in

the

Tamil zh
x

is

usually converted into

/
-

Agey
Aggalu
to

to

be

afraid

be

Agei

to

beat

cut

break

become insuf-

pleased-

in two.

ferable
excessive.

be

Aggu
Ats

to roorship.

Ahgu to decrease. AD gar to gape.

Atchu as
in
in this root,

to

compulgive by sion-incur debt-

The consonant

which

agrees with the first of the second series of consonants, iir the Sanscrit alphabet, is pronounced tsa and cha and ta, in Telugu cfia in Can. tha, cha, and ja in Tarn. according,
;

as

it is

final

or

medial,

single

or

double.

Anju

to

be
-

alarmed -

Anju as

in Can.

fear

frighten.
-

Antu

to

touch
-

adhere
head.

- stick or anoint the

Antu

to

join

stick

Antu

to join

adjoin
-

together*

approach
This root, spelt letters in the three

befit. with the same

dialects,
is

in

Tamil pronounced Andu.

j

Adkngu } to be destroyf ed - submit - be i subdued or Aanugu j suppressed.

'
A.
,

Adagu
i

to be contain'

Adangu a*

in Can.

\ed,

enclosed -

subdued or
submit-recede.

dangu

J suppressed

Adaru
formative

to shine intsu.

shoot at.
it

Adaru

to

ascend
ride.

climb

Adaru

to

throng
-

In the second sense

takes

the

together nected.

be

press con-

Ajdalu to weep
/

bitterly.

Adu

Adu
to

Adu
to cook.

to join
-

- be
-

near
to

be

slap.

connected
fight
With a
in

kill-

This root with a final e ode, means the same as in Telugu, and, also
to

cook.
root means, as
also,

it

obtain-move.

final ei this

Can.
.

to

obtain and,

to tie-

unite

NOTE.

This root

the primitive of

all

those in the three languages

is

commencing with the

the
several

letters

ad, in which

the leading idea of nearnet -junction, variously modified,

very apparent

modes of forming

the

secon-

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

dary root by inserting a nasal before the final
gu, angu,
tive
Sic.

syllable, as in

Andu, or Antu,

or

by adding the syllables

ei

or

e,

ar, al,

as here exemplified,
is

is

common

to

them

all.

This formation of a number of secondary roots from a primi:

by the adjuncts mentioned,

constantly observable uuder every letter of the alphabet

the primitive

is

found some,

times in Tarn, sometimes in Can. and sometimes in Tel.

sometimes

it

exists in all

three,

sometimes in none of them.

TELUGU.
/
;

CANNADN
/ f

TAMIL.

Adugu
/ /

to

ask
to

beg alms.
-

Addagu
Caccu
to

'interrupt

Addagu

as in Tel.

prevent.

vomit.

Caccu as

in Tel.

Caccu as
lean.

in Tel.

Cangedu
Cargu
Cats
to

to

become
become
Sfc.

black,

Carugu
Casa

as in Can.

by fire
to

play

dice,

chess

to

be

modest,

or

diffident. asangu to be bruised the hand -

by

squeezed.

Cachini to join together two things of the same kind -pair. Carchu to bite-wash rice.

Casi to be moist or dampto

weep

- entreat.

Cada

to

pass beyond.
to

Cadavu

pay

fulfil-

give attention reflect- nail up.

//

Cattu

to tie - build.

Cattu to tie - build - become pregnant, said

of cattle only.

Cattu as in Can.

Cadugu

wash off, as dust from the hands wash out,

to

This root in Tamil

i

is

pronounced
i

Cazhavu
are

da in Tel. an

la in

Can.
the

constantly substituted

for

as

stains

from a

which the Tamil ZJi Lp final is gu in the former end in the

and

roots of

cloth.

ratter in vu

to
j

stroke gently

thus the root meaning - caress is in Tarn.

i

Tazhuvu
/

in Tel.

Tadugu &c.

Cadangu
or

->
.

Cadangu
to swell - boil
*

as in Tel.

This root is not in Tarn, but it is evidently the same in meaning and derivation with the two following,
the last of which, Cadu, is the primitive of all those commencing with
i

or bubble.

Canangu J

In both languages this verb is nri. marily used of water, and seconda. in ex rily of the affections of the mind,
presions similar to the sea twells, Ms anger boil>, his vtealtk- overflow*.

Cad

in the three languages.

10
TELUGU.

:NOTE TO

THE INTRODUCTION.
CANNADI.
TAMIL.

Cadi

to

cut -

bite.

Cadi

to cut - Bite -

swell or be

guardangry.
-

Cadu

to

cut

plough
or
-

snatch

seize

suddenly
be

steal -

angry,
in canstir
fyc.

Cadekey
Cade
to

to
ten'

hurry

has-

Cadagu as
Cadei
to

churn.

up with a
to

stick

turn

by a

lath-

Canmalei
This
is

to

think

conof

Can
or
i

-}

as in Can* also to
-

ceive in the
evidently a
i
c

mind.

compound

member,

the simple root can, but the second has no separate malei,

yconsider determine. Cani J

mark

meaning.

Cattu
t

to kill.

Cattu
dissolve

to

call aloud - roar

-

or bellow
to

croak.

Cadadii

in

liquids-

Cadaru

to

call

aloud

Cadarti

to

call or
-

weep

Cadaru a* in

Can.

from any affection - to of the mind

exclaim.

aloud

bellow as

a
Cadalu as

beast.

in Tel.

Cadalu as in

Tel.

Catialu ) (to move or or

.

(shake. alu J Cadul

,

Cadi

to steal-

Cadi

to

svund
-

make a

noise

be haughty.

Cadiy

to

approach

obor

tain.

Cadu

to

draw gold
to

silver-

Cadumu

push away.

Caduvu
Cadrucu 1
or
to

to

be confused or

perplexed,

peck

as a

Cadruncu

bird.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

TLUGU.
CANN.ADI.

11
TAMIL.

Candu

to

fade or decay as flowers and

fruit

Candu

as in Tel

Candu as
It

in

Tel
in
is

8f

Can.

has
last

this

meaning

Tam. when,

by heat-

the

syllable

writen ru but
written

pronounced du
the

when

with

game

final

consonant as in Telto be

and Can.
/

it signifies

spqiled

Canam

to

become rancid-

-j

to perish generally.

to

acquire a bad taste or smell by smoke or keeping.

is

This root

used as a noun in Te-

luguin the same sense.

Canalu

become angry fade.

to

Canalu

to

kindle as fire
to

c an al
an(j
Used

become angry.

become an-

Candal 3
as a noun, Canal

means

fire.

Canu

to

see

to

bring

In the

first

sense, to

forth a child.
Tam.
is

tee, this root in the present

and future of the Can. and

written with a long a and with the nasal of the third series of consoit
is

nants Con and Canw; in the past

short Canden.Candenu, as
;

in Tel

the

second sense
is

is

peculiar to the latter language

it.

but Candu a calf in Tamil

evidently derived: from

Cappu

to

dig a pit excavate - hollow

-

out.

This root is not used in Tam. ei. ther in it's Tel. or Can. sense, but it is evident that from it in the latter the Tamil acceptation is derived
terms, Capparu a hollow bason carlied by beggars, and Cappel a ship.

But though

radical connection

may

be proved

to exist

between languages,

their

actual connection, as regards terms used for

the expression of ideas,

may
to

not

be intimate and

it

becomes necessary,

therefore, to establish this point,

enter
as

further into detail and

well as the roots
>

compare the words of the three cognate

dialects,

whence they are derived.

Mamidi Vencaya,

the author of the the preface

to

And ,hra
tins

Dipaca, an excellent Dictionary of the Telugu, .has, in

work, introduced a concise analysis of the language, the substance of which*,

as affording the means, of

making

this

comparison,

is

translated in the following

paragraph.

"The modes

of derivation
i

in

the

And,hra language are four; they

are

Tatsaman, Tad,bhavan, Desyam and Gramyam,

12
te

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

OF PURE SANSCRIT TERMS RECEIVED IN TELUGV."
spoken in heaven, the Telugu those of the original language, of which the

Tatsamam

consists of Sanscrit terms, pure as

terminations being substituted for

following are examples. SANSCRIT.

TATSAMAM.

SANSCRIT.

TATSAMAM.

llamah

Vanam

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

"

13

TADBtfAVAM TERMS DERIVED FR*OM SANSCRIT THROUGH THE PRACRUTjM SPOKEN IN. THE COUNTRY OF MAHARASTRA.
PRACRIT.
,

SANSCRIT.

TELUGL
a species of Boater fowl'
a preceptor.

Chacravacah

Upad.hyayah

Brahma

Brahma.
an
island.

bell metal.

fame.

TADB,HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH SAURASENI, THE LANGUAGE OF THE COUNTRY OF SURASENA.

14
(

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

SACHI,

TADB HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH THE CHVLICA OR CHULICA-PA1SPOKEN IN THE COUNTRIES OF GANDARA, NEPALA AND CUNTALA.
CHULICA.
Puncio
intelligent

SANSCRIT.

TELUGU-

Briindah

Pindu

an assemblage.
<

Bud, hah

Puddo
Panao

Pedda

great;
ivise

peddavandu

man

fyc.

Swernam
Mriigah

Ponnu

gold.

Mico

Mecamu
Produ

a beast.

Brad.hnah
"

& Poddu sun rise. TADB.HAVAM TERMS DERIVED THROUGH THE APAB HRAMSA SPOKEN IN THE COUNTRY OFAB,HIRA AND THE COAST OF THE WESTERN OCEAN.
Paddo

SANSCRIT.

APABHRAMSA.
i

TELUGU.
i

Brahmanah
Abad,ham Stanam
'Srutam heard

Bamb.hadu
Abadd,hu

Bapadu

a Brahman.

Baddu
Tsannu

an Untruth.
the bosom.

Tanu Sudu

Tsaduvu
literally,

reading or learning."

NOTE. Apabramsa means,

won}
this
is

corrupted language; but the author says the not to be taken in this sense, but as the proper name of the dialect, and to

purpose quotes a verse from Appacavi, one of the commentators on the

it

Nannayab.hattiyam, who states the same, and adds

Saraswati in her youth, and that
it's

was the speech of the goddess

terms, therefore, are without exception, pure.

are,

Words which have

passed through this dialect to the.Telugu used by the 'Sudra tribes than by the Brahmans. frequently

however, more

The proportion of corrupt, or, more appropriately, permuted terms in Telugu of the several derivations above noticed, may be stated as follows Sanscrit
;

Tadb.havam one half;

one
twentieth
;

Pracrit,

one

quarter;

Sauraseni

one

tenth;

Magad,hi
tenth.

the

Paisachi,

Chulica,

Apabramsa

together

one

Mr.

Colebrooke, in his dissertation on the Sanscrit and Pracrit languages, admits but
af three distinctions
considers the same.
dialects,
;

these

two and the Magad.hi, or Apabramsa,

which he

The

six Pracrits

here enumerated, however, are six distinct

it's

but

all

terms, according to the collocation idiom, and, with following

each formed, as to

of permutation, special exceptions, the general

rules

own

grammar grammar

of the Sanscrit

in the

Shadbasha-chandrica by Lacshmid,hara, a joint

general
rules

of the six Pracrits, after

applying to

all,

the

Pracrit

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

mahardstr'
the
Sanscrit,

15
immediately

dd^kavam)
the
Pracrit

is

deduced
Sanscrit

from
;

the

Sauraseni from
-

and

and

so

on

the

Magadhi, Paisachi, Clmclica

in purity
this,
f(

Paisachi,

and Apabramsa, each declining

a degree
;

and the

last

varying more than any of the rest

from the parent stock

however, the author does not allow to be, as Mr. Colebrooke considers

it,

a jargon destitute of regular

-

Grammar,"

for

he snys-ApabJiramsas
sa

ta

bjidshd

sydd ab.hirddi girdnchayah

j
'

cavi praijog'anerhetwan n'dpasabdas

in Ab,hira

lu cwachit,

Apabramsa

is

the language spoken

it is

and

other countries, and,

as

it

is

used by the poets,

to detail
it's

not in

any

respect corrupted

and he proceeds, accordingly,

The work
Natacas,

grammatical here noticed

treats,
it is

rules.
is

confined to these dialects, as they

now

exist

in the

and

therefore,

only tof

Tatsamam and Tadb,havam terms

that

of

Sanscrit origin

expressly stated, however,

each possessed

its

proper

Desyam, or

native, terms,

and

it

is

probable, as

many

of these dialects prevailed

in countries far distant

from each other, that each was connected with Desyam

in conjunction with

words of various derivations,

which they produced spoken

languages differing considerably from each other ; this in fact is declared to he the case with respect to Paisachi in the following passage - Pisdcha dha

niyatam Paisachi dwitayam

Cecaya Chdhlica

viduh

Pisdcha desdstu vruddJiair uctdh-Pdndya

Sudjicsha B,hota

Sahya Nepdla

Cuntalah

Gdndhdra Haiva

Canojanas tat,ha- Ete paisdcha desas syus tad desyas tad guno bjiavati.

The

two Paisachi

dialects are
/

said

to

prevail in

all

the

countries

here

mentioned,*

commencing with Paudyam

to

at the

southern

extremity of India,
to the
east,

and extending

Canoj (Canojdna)

in the

north, and

Siam (Sayha]
the

and

it is

added.

These are the Paisachi countries,

and

Desyam

terms of

each have their

own particular
"

quality\

which originated
f
"

other words 'And.hra, or Telugn, is of* two kinds ; the language in the country of Telingana and Anya-desyam, or the language foreign countries intermixed with it.

Desyam,

in

OF TERMS WHICH ORIGINATED

to

Iff

TRILINGAM.
in

"

Previously

shewing what part of the language originated

Trilingani,

16

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

Ad,haravana Vyacaranam are here inserted,
to

the Following stanzas from the

describe the country to which this

name

applies."
:

the author explains quotation from the Adharavana Vyacaranam is omitted that part which relates to tie boundaries of Trilingam as follows
:

" As
wara

it

is

here said, in the country between Srisailurn, the station of Bhimes/

at

Dracharamam, the greater Caleiwaram and,

as the fourth,

the mountain

of Mahendra, in

these holy places were three Lingams, and

the language which

/

originated in the country

known by
is

the

name

of thp Trilinga

Desam,
is

is

that

now

under consideration
the Appacaviyam.

this

the Atsu or pure Telugu, and

thus described in

VERSE.

" All those words which are in use among the several races who are aborigines are which of the Country of A.nd.hra, perfectly clear and free from all obscurity, these shine forth to the world as the pufe native speech of A^nd^hra (Sudd,ha

And,hra
"

OF THESE THE FOLLOWING ARE EXAMPLES.

Nela

Palu

milk.

Perugu
'

curdled milk,
clarified butter,

Rolu
Eoncali
Ut't'i

a mortar,

a
a

pestle.

long

net for

holding

pots

fyC'

Pud ami
"Padatuca
>
f

the earth-

a woman.
>

Pasidi-paindi gold.

Bangaru

gold.

Coducu
Codalu
Tala

a son.
a daughter in-law.
the head.
'

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

;

17
Andjira

these have become using Telugu terms conjointly with those of other countries,

terms offoreign origin.

"The people

of

'And, lira,

otherwise

called

Trilingam,

have, as Appacavi
of

states above, frequented

other countries and mixed their language with that

of such

these several contries

Anya-desyam terms

the following are examples.

aspirates, not belonging to

The examples

are of Anya-des
to the

yam terms

in
:

which
such

the thirty letters proper

Telugu, occur

as,

b.hala

an eulogistic ex;

clamation

a haughty, high spirited

avadjidru an exclamation of entreaty tjiavu a place-station d.hdca man of those which have a final long vowel such as,
;
:

ana

the
:

sixteenth

of a Rupee

navala an excellent

woman
menu

codi

a flag

jira

armour

and,
;

lastly,
as,

of difficult words,, inappropriately ranked

among Any-ades
body
;

yam

terms

such
list

calanu

battle

toyyeli

a woman

the

ullamu the
kinds of

mind.

Of the

given

by

the

author as

examples
in

of the several

Anya-desyam terms, the whole of the words

tion
:

the

first

are of uncertain deriva-

those

in

the

second

are

either Hindustani
;

or they are terms

the last

syllable

of which
is

has been casually lengthened

either of Sanscrit derivation
affection.

thus codi,

is

the

same,

as

codi

and navala

from nava new, or a native term

*

from the Tamil navam

Most of those

in the last
is

list

are

common

to

the southern dialects; thus

to join,

calanu, in Tamil cal,

dilalects
;

derived from the

root cala
tai
to

common

to

the three

toyyeli, in

Tamil

'

taiyel,

from

beautify,

menu, in Tamil meni, from mel upward-outward, and idlumu from ul

inward-mind.
"

OF TERMS AND FORMS OF RUSTIC OR VULGAR SPEECH.

be subjected to the rules
of

"Terms which cannot

irregular increment or

Grammar, and

ht which an
;

decrement of

letters occur are called

Gramyam

they are
.

corruptions,

and are described in the following verse from the Appacaviyam.

VERSE.
."

Such

Tenugu words
terms
unless,
;

as are
lose

commonly

used by rustic folk

regular letters
the

are

known

as

Gramyam
in poetry,

these

some of their

and are not found

as

in abusive language,

use

of them cannot be avoided,

for example,

18

NOTE TOTHE INTRODUCTION.

Vasldda Hari Somulu

,

iii
nid'
ivi

>

Destdda golladanti dittaca carunan

Tsustdda caungili

Istdda tsepamannan
In
this

grdmyoctid."
i
'

'

verse

vastdda
;

for

vatstsunndnda', testdda

for

tetstsulsunndnda

tsustdda for tsutsutsunndda

are Grainy am

istdd'a for

itstsutsunndnda and tseppamu for tseppumu,

terms
the
anther, supported

In the preceding extracts,

that,

by due

authority,

teaches,

rejecting

direct

and

indirect

derivatives

from tbe Sanscrit,

the pure
native
is

and words
language of

borrowed from foreign languages,

the land
:

what remains

is

this

constitutes

the great body. oC

the

tongue

and

capable of ex-

pressing every mental and bodily

thing
;

operation,

every possible relation and existent

terms,

for,

with

the exception of
is

some
to

religious and technical

no word

of Sanscrit derivation

necessary

the Telugu.

This pure native language

variations
/

of

the land, allowing for dialectic differences and

of

termination,
dialects

is,

with the Telugu,

common
this

to

the Tamil, Cannadi, and

the other
/

of

southern

India

may be demonstrated by comparing

the

Desyam terms

contained in the

list

taken by Vencaya from the

Appacaviyam, with the terms

It

expressive of the same ideas in

that the radicals of these
will

Tamil and Cannad'u

mutatis

has been already shewn

are* the

languages,

mutandis,

same, and this

comparison
It

shew

that the native terms in general use in each, also,.correspond.

dialects a far greater
;

would have been easy to have selected from the three

number

of terms, than these, exactly agreeing with each other

but

it is

considered

preferable to follow a
to

work
:

of

known

authority,

and

to

which no suspicion of bias

scholar,

any system can attach

all

the author, though a

good Sanscrit

was ignorant

of

the dialects of southern India, his native tongue excepted.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

19

TELEGU.
Falu milk

CANNIDI

TAMIL
Pal.

Halu
When
Telugu,
to

P
it

begins a word in Tamil or

is

in

Cannadi changed
Tel;
:

H,

as

Tamil Palli

Palle,

Can.
the

Halli asmall
old

-village

but

in

Can.

all

such words

may,

Perugn curdled milk

also,

be written with a P.

Perugu.
is

Ney

clarified butter

The Telugu term

itself in

not used by

Ney.
Of
are

Can. but
as

is

found in

com-

these

terms the
to the high

fist

and

last

pounds

Benne, white ghee. duller.

common
dialect.

and low Tathe

mil, the second is

confined to

high

Rolu

a mortar

Orulu

Urul. High Tamil.

Uroncali. H. Tarn.
The Telugu terms
of

Rdncali a pestle

Onake

are contractions

these

many

similar

instances

might he adduced,

thus ira night in

in Telugu,' iron.
that

Tamil becomes
du two rendu
/ /
;

re

aven

man,

,ivea

this

Utti

a long

net for

man become vandu and vmdu.

This term

may

be used in Can.

holding pots or
other household
utensils.

but nelu

is

more

Uri
In Tamil when the
is

correct.
letter

~
(

m\

douhled
in

it,

it

is

pronounced"^
terms,
is

and

similar

Tel.

written

tt

&)
)

Pudami
j

the earth

Podavi

Pudavi.

II.

Tarn.

Padatuca a ivoman
This term is probably a compound, but it is not easy to reduce
it

to

its

elements.

Pasidi or Paindi gold

Pasaru or Hasaru
with which the Telugu term
is

Pasuppu
deri-

golden
colour,

colour.
whence
iis

Pasamei green
term
is

vatively connected, is used in Can. in the acceptation of. green colour

only.

derived, means, also, beauty-

purity

pasnm, the adjective derived

is

from

it

frequently

contracted to

paint as

pasumpon-paimpon pure gold and from this contraction the second

ofthe Tel. terms
is

derived.

Bangaru gold

Bangaru

Bangani L.

Tarn-

20
TELUGU.
)

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

CANNDI.
"^
\

TAMIL.

Coducu
Codalu
^
,

a son
a
daghter in

Cuzhandi
i

H. Tarn.

Cuzhavi...
i

law

and

Cozhandei L. Tarn.
signify a sex.

child

of either

These are the same as the Tel. terms the anomalous letter z'h
(tg)
being, as usual,
dialectic

changed to

d and the

terminations

Tala the head

Tale.

added.

Nela^e moon, a month

Vesavi and
"^

TaleiA short a ends all words which in Tamil end in ei.

in Tel.

Nilavu
Besagi
As
usual in Catfnadi the Telugu is here changed to B

the moon.

sultry weatherthe hot sea-

noun

This compound is not used as a in Tamil though it may be as

vesavi calam
it

Vesaugi )

son

in epithet, as

is

derived
light.

from Ve

heat and savi

a temple

Cudi

or'
;

Gndi-

This used in Tamil signifies any habitation tiru- gudi, or devercudi is a temple the first member of the lattercornpound may be added or omitted in Tel.
;

Madi

afield

Madi
In Can. this word properly means b eds in which vegetables are sown the subdivision of salt
;

Madi
may be used in the as in Tel. but it means, derivatively a section, from the root madu to devide into sections.
same sense
This word

Pnli a tiger
Tsali cold
1

pans.

Hull

Pull.

Madugu a
U'ru

natural pool or Iak2

Mad u.
U'ru
Vlagenu
This word in Can, has exclusively he second of -the Tamil meanings.

village

U'r.

Magavandu a man
/ /

Magen.
This word in Tamil means,
a man, a m ale of the
es,
first,

Vandu is here merely the personal termination equivalent to en in Tamil

;

human

speei-

without this

termination

the

secondly amale child, a son-

word means a male of any

i

species,

and magadu is a husband

in the

Mas. therefore

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

TELUGU.
'Andadi a ivoman.

21
TAMIL.

CANNADI.
'Adavel.

The termination only

nasal in'the
first

differs

the

syllable

of the

Tein

lugu Word

being

scarcely

heard

pronunciation.

Aluca

vexation
sure.

displea

Alappu. The
nation.

.only difference

is

the termi-

From

the preceding extracts

it

and remarks on the composition of the Telugu

results that the language may be divided into language, as respects terms, four branches, of which the following is the natural order. Des'yam or Atsu-

Telugu pure
also,

native terms, constituting the basis of this

language and, generally,

of the

other dialects of southern* India

chiefly
terms,

Anya-des'yam terms [borrowed

as the

from

otter Countries,

of the
the

same derivation
affixes

preceding

Tatsa-

mam, pure
the
original

Sanscrit

Telugu

being substituted for those of

derivatives,
all

language:

Tadb,havam,

Sanscrit

received

into

the

of the six Pracrits, and in Telugu, direct, or through one

less

instances

more or
Sans.

corrupted.
is

The Gramyam

literally the

rustic

dialect

from
is

Grdmam

village)

not a constituent portion of the language, but

formed from the

Atsu-Telugu by contraction, or by some permutation of the

letters not authorized

by the
of

rules

of

Grammar. The proportion

is

of

Atsu-Telugu terms

to

those
tenth-,

derived from every other source

owe half;ot
three

Anya-des'yam terms one

;

Tatsamam terms

in general use

twentieths

and of Tadb,havam term

one guarter.

With
as the

little

variation, the composition

of the Tamil and Cannadi are

the

same
their

Telugu and the same

distinctions,

consequently,
/

are

made by

grammatical writers. Tbe Telugu and Cannadi both admit of a freer adoption in the two forjner, in fact, the discretion of Tatsamam terms than the Tamil
:

of the writer

is

the only limit of their use; in the high dialect of the

latter those

only can be used, which have been admitted into, the dictionaries by which the language has long been fixed, or for which classical authority can be adduced
;

in the

low dialect the use of them

is

more general

by the

Brahmaus they

are

22
,

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

i

profusely employed,

more sparingly by the

a less proportion of
all

Sudra

tribes.

The Cannadi

has a

greater and the

dialects
is
;

Tamil

Tadb,havam terms than the

liable to greater variation

other

but in the latter

Sanscrit

words are

than

produced by the mere difference of termination, for, as the alphabet of this the first and third consonant of each language rejects all aspirates, expresses
regular series

by

the

same character, and

admits of no other

combination of

consonants than the duplication of mutes or the junction of a nasal and a mute,
it is

obviously incapable of expressing correctly any but the simplest terms of

;

the Sanscrit

all

such,

however,

in this

tongue are

accounted Tatsatnam

when

the alteration

is

regular and

produced only by the deficiencies of the alphabet.

general terms

But, though the derivation and

dialects, a difference in

may

be the

same

in

cognate

idiom

may

exist so great, that, in the acquisition of one,

no

assistance,

in this respect,

can be derived from a

India this
is

knowledge of the
means the

other.

As

regards the

dialects

of

southern

by no
phrase,

case, in
all

collocation of words, in
that
?s

syntaxical

government,

in

and, indeed, in

comprehended under the term idiom, they

are, not similar only but the

differ from,

same.
c

To

demonstrate

this

and to shew how

far

they agree with, or

the Sanscrit, the following comparative translations of examples taken from the
section on syntax in Dr. Wilkins Sanscrit

Grammar have been made

into Tamil,

Telugu, and Cannadi ; from these, also, will appear the relation these languages bear to each other in the minuter parts of speech and in casual and temporal
terminations.

SANSCRIT.
1

Cumaras
7

3 4 2, serate sivairam roruyante cha naracah

.
;

-56
11

Id

Jegiyanti cha gitajnya memriyanti rujdjitah.

1

The

235'
77
and
7

TRANSLATION.

children sleep freely

9

4 the infernal beings are continually crying 8 II 11 11 11 10 10

6-644
and

The
10

songsters are always singing,

those overcome by disease are always

cfymg.

NOTE TOTHE INTRODUCTION.

TELUGU.
1

Z6

">

Cumdrulu
4

sicech.haga
9

nidrintsutsunndru naracamuldn
7 7
,

undedivarunnu
11

mickili
8

11

arutsut&unndru gayaculu
10 lo

mickili

pddutsunndru royamuchela, cottabaddavdrunnu

bahu tsattsntsunndru/

CANNADI.

49
1

:j

66
naracadalli
11

Cumdreru
10

yad^hechch.heydyi
7

nidrisut'tdre.
7
,

iruvarunnu
11

herala

cuguttdre
10

<jayaca.ru

adjiicavdyi

hdduttdre

royadinda,

hodeyel~pattaverunnu

bahala sayittdreTAMIL.
1

3
l

!>

i;

Cuz hendeiyal
G

54
ii
/

tarn

manadin

4,
,8

paxHocu

nitterei-pannuckirdrqal
9^

idlamrydlum
11

nilldmel
/

,7

'7

narayattil

cuppiduflirdrgal
io_

pdduvdr
10

migavum pdduckirdryal

rogottinal

oducca-pattaveryalum cureiydmel
is

shdgirdryal.
as follows.

The
1.

construction of the Sanscrit sentence

The

figures

throughout
.

refer to the collocation of the Sanscrit.

noun

in the 1st case plural

governing 2 a verb
case

in the 3rd. per-

plu. pres.

of

set e

he sleeps. 3 a

noun

in the

2d

ncu.
plu.

used adjectlvely,
pres.

composed of
from naracah
case, being in

swa own and iram motion'

medial voice, of rauti
i

4 the 3d per.

of the

reiterative form,

he roars.

5 a conjunction. 6 a derivative

by the taddMta
place7

affix

an with the meaning of the 7th or locative

4 fromgdyati
to sing.

the

same

as

8 the same as
act.
(

o.

'compound

formed ofgitah a song and gnyah part, past know. 10 the same as 4 from mrityati to die.
fern,

caprateya

11

compound

from jdndti to from n//6 disease

andj^a/t past part, pas- (ctaprateya) fromjayattfo conquer. The construction of the Telugu sentence is j
1.

Sans, a

noun in

the first case pluralderivation,

.

an adverbial phrase, formed from

sicechchjta, of Sanscrit
yd,,

being from swa own and

ichchMa

desire,
j

and

changed from cd by sandhi, the inseparable part, from cdvudamu to bc2 the 3rd pers. plu. of the become. compound pVesent, formed by nidrintsutsu, the gerund of the present tense, derived from nidra Sans, and unndru, sleep,
>
>

e third per.

plu- pres.

of andadarim

to l>c-cxi.st.

G Sans, a noun

in the

seventh

24
or locative case.
6-

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

i

compound formed by

the aorist part,

;

of

undadamu and

the

the 5 a conjunction it is inseparably attached to plu. pro. vadu he- that man. word it conjoins. 4 an adverb qualifying the following verb. 4 the same as 2 from the

Telugu verb aravadamu

to roar.
/

9 the same as

1.

an adverb.

the same

as 2

from the Telugu verb padadamu losing.

11 a Telugu

11
/

Sans, a

noun
inf.

in the 3d, or
>
'

instrumentive case.
it
to

compound from
it
/

cotta

the

of cottadamu
to

it
of

beat,

badda,by sand^hi for padda, the past part,

otvddu*

padadamu

suffer,

used

to

form the passive voice, and the plu.

8 the same as 5.
i

10 Sans, an

adverb.

10 the same as 2 from the Tel. verb tsavadamu

construction of
the

to die.

The

Cannadi
differing.

is

exactly
, t

the

same

as the

Telugu, one or

two of the compounds only

3
2,4,7
is

composed

of Sans,

adverb

yathd as and
is

ichfra.

The

verbs

marked

and 10 are not compounds.

j

6 the 7th case

formed by
is

the adjunct alii

the genitive form of naracam. 7 place, united to naracada Sans, a from crude and adjiica excessive, noun, adverbially

compound used
the

dgi

the past tense

agavadu

to

become.

The compound marked

as in Tel.

11

is

gerund of from the

verbal noun hodeyel

the beating, instead of the inf.

is
;

The
1

construction of the Tamil

3.

as in Tel.

the gen.

plu. of the
will.

pronoun tan
3.
to.

himself. 3 the gen.

ofmanadu,

from the Sans,

b

mannas mind,
signifying

the dat.
2 a
t

ofpadi a measure, used as

a preposition and
nitterei,

according

hybrid

compound formed from

the same as nidra Sans,

and pannudeltodo-make, the Tamil seldom

final

allowing a simple verb to be formed from a Sanscrit word with a long

6 as in Tel.

vowel.

6 a

compound formed by ulla, indefinite

plu.

part,

of the defective verb

as in

ul

to be- have,

and avergal the

of the

pro.

aven he- that man. 5

Tel.
verbs,

4 the nog.

part, of nilludel to stand-stay.

>

4 this with 7 and 10 are simple 9

as in Cannadi, not
to sing.

compounds,

as in

Tel.

an attributive noun from

pddudel

7 the

inf,

of migudel

to increase,

with the conjunction

um

used

adverbially.

7 as in Cannadi. 11

as in Telugu.

11 a compound from

oducca the

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

inf.

25
and Can. 8 as
in Tel.

of oduccudel

to

oppress and pat ta the

same

as in Tel.

10 the neg.

part, of cureidel to lessen.

10 as in Can.
in ever}' point

In the preceding sentence the Sanscrit differs

so

from the southern

is

dialects; in the following, the variation, except in

great.

the formation of cases,

not

Samyamdya srutam
7

2345
djiatte nard
9

SANSCRIT.
6

dhermdya samyamam,
11 12

10

DJiermam mocshdya medjtdvi d,hanam ddndya

943
A wise man
7

keepeth the
8

divine law for

10
11

221

bjiuctaye.

TRANSLATION.
6

'5
for religion (and)

constraint,

constraint
12

religion

for

salvation

wealth for donation (and) for enjoyment.

TELUGU.
9
4
(

,1

,2

Med haviyaina
8

narudu samyamamucoracu srutamunu dhermambucoracu samyama7

II

12

10

munu mocshambucoracu d.herrmamunu ddnamucoracunu

8
/

bhucticoracunu

dhana,

munun

dharintsutstunnddu.

CANNADI.
9

,1

Medjidviydda manushyenu samy amaccoscara srutavannu d.hermaccoscara samya8

7 11

,25
5

6
*

12

mavannu
10

mocshaccoscara d.hermavanna ddnaccoscaravdgiyu bjmciigoscaravdgiyu

3

d.hanavannu djiarisuttdne.
TAMIL.
9
_.

,
,

Arivalla manaden adaccattaccdga vedatteiyun deramattuccdgu, adacatteiyvjn wattle7

11

12

10

cdga,

derumatteiyum ddnattuccdgavum bogattaccdgavum danatteiyung cdckirdn.

CONSTRUCTION OF THE SANSCRIT.

1

noun

sub. neu. in the 4th or

dative case.

the same in
sing.

the 2d, or ac.

voice,

governed by the following verb. 3

the

third person

pres. medial

governing the several accusatives in the sentence.

or nom. 5, 6, 7 and 8 the same as 1 and
2

noun

sub. masc. in

the 1st

respectively-

a noun

of quality

agreeing with narah

it is

this

word medjidvi, has the

10 the same
as 2. 11

force of an adjective,

though

actually, a substantive.

and 12 the same as

&c.

26

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

CONSTRUCTION OF THE TELUGU.

9 a compound having the force of an adjective, formed by affixing, to the

>

Sanscrit word, aina

the past

part,

of

cdvadamu
j

to

become.

as in

the

Sans.

formed by

affixing the Tel. termination

is

udu.

1 as

in Sans-

except that, in place

of being declined, the case

formed from the sixth

in CM

by the

adjunct orucu

for

the sake of;

when orucu

or osaram, which has the

if

same meaning, are added

interposed between the theme and affix is dropped; thus these compounds, though derived from danamunucu, become danamuc' orucu and ddnamuc osaram. 2 as in the Sans. 5,6,8,7,11 and 12, as in
to this case the

druttam or nunnation,

the Sanscrit, with the Tel. terminations and affixes

the two last are connected

it

by

the conjunction nu and, repeated

after each.

10 as in the Sans,

takes the

druttam before the following d,ha. 3 the third person sing. pres. (f d ,harintsadamu
to dress -

assume, from the Sanscrit.

NOTE.

The compound

dative,

answering to the Tadarthya chaturt, hi of the

in English,
is

Sanscrit and to the

noun governed by the proposition for

in Can.

formed in
similar

the three dialects from the fourth case in cu by the addition of the

same or

adjuncts

in Tel.

by ai, orucu and osaram;

:

by aga and osaram

root d be
-

ai and dgi, are the gerunds and dga

by dgi and oscaram, and in Tamil is the inf. derived from the
inclination, bias, but
this

become

osaram

in Tel. signifies a side,

and

orucu, from oray

as, like

to join - obtain,

intimately correspond with the English term sake,

the latter, they are used only in the formation of this dative, the

meanin^
of.

of which

may

always be appropriately expressed by the phrase for the sake

construction
is

The Canadi

exactly the

same

as the Tel. the datives are

in cu. 11

formed gerund

by adding oscaraforthe sake of to the fourth case

of the past tense of dgavadu
copulative nu
is

and 12

agi, the

to become,is

added

to these datives,

and the conjunction

changed

to yu, to

mark

their special connection with the following

word.

CONSTRUCTION OF THE TAMIL.

9 a compound having the form of an adjective from arivu knowledge and ullu
the part of the defective uV toJtave.

4 as in Sans.

the

dative case formed

cu.

by

adding aga, the

sentence docs not

inf.

of ddel to become, to the dative

of declension in

The

differ,

otherwise than as here noticed, from the Telugu.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

In the following short sentence and
exactly with the southern
dialects.
all

27

similar constructions the Sanscrit agrees

123
He
>

SANSCRIT.
4
esti.

Tasya bahu djianam

TRANSLATION.
"
possesses,
2

or

hath
4

much

wealth,

"
:

1234
llli

or, nearer in Latin,

multa res

est.

TELUGU.
3

Vaniki bahu djianam unnctdi-

r,

23
t

CANNADI.
4

Avenge heral a d hana

vide.

TAMIL.
1

Avenuccu micca porul undu.

Again, in constructions like the following,
case

when
when
of the

the sati saptami, or ablative

absolute,
is

is

used,

as

in

Latin,

or

the relative pronoun occurs, the

Sanscrit idiom

totally

different

from that

southern dialects

in these
will

there

is

no

relative

pronoun, but the interrogative

may,

as

these

examples

shew, be used for

it.

SANSCRIT.
1

67
no.

Yas
1

sa, servesku

bjtuteshu nasyetsu,

*'

He who upon
3

all things

35767
vindsyeti.

TRANSLATION.
does
not

"
:

22
or in Latin Hie qui}
'

perishing
7

perish

omnibus entibus periuntibus, non perit.

1

TELUGU.
1

1451,2
CANNADI.
Samasta b,hutangal
l

67

Samastamaina b.hutamulu nasintsutsnudaga yevada nas'intsado

vdndu.

Butangal elldmum ndsam adeiyum pozhudil ndsamadeiydn eveno

In the Sanscrit sentence 3-4 and 5 have the form of
the 7th

35557
TAMIL.
grammatical connection

unasisuttirel dgi ydvenu nasiseno ? avenu.

12
? avene.

or

locative

case
;

and are

in the

denominated the ablative

case absolute

28
iu Tel.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

this

meaning

is

expressed by the
the
inf.

of the verb gerund of the present tense

nasintsadamu,

united with
of
is

of

undadamu
;

to be,

and followed by

the

inseparable gerund
to be.

Cdvadamu

to

become.

literally the destroying

becoming

The Can.
is

the same execpt that instead of the inf.

differs
;

the verbal

noun

the

being,

used.

The Tamil

in this the future part, of the

to

verb compounded

of

ndsam

Sans,

destruction

and adeidel

obtain- arrive

is

followed

by the 7th

in which is in the time caseoipoz,hadu time, and the literal meaning, therefore, when ) destruction shall have reached. Again 1 and 2, the relative and it's (

antecedent,

is

in each
6,

of the
the

southern
sign
.

dialects

expressed by
interrogation,

the interrogative

pronoun yevadu with

it,

of

dubitative

added, either to

is

it governs, followed by the words respecting which the doubt or the question asked, so that' the sense is who may it be that is not expressed,

or to the verb

destroyed

by any of the participles followed by the word which in the Sanscrit connection, would be the antecedent thus this example is properly in Telugu translated by
;

345
1

he.

The

relative,

however,

maybe

as

well, if not better, expressed,

1.2-6

samastamaina
being

bh^tamaulu

nasintsutsundagd

nasintsanivdndu
of,

the

last

term

composed

of nasintsani
>

the

negative

nasintsadamu united with the

indicative

pronoun vdndutranslations have

The preceding
priately,

been made into what may,

of the

not inappro-

be

called the

Sanscrit dialect

southern
and,

chiefly language, without affectation, the same as in the original passages

employed

being

from

that

when
:

tongues; the terms they could be used

the
translations of

in

'the following sentence, the pure native terms of the three dialects only are used-

SANSCRIT.
1

34
10

Daddlu sadbhyah sa
7

sue.

ham Haris smardt

11

56
hnute

Gopi gano
12

suyati
13
17

cupyati irshati, 15 14
tisht \hate
19
1

Sma-rochcte
16

druhyati
18

20

'Slaghista

yasmai

spriihayaty as apta

cha.

" Let Hari yrant happiness

1514

222
to

TRANSLATION.
11
7 7

the

just,

for whom

the females

of the

cowherds

from

6699
desire,

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

10
10
12 11

29
17

were

calumnious,
13
16

shewed
18

anger,
fy

were
cursed."

pleasant,

shewed malice,

15

20 19

waited,

were sly and insidious, flattered, hoped

It will

NOTE.
the

be observed that the English translation does not exactly express

original,

meaning of the
it

and,

as this

is

carefully preserved in the other

versions,

of course, disagrees with them.

17

17

76
golla-ddavari
12

TELUGU.
8

69
vella
,

Yeveni
10

gurinchi
11

gumpu
13
,

tamacamu
14:"

leni-tappul-encheno15 16

alegend
13

ortsaccapoyenb
19

impayenb
2

12
*

chedocoreno

cdtsiyundenb

bonkeno pogadeno

corenb

tit tend

a Hari ped'dalacu hayrfitsugdca.

CANNADi.
17
17
7

*6

10

Ydvanan
11

curittu
13

gollatica
14

gumpu soccuninda
15
16

al cdjum-pattido
18

muniyto
3

12

19

sanasitb

56
17
11

baito

keda-goritlo
1 1

cddaconditto

bonkitb

hogalito

gorittb bar/to, anta

Hari vall'evange sompannu

Evenuccdga

786
codali.

TAMIL.
9 10

videiydl
12

cut'tam

naseiyendl
14

az'haccdru-pattdidb

munindadb
15

13

pordd'irundado
16

vinb'anadb
18
19

kedaccorinado
3

cattucond'irundado
2

poccan-chon-

_5

nadopugez hndadb corado

tuvinadb averri

nellavugal

uccuchelvam coduccavum
construction

The

observations

made on
be

the preceding example, respecting the

Sanscrit,
this,

of the relative and antecedent in

and

the

southern dialects,
is

may

made on

The

modes of supplying it in the original, in the work whence it

or
dative case by the several
these

taken, exemplifies the government of the fourth

;

verbs which therein occur

this

in

Telugu and

Cannadi

verbs do not* govern

;

case,

but theupapada dwitiya of

is

the

Sanscrit

with the upaserga prati

this, in

languages, or curitu-mark, determine, used

these

expressed by the
as

accusative
:

preposition

in

governed by gurinchi Tamil these verbs may

language, they
as

have the same government, or

as in the translation intft

this

may
in

govern the dative, as in the Sanscrit, with the

the note on the foregoing example.

preposition for

explained

In translating

this last

sentence

into

the southern

dialects, the difficulty has

rather been in the selection of appropriate terms of meaning which the verbs, in tho original,

whereby to express the shades

,

convey

in general,

however,

it

30
will

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION,

difficult to

be found

express

any

sentiment clearly
in a greater
)

and
less

precisely in

Telugu
while

or Cannadi, without using Sanscrit

words

or

proportion,

in Tamil, in the

higher

dialect

Shen Tamiz'h

especially, this

may
is

always

be

done with
Cupid,

facility.

Thus

in the present examples, smarQ.li,

name

of the Indian

"but signifying,

the

cause being put for the

love
:

effect, love',

appropriately

translated
is

in

Tamil nnsel sexual

word,
in

in

the other two dialects, however, there

for
it
;

no such

native

the Sanscrit

cdmam being used

tamacamu,

the

word
in

substituted

Telugu,

means
third

lust

merely, and soccu

of the

in

Cannadi

desire

general.

Again, asapta the

person
into
in

past tense lang of sapali

he curses,

cannot be rendered
root
;

strictly
/

any of the three dialects,

Telugu, and bayvadu
for
in

except by
/

a term from the same

tittddamu

Cannadi,

mean

to

vilify-abuse, either of these, $ being substituted

the b of the last,

may be used in Tamil, but turidel is preferred, as it is more frequently applied when abuse by women is meant. Again linuti in Sanscrit means to dissemble
this is exactly

rendered by

bonkadamu

in Tel.

and Can.
extends to

but poccam in Tarn.

this

though derived from the same

in

root, scarcely

meaning, nor

is it

common

use.

To

enable a comparison to be

made

other, languages an English sentence have been made

with

each

and

with
;

the superior dialects of the southern the Sanscrit, the following versions of they are necessarily in verse as this is

of

with the preceding observations, the'appropriate style of the three dialects and, and
will sffiuciently establish the positions
t

maintained

at

the

commencement

of this

notej relative to the affiliation of the Telugu.

12
When
7

3456
like

thou art an anvil, endure

8

an anvil

ibhen
i

a hammer, strike

like

a hammer.

TAMIL.
c

CURAL-VENBA,
6
r
,
-

>

4-

41 2 3

AdeiyeVdVt
i?
11

attel
10
attt'l

ddnyi ad^eiyelau
10

Snltiyel att

ad i.

NOTE TO THE INTRODUCTION.

TELUGU.

31

65
Day
Tiyaca

DW1PADA.
4
1

2-3

10

velan ariigi diyyai venca

12

H
/

suttiya tiruna cot tu.

CANNADT.

DWIPADA.
i

Adigallu sari baggi ydgi yu gallu.

Maridi tirasada chamalige saribadi,

SANSCRIT.

ANUSH'TUPr VRUTTAM.
Cutb b,hutwa cuta iva vinamya

twam ayogjianah

Bihutwa'yogfianavad gadjiam d.hairyavan prahara dwishah.

TELOOGOO ALPHABET.
^~f^HE
-seem
letters in
first

the Teloogoo, as in most other Indian alphabets, are apt,

"1

on a

view, to appear unnecessarily numerous.

Some

syllables

even
are

admitted into the alphabet, as simple characters.

The dipthongs

represented by separate signs, not, as in English, by the coalition of two vowels.

There same

is

one

set

of symbols for

initial

unconnected vowels
to

another for the

vovrela

when joined with consonants

form

syllables

and

in

both

of*

these, the long vowels are distinguished

also,

from the

short.

Among

the consonants

the aspirated

letters

are

represented
;

by

distinct

symbols, not by a
from, the
letters

combination, as in our
soft letters.

own language

and the harsh are distinguished

question the utility of so

But those who may

at first

many

in the

Teloogoo, will perhaps relinquish most of their objections,

is

when

they find
*

that the variety of sound in this language*

in English.

greater,

and better represented, than

On

the length of a vowel, on the harsh or'soft pronunciation of a

consonant, depends, in a thousand instances, the meaning of a

quently,
it is

wDrd

and, conse-

of greater importance, in Teloogoo, that each

;

different shade of

sound should be accurately marked

than

in

our

own

language, in which,

comparatively, few words materially resemble each other,

2
2

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
Notwithstanding the Teloogoo alphabet

may

be thought to contain some

it is

superfluous characters,
perior
to

it

will readily

be admitted tnat, in consistency,

to each letter remains

su-

our own.
it:

The sound attached

constantly

inherent in
for

the coalition of words

may

cause one character to be changed

;

another, or

may

require

the elision or the insertion of letters

but no

association whatever

can render any letter mute, nor can any change, or

combination, give to one or more characters the sound belonging to another.

The

student, therefore, after once acquiring the correct

sound of the Teloogoo

little

letters,

immediately pronounces every word with accuracy, and very

prac-

tice enables

him

to read with fluency

and precision

while a foreigner,

who

attempts to acquire a correct English pronunciation, scarcely ever arrives at the

full

attainment of his object.

The proper

pronunciation of our words, indeed,

letters,

depends more upon the combination of our

than upon any fixed sound

inherent in each separate character: and, in this respect, a person

commencing
difficulties

the study

of our

language, for

a long time,

labors under the

experienced by those,

who

are left to discover the

meaning of

the principal
affords.

words
3

in a sentence, without

any other aid than what the context

in reducing the

All Native

Grammarians concur
to thirty seven
to
;

number of
it

letters in the

Teloogoo alphabet

by excluding from

forty four characters

which they acknowledge

alphabet.

belong to the language, but

will

not admit info the

;

They

to reject nineteen letters as peculiar

words of Sanscrit origin

fifteen small

connected vowels, as only abbreviated forms of the large

;

initial

unconnected vowels

eight characters, as merely

marks

for certain consonants

when doubled
retained.
all

and two,

as contracted signs for certain letters

which they have

But, in giving a general view of the Teloogoo alphabet, I shall insert

tney have rejected
they,
;

the letters which

as those

for they

belong to the language, as

much
to

which

have admitted

and the whole are equally unknown

an English reader.

Inclusive of these, the Teloogoo alphabet will be found

to consist of no less than eighty

one different symbols-

OP THE LETTERS.

TELOOGOO ALPHABET.
VOWELS.
Initial

unconnected
vowels.

Connected
vowels.

Powers.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

CONSONANTS.
sonants.

Double

forms

of

Powers,

some consonants.
S

.?

.......

.k

21

OF THE LETTERS.

8I&N&
.

T
15
Initial

unconnected vowels.

15 Connected vowels.

41 Consonants.
8 Double forms of

some consonants.

2 Signs.
81 Letters.

Of these
and

eighty one letters, the initial vbwels

^^

roo, ?<Cx)J"
t,h,
<f>

<

roo,

and
ty h,
s/j,

the ten aspirates sp k,ku,

a?

g,h>

ch,h } <y^> j,h,

d,h,

p,h,

9
g

b,h, the nasals

A, are

gnu

^ nyu,
origin.

and the consonants 3

5^,

vx

^5^,

and

the nineteen characters stated

by Teloogoo Grammarians
connected vowejs

to be peculiar to

words of Sanscrit

To

these, the

and ^roo, should also be added. For, had not all the connected vowels been rejected from the alphabet, as marks instead of letters, a place would
rco,

have been originally assigned

to these

two characters, in the

list

of symbols

derivatives. peculiar to Sanscrit 3 sh, is, as above stated, peculiar to Sanscrit, letter the Although

modern
whic.li
e,

authors admit, that, Sanscrit derivatives excepted,

all

Teloogoo vrords
9

have the

letter

<

s, <o s,

followed by the connected vowels

into $ sh
,

^
i,

ee,

~=>

e,

or

may change
"S

the

hence,

^^

chesi, or
it,

"-^

cheshi, having 'done.

siggoo, or

cO^> chesenco, or

"^^r5o

cheshenoo,

he, she or

did.

c^/fo

% &>

shiggco, shameThe short initial vowels

e,

'a,

and their corresponding connected vowels

as

"^e^o, (exccluded by Grammarians

the consonants ^>
ts,

being merely marks) together with

25

dzu, ^

lu,

&>rru,

and

are to be found

in

words

of the pure Teloogoo only.

The

other letters of the alphabet are

common

to all

Teloogoo words, whether

derived from the Sanscrit, or otherwise.

6
8

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
The
letter <$x ksh

has been included in

s h, it is

the

Alphabet

but,

as

it is

com

pound

of

and &

rejected by

some authors.

VOWELS.
INITIAL UNCONNECTED VOWELS.
9

The
WOJ^
3

fifteen
roo, "2

initial
oJ

vowels,
^
e,

&

u,

&
&

a,
o,

^
and

*
i,
*

ee,

&s m,

&
;

<

oo,

W^>

roo,

loo,

e,

ue, 2o o,

uo,

are emphatically termed

by Teloogoo Grammarians
supposed
sound.
to possess,

or living letters \^~^/?a35coix> lives,

because they are

within themselves, a perfect and independent existence or

initial,

They

are purely

and are always written separately, unconnected

Like our
capital letters, the initial

with consonants or other characters.

are to be found at the

vowels
neve.r,

commencement*

or a phrase or sentence only,

and
;

in grammatical compositions at least, at the beginning of each

word

except
for in a
;

when words
correct
who,le

are written

by themselves,

as in a dictionary or vocabulary

Teloogoo sentence, each word coalesces with the following one

links
;

the
for

becomes a chain of continued

vowel, except at the

and there

is

no beginning, or place
itself.
is

an

initial

commencement

of the sentence
~3~5s$oo
i,

10

In naming these characters, the Sanscrit word

karumoo

affixed to

each
11
t

thus,

9~5~tfsSco

ukarumoo

u, ^""S^tfsSx)

ikarumoo

and so on.

The

initial

vowels are written on a line with the consonants, never either be-

low, or above them.

CONNECTED VOWELS.
*

12

When combined with

take quite
a
;

consonants to form syllables, the abovementioned vowels

different -shape.

In

this

new form they

are inseparable from

consonants

and,

from

their constantly preserving a servile connection with

some

of these characters, Xeloogoo writers have been induced to view them,

in this shape, rather as abbreviated forms of the initial vowels abovementioned,

than as independent

letters.

"They are here again exhibited, opposite the

;

initial

vowels which they respectively represent

to each is attached to
it.

and the particular appellation given

ra
OF THE LETTERS.
t9
11

in

it'

connected form becomes,

u which

in

Teloogoo

is

named.

f (D

&OJ

TKIOO<4OO
are

til?

A MM A R.
they arc

nants, in the order in which thpy

usually placed by Grammarians,

exhibited distinct from the connected vowels.

Hard.

kfhu

</

yji

r)n,u

Gntteral or

"o$gx>.

____ 1st. Vurga

S
is

V
ch
ch,h

dzujuj,h
es

Palatal or

"^>;53&>.

... 2d.

do.

oop

Cerebral or sScxr^s-f^C^X)3d.

do.

^
*

<s
<5

cja

ra

Dental or !^c^C^o. .... 4th.

do.

'^9
<o
<*>

d,h

Labial or

>^Q^>. ....

5th.

do.

a)

^
h
cCT
I

OD
ksh rru

lu

sh
"

sh

OX>0
17
'

53

<x\

<0

<\

&9

The consonants have

not peculiar appellations, like the connected vowels;

initial

but are named in the same manner as the

the
c3

vowels

viz.

by

affixing to

them
bee,

Sanscrit

word

""S^Cf^xx)

karumoo ;

thus,

W^tfs&o

bukarumoo

~S~tfx> duharumoo dee, &c.

ef>

To

distinguish the letter o r from

>.//&, the
its

term

"S^^55c

rrnkarumoo

is

applied to the latter only;

the o r retains

original Sanscrit

name,

o^

repjiu.

18
e>

Theten consonants
lu,

kjtu,

&

gnu,

&

dzu,

& ju,

nyu,
"'

& tu ^
t

nu, "& bu,

and es rm, have the sound of the

first

vowel

u,
;

inherent; and are

therefore represented in English characters by syllables

all

thus k,hu ju &c. but

the other consonants specified above, in order to obtain utterance, must be

to

joined

some of

the connected vowels. It

is

of

much importance

to the

reader

clearly to understand, that neither the consonants, nor the

connected vowels,

exactly correspond with what European authors call a

letter.

They have been

separated from each other, merely with the view to facilitate the progress of the

OF THE LETTERS.
early student
:

9
it

but

this separation of

them

will lead to false ideas, unless

be at

the same time borne in

mind

that, in

Teloogoo, they are never so separated,

and

are not significant symbols except

when compounded

with each other.

set of inseparable

Indeed the consonants and connected vowels form together a

syllabic characters, generally

compared by Teloogoo writers

to

animated bodies

the

life,

or vowel, giving existence or articulation to the consonant, which, on

it,

separation from

becomes a mere dead symbol, void of every sound.

As

Teloogoo words are composed chiefly of these syllabic characters, terminating

with a vowel, a
final

consonant

is

seldom found in the language.

When

it

does occur, the consonant cannot, as in English, stand alone.

sign, the ten letters before
M,

Without any

mentioned represent

syllables

ending in the vowel

In the case
to

and the other consonants represent ao

final

.articulation whatever.
affix

of a

consonant, therefore,
is

it is

necessary to

to it the sign F~,

final k,
k,h,

denote that the sound

retained, but obstructed.

Thus,

or g,

must

be written %~ 4>

^~ never

^ A

without any sign, as before exhibited.

To form

syllables, the

connected vowels are added to the consonants, in the

19

following manner.

ku

ka

ki

kee

kco

koo

kroo

kroo

klm ke

ke

ko

ko

kue

kuo

k,hu

k ha
t

kM
gee

k hee
t

kjioo

k.hoo

kjirao

k,kroo

fyc.

fyc*

^c.

gu

ga

gi

goo

goo

groo

groo

glm

ge

ge

go

go

gue

guo

It is

not requisite to add the

*'

u, to the ten letters

is

mentioned in No. 16;

20
.

because the sound represented by that letter

already inherent in them.

In adding to the consonants the connected vowels

CD,
it

00,

TOO,

and

21

^~

roo,

which are placed

to the right of these letters,

is

necessary previ-

ously to write

the connected vowel

u,

above the consonants; except above

is

those in which the sound of that character

inherent

because this sign,

10
which
is

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
termed

&&$

^ bound
also, in

to the head, invariably retains it's

it

place at the
situation
is

top of the consonants to which

can be attached, unless

it's

occupied by another symbol.

22

For the same reason

0X1
y,

adding to the consonants

~~*

^
to

gji, cP./,ft,

x>

m,

and *r

h, the

long vowel

a,

which

is
is

affixed

the latter part of

these letters, the

cScro y a>

affixed to the former part,

not removed; thus, ;&t> ma,

&c

but as the consonant oJ^ h already terminates with a symbol

o a,
c>

resembling

when

that vowel

is

added to
a.

this letter,

it

is

written thus,

"^
23

the

mark

being substituted for

&

Instead of adding the long vowel

<& shy

ee,

to the consonants,
,

<P

gji,

oop j,h,

and

<^

s,

the short vowel

;

i,

with the symbol

is

frequently used to
see.

represent

it's

sound

thus,
is

we may

w.rit3 either cO see or

8**

In such cases,

the symbol

o,

which
9
z,

named

o^s"^ long, is to be considered as lengthening

~~

the short vowel

this sign, in

rather than as representing the long vowel

a
;

indeed

two other instances, is used

an(i

to lengthen the short vowels

as

oo,

from
24

^m

>

5~

roo>

fr

om <^

ro

In adding the long vowel

in the

ee,

to the letter

o m,

it

must always be written

manner above mentioned ;

h, it is written

thus,
s~

Xr

mee, never
jr.

&

in adding
9 it

it

to the
ee,

consonant s^

thus

hee, or

The vowel

Or

can

never be added to the consonant

cx*>

to express, in Teloogoo letters, the

sounds
the

yi,

or yee,

we

write the consonant ooo

latter,

y;
"*

in the

former case, without

it

^
9

u,
it's

*$v*^??, and in the

with the

a^e-S&D, and under

we

place

double

formg

y,

thus

^ox$ntyi,ghee,
"^
"o

^^^^^^

lyeeta

chettoo,

this

date tree.
Ctro

25
,

In adding the short vowel

sx>

o or

d, to

the consonants <P

ffjt,

CXV j,h,

m, and ooo
;

y, it is invariably written in the latter form,

<jsfco

never in the former

shape

thus, ;~S>w mo,

yo,

&c. and in adding to these consonants the long

vowel
the

o or "^-c o,

it is

also written in the latter

form only

but, in this case,

last

oof

part of these consonants themselves are considered as representing the

and, therefore, instead of adding xr> to the consonant, the

^>or

OF THE LETTERS.
S&>

11
latter rule is occasionally

only

is

added

thus,

"^r mo <^n> yd
<a s,

Sec.

This

applicable to the consonants

and
~=

e3~

h,

which, joined with long

~* ***

5,

are frequently written thus ~^r so,

& ho.
<^^?,

The

letters <^ n,

& ^ 5,

and

<^

v,

&

when separated from

;

the connected

26

vowels, are respectively represented

by the same characters

but, like the other

consonants before mentioned, they are invariably accompanied by some con-

nected 'vowel, and they are distinguished from each other, by the different

modes

in

which the connected vowels are added

;

to

them

n,

and
s,

<^

v,

are
^

always united with the vowels

thus

<^ nu,

vu, ^r

vuo, but
;

<0

and

p,

have the connected vowels written separately from them

*& su,

as in the syllables

% pu,

*T puo.

Thus
sonants,
ever,
is

also the
is

shape of the

letter

r,

as'given in the foregoing

;

list

of the con-

27

the

same

as that of

o n or m, hereafter noticed
;

the latter,

how-

never joined with any of the connected vowels

to say.

as G9a~1b unte> a part

is

of the verb &&> unco,

^Sopapum,
it,

sin. Sec-

while the former

always

found with some of them united to

in the following

manner

&

ru, ~&* ra,

&*

ro,

&c.

The

student, therefore, can have

little difficulty

in distinguishiug

the one from the other.

Though
consider
>

native
ts to

Grammarians, in enumerating the

be different from

letters of the alphabet,

*

28

&

ch,

and

%>

dzu to be distinct from &jut

;

they are respectively represented by the same characters

and, in fact, they

are only two letters, each possessing two distinct sounds, which has induced

Grammarians

to consider

them

as four separate characters.

first

Following the arrangement of the Sanscrit, the twenty-five

consonants have been classed by native writers in
containing five letters, as
five

Teloogoo
each

29

Vurgus or
lines,

classes,

arranged

above in horizontal
is

(see

No-

16.)

The

fifth
if

consonant of each Vurgu or Class

a nasal

and, in Sanscrit deri-

30

vatives,

a nasal immediately precede another consonant, without the interit

vention of a vowel,

must be that particular nasal only which belongs to the

itself;

same Vurgu

as the

consonant

for instance, in such words,

if

a nasal im-

12

TELOOGOO GRAMMAK.
first

mediately precede any of the 4

only, if
it

letters in the

3d VurguM must be ra nu
it

precede any of the 4

first letters

in the 4th Vurgu,

must be
<&*>

w,

and,

if it

precede any of the 4

first letters in the 5th

Vurgu,

it

must be

m,

and not any other nasal.

Sanscrit, or to

But

this rule

does not apply to corruptions from the

dialect.

words of the pure Teloogoo, or of the common

is,

The

nasal before a consonant, without an intervening vowel,

in such words, re-

presented either by the sign of the letter

(0

n,

viz.

g-

n, or

by the character

o n or m,
31

or c w , hereafter mentioned.
first

Besides this division of the

25 consonants into Vurgus or Classes, ac-

cording to the principles of Sanscrit Grammar, there is a classification of the consonants which is peculiar to the Teloogoo itself, and an intimate acquaint-

ance with this arrangement of the alphabet, which pervades every part of the
language,
of the highest importance to a correct grammatical knowledge of the Teloogoo. The chapter which follows, on the changes of the letters,
is

(perhaps the most

difficult

and

intricate part of the

Grammar,)

will

be absoIt is

lutely unintelligible, unless

as follows.

due attention be paid

to this classification.

32

The

first

perpendicular line in the forgoing arrangement of the consonants

first letter

(No. 16,) containing the

or ck,

in each of the five Vurgus, Viz. s k, ^> ts

first

&

t,

and

p, forms the
letters.

class

aud these

letters are

denomi-

nated

5b&ew

or hard

33

The

third perpendicular line in the above arrangement of the consonants

dzu or ju, <z> (No. 16,) consisting of the third letter in each Vurgu, viz. A g, d, <3 d, and b, which are termed ^Stfsf wo O r soft letters, constitutes the second
>

class.

34

The

third class includes all the remaining consonants in the foregoing clas-

sification
letters',

(No. 16.)

The consonants

in this class are

termed

|^ew,

or fixed

from their not bsing

liable to those changes, to

which, as hereafter ex-

plained, the letter^ of the other two classes are subject.

35

The

letters

o n or m,

n, and

S A,

which conclude the

list

of consonants in

the view of .the whole alphabet given in page 4, are omitted from the foregoing

OF THE LETTERS.

13

the remarks which follow arrangement of the "consonants in page 8; because

that arrangement do not apply to them.

In contradistinction to

all

the other

consonants, these three letters are never joined either to the connected vowels,
or to any other characters whatever.

DOUBLE FORMS OP SOME CONSONANTS.

When a consonant is doubled,

the lower of the

the one character

is

placed under the other, and

36

two

is

written without any of the connected vowels, the sub;

sequent vowel being attached to the upper one only

thus,

~*

peddu, great.

This rule however does not apply to the following consonants, of which each
-has its respective double form. viz.

in

it's

double form

is

written ...

.6-

o5

14
sonant, or to the
wyofl,
;

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
thus

or

19

r^

wyoo.

"^g nya, The same rule

this

or

$~
applies
is

nya,
if

<&

nyco, or

the subsequent vowel be long

y,

<^* or -*
is

\n> o; but,

when
"

vowel

used,

and

the ^o of

^ being
or

joined to the C

the latter form only

is

omitted, the

&9&>~sfo> alone

affixed to

theQ, the preceding

^ ^^o
^

being written above the consonant; thus,

I n & U other cases
is

~%T* ny<>

or

"^"^ ny>

^ ny-

where C or other

double forms are used, the subsequent vowel never to the double form
;

attached to the consonant only,

thus, #,

ryee &e.

SIGNS.

The

consonants have two auxiliary

letter

signs,

viz.

s~ r

and r~ n
,0

the former

is

used to represent the

/,

and the

latter the letter

n,

when
;

these letters
but,

the intervention of a vowel precede another consonant without

though

pronounced before the consonant,

urkoondco, the sun.

r,

is

written after
<o n,

it

thus,

9&E-C<J&

The

n also represents

at the

end of a word, thus

Jo^SJof"" pdyen, he she or it went.

PRONUNCIATION.
i

It

is

not difficult to communicate, to an English reader, the proper articula-

tion of those Teloogoo characters, of

which the pronunciation corresponds

exactly with the familiar sound attached to

some English

letter

but

it

is

of ^scarcely possible to convey, hi writing, a just conception

sounds altogether

foreign to the ear.

Grammar, by
it

instructing us in the theory of a language,

to write it

may
is

enable us to read

with intelligence, and

with correctness

but

no book can teach

the practical use of a language, and the voice of an instructor

full

necessary, to communicate the

articulation altogether

force

and tone of a

letter,

representing

some
.

unknown

to his pupil.

few concise rules, how-

ever, regarding the proper pronunciation of the

most

difficult

Teloogoo

letters,

may

assist

the student

but, without the aid of a native instructor, they will

fail to

afford satisfactory information. I shall accordingly attempt to explain

in the
avail

Roman
I

character, th'e sound attached to each

and, in doing so, shall

it is

myself of the system of Dr. Gilchrist, not less because

the best with

which

am

acquainted, than because most of those into whose hands this work

OF THE LETTERS.
may
fall will

probably have acquired a knowledge of it, by the perusal of some

of that Gentleman's

numerous and valuable

publications, on the Hindoostanee,

which

is

the universal language of the

Mussulmans throughout the Peninsula.

V
The
long,

WEL
is

S.'

duration of the sound of the vowels

continuous, the
;

divided into <&*J (3Q short,

&^~
^ e,

41

and ^)^

first

occupying one, the second two, and the last

to the initial

three
arid

moments of time

and these measures of sound apply both

connected forms of the vowels.

2o
o,

The vowels
;

&

u,

i,

&

oo,

^X>

TOO,

and

have each three measures of sound

;

namely, the short, the long, and

sound, but the extreme
ue,

the continuous

the vowel

2> loo

has no intermediate
;

short and continuous sounds only

long,

and the vowels &

and

cL

uo, are both

and continuous, but not short. The short and long vowels are considered so different as to be represented by distinct letters, but it has not been thought necessary to distiuguish the continuous measure of sound by separate
characters.

The

initial

&, and

its

connected form ^, have the sound ofu, as in tun, sun,

This sound must not be confounded with the

42

or of the o in come, done.

other sound given to u in English, as in cure, sure, &c.

The
initial

t3
?

and

its

connected form

have the sound of a,

.

as in all, call, tall,

do

.do. short

i,

as

in^,

kill>
i

do. long ee,

.do. short co,

as infect, keel.
as in wool.
as in moon, boon.
,

.do. long oo,

.do*

short

roo, as in rook.

.do. long roo,

as in room. as in look. as in they, or as as in the

do. short
do. short
.

loo,

c,

ay in may say

c.

do. long

c,

same words lengthened.

16
43

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
Each of
the long vowels should be

pronounced

full

and broad, and the

vowels,

voice should dwell

upon them twice

as long as

upon the short

which

should be sounded as short as possible.

44

When the

sound of the vowel

comes

after another vowel, it

is

expressed

by the consonant o
racter cocro
;

y, (written

without the
stone.
2^

u,)

and

that of 5

by the cha-

thus, T5"coo rai,

its

ODJ-O

fro ee

a palanqueen-bearer.

45

The long vowel ^ and

connected form "^ e in some cases, which must be

learned by practice, as they can scarcely be embraced by any rule, instead of

the pronunciation before mentioned as that generally attached to them, take

a sound nearly approaching to oCo-o

ya

and some what resembling the

;

final

sound produced by the bleating of sheep

thus also,
nearly as

hence, perhaps ^&>f meku a sheep

~^>
if

nelu, the ground,

and ^Q^>3 nerumao, a crime are pronounced

;

written ~i3~ej nyalu^ TxTC&3$x> nyarumco

and, in the

common

dialect, they are often so

erroneously written.
roo,

46

The sound above

Wvill as to their

*toW roo, rti5~ assigned to the vowels

&

2/

loo,

as

connected forms,

roo,

^~

roo,

and

2/ loo, is

that
;

which prois

perly belongs to these characters in the Teloogoo language

invariably given to

and which

them by

all

the natives in the northern provinces of the

/

Peninsula. In the middle provinces, the r and

are pronounced with the tongue

oo less distinctly, with

mor curved towards

inclination to the

the roof of the

moutb 3 and the

u,

an

sound of the French

and
to

to the

southward,

these

letters

assume the sounds of ri-ree-and lee-given

them by Sanscrit Grammarians.

CONSONANTS.
47
t

It is chiefly in

the pronunciation of the consonants that difficulty

is

exped,h,

rienced.

k./tu,

&g

h,

ch^h,

cv>

j h, $
:

t,h t

d h,
t

$>

tfr,

p.hy 3f b,h, the ten aspirated consonants, peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives; are

but they occur frequently in our language in the middle of compound terms ; the sound of the h flowing, in an easy gentle manner, immediately after that of the k, g,
not, at the

commencement of a word,

familiar to an English ear

d>

&c. which precedes

it,

without the least articulation intervening] thus,

OF THE LETT KK.<.

the sound of

17
in ink, horn.

^
^s*

k,

hu may be exemplified by that of the kh

do
do.
.

^ g,h
. .
.

do
do
........ do

gjt in dog,herd
ch^h in churchjdll.
tji

$
c

ch,h
tji.
rf,A

do
do- ....

in that, house.
a</, #er<?.

^>

do
do
.

d,h in

%
ou.
k, as

do
do.
S'
.

^
*

b,h.

bjt in abjior.
.p.h in
,

..

"V
it's

p,h

do

up Mil, and so

k,

and

double form

have the sound of the English

in.

in king-

48
49

<7,

has the hard sound of tj as

go, gun, &c. never

it's

soft

sound

as in

ginger &c.

^nw has the peculiar nasal sound of gn,

digne
~>
Sec.

as in the

French words ignorance,

50

and

23

have each two sounds.

in beats:

is

pronounced either hard,

as

as ch in 5eacA

51

or soft, as
torridzone.

ts

and

is

sounded either hard,

ts

in

jar

or soft, as dz in
:

The
when
-

soft

sounds

and

efe

are peculiar to the Teloogoo

and

therefore, to be

or

occur in words of Sanscrit origin, they are invariably

the

pronounced hard; thus, tS'bvS&ydJw chundrcondm

be pronounced tsundroondoo
;

moon,&t& 9&>
In

jndcondco, a fool, never can

dzudoondW'
is

Teloogoo, both the hard and soft sounds are to be found but the rule
for ascertaining

simple

which of the two

is

to
3

be given
s
i,

to these letters
e,

for if

^ or
are
jetli,

be followed by the connected vowels

respectively pronounced hard, as ch,
wrestler
ts
;

ee,

-=

-*

c,

or

^_ ue they

andj;

thus,

^^

chetu, by,

^||

but

if

followed by any other vowel, they always take the soft sounds

and

dz, as in

^H_ #

tsukkSru, sugar.

~>^

tsofm, a place.

>&>

dzodao,

a pair.
Sf nya, sounds like n before y, or as ni in the
^
t

word

onion.

52
53

&d

and

n are the harshest possible sounds of

t,

d,

and

n,

formed by
against the

curving back the tongue, and forcibly striking the under part of
roof of the mouth.

it,

18
54
t

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
& d and
n must be pronounced very
;

soft,

the tongue being protruded,

t

iu an easy manner, almost

duke,

between the teeth the sound of

in tube, of

in

and of n

in no, will convey

some idea of the proper pronunciation of

these letters.

/ The pronunciation of

<$

&d

and

<$

is

more

soft,

and that of

^ &
t
:

d and
all

w much harsher, than the sound of the English

letters t

d and n

but

endeavours to convey in writing an accurate idea of the correct pronunciation

of these letters must, I fear, prove very inadequate to the purpose.

56

$ p,

has the sound of;), as in pure.

b,

W
35b

b,

has the sound of

its

as in bold.
__%

m, and
y,
r,
/,

double form

m, have the sound of m, as in man.

.
,-

cOb

do

.C y,

.--.do

of y, as in yet.
of of
r,
I,

&
o
S>

do
do
do. ..........

ij r, ..... .do.
r>

as in river. as in billow.

/,

do

v,

vt

do

of

v, as in vain.

57

^.

sh has a very soft

smooth sound, between that of the

s in the

word

sing,

and of the sh
sound.

in shine, but approaching

more

to the former, than to the latter

58

&
^
^r

sh, is the

harshest sound of sh, as in push, busk

s,

Sec.

59
60

a,

has the sound of

as in sister;
h,

never as

in dismal, his, rosy

&c.

h,

has the sound of

as in ^az>.

When this
it

letter

immediately precedes

another consonant, as in the word y^^Ss^,

graphy, to be pronounced before
it
:

ought, according to the ortho-

but in Teloogoo so harsh a sound cannot

'&~

be admitted, they therefore place the sound of the

after that of the fol_

lowing consonant, and pronounce the word abovementioned Brumhit, instead

L

of

Bruhmu.
I

61

partakes of the sound of both

and r, and

is

formed by the under part of

:

the tongue curved

back against the roof of the mouth

treat, this letter is to

so far as regards the

as peculiar to the

language of which we

be considered

OF THE LETTERS.
pure Teloogoo
;

Vj
it

for

though

it

occurs in the Sanscrit Vedas,

It is

is

not to be

found in any other Sanscrit work.

dialects of the Peninsula.
vSx

common however

to all the

spoken

ksh Is a

compound

of s k

and *x

sh.

It is rather a

harsh sounfl resem-

62

bling the ct in the English words fiction fraction

e$ rru
is

&c

&c.

formed by a strong vibration of the

tip of the

tongue on that part

63

of the roof of the

mouth which

is

next the upper teeth, as in pronouncing the

words

real, run,

the voice dwelling forcibly

on the

first

letter.

The

letter

n or

never occurs except at the termination of a syllable

a word
it

64

concluding the

final syllable in

always represents the sound of m, as in

n, as in

mum
it is

in every other situation

it is

pronounced

none

except in Sanscrit

derivatives,

when

it

precedes a consonant included in any of the five Vurgus,

then to be considered a mere abbreviation of the particular nasal which

terminates the
accordingly.
C

Vurgu

to

which the consonant belongs, and

is

to be

pronounced
found always.
is

n occurs only in pure Teloogoo words end of a

syllable,
it

and like

n or m,

is

65

at the

represents a very obscure nasal sound, which

perhaps

peculiar to the language,

and can therefore be only imperfectly

illustrated

by

comparison with a slight indistinct pronunciation of the final n in the French

words

bon, non, &c.

This

letter is

found only in studied composition

but,

though omitted in

common

writings, the

sound of

this curious nasal

may be
k

discovered in the pronunciation of even the most ignorant natives.

The o n
C

or

m is

denominated "$y* ?&~ &>'$''> &x> full unooswarum and the

66

&7F-&>~fr*^$*xx) half unooswarum.

These are of two kinds, either radirule.

cal in the word, or inserted or

added by some grammatical

;

The o n

or

never can be changed into C n

but

if C

n be preceded by a short vowel, in

order to render the quantity of this vowel long, the c n

may be changed

into

oraorm;

thus,

5&o&> mundoo medicine never can become 3&c&>; but

?fex5V

kulungi, possessing,

may become

>oA

and

*fi~

9 3fo>C)&

Rammndm, Rama,

may become

20
67
h
is

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
peculiar to Sanscrit derivatives.
like a strong aspirated
it

In the middle of a word,

as

it

is

pro-

nounced

final

9oo^)5,

untuhpooru, but, at

the

end of a word,

takes after
thus,

it

the sound of the vowel which terminates the preis

ceding syllable

9o52

pronounced untuhu, not untuh

as above.

In Teloogoo,

it

seldom occurs except in the middle of compound words derived

in general possesses only the
first

from the Sanscrit; and therefore

two powers here explained68

of the

clear, distinct,

and correct pronunciation, and an easy deliberate manall

ner of speaking, are acquisitions of importance in

Natives,
"by

intercourse with the

whom

they are highly valued as marks of good breeding.

to

Euro-

peans are too apt

speak the Teloogoo in an abrupt, hurried, and conse-

quently vulgar manner, and to disregard the great distinction between the
long and short vowels, and the harsh and soft consonants
;

we

are in conse-

quenc often
Natives,
plexity
;

unintelligible,

or at least very obscurely understood by

the

who

are either too obsequious, or too timid, to explain their perto

and we are thus induced

attention alone
is

blame

their ignorance or stupidity,

when

our

own

in fault.

ORTHOGRAPHY.
69

Founded on

the principles above explained, nothing can be

more nicely de-

fined than the correct orthography of each Teloogoo

this language, indeed,
,

word.

The

writers

on

seem
to

to delight in a refined
;

minuteness and multiplilast

city of rule,

unknown

European authors

and the

deviation from
error in

their established

maxims would be considered an unpardonable

more

any

studied composition or literary work.

But, in the colloquial use of the lan-

guage, grammatical rule

'persons; and
as

is

or less disregarded, even

by

the

most learned
business,

the Natives in familiar correspondence, or

official

write as they would speak,

in

many

irregularities in

orthography are observable

common

writings-

The most
?/,

general are the following.

is

70

The consonant

<^

without any connected vowel,

i.

improperly used

instead of the initial vowel

OF THE LETTBS.
The consonant
cxxj

21
a,
viz.

y,

with the connected vowel

initial

oys~
)

Jg

incor-

71

rectly used, instead of the

vowel ~&>

ee.

The consonant
initial

OX)

y, with the

connected vowel

*, viz. c&>,

is

used for the

72

vowel

<^ e.

The

letter ox> y, with the

<*>

connected vowel ~^

e,

thus oso,

is

used instead

73

of the initial

&
v,

The consonant

with the connected vowel

v>

co,

viz- q), is incorrectly

74

used instead of the vowel &.

The consonant
used instead of &>

v,

with the connected vowel

^
c
"

thus

&*,

is

improperly

75

oo.

The consonant ^
used for ^>
o.

~=

v,

with the connected vowel

or

^ thus &*
> ,

or "^),

is

76

The consonant
is

u,
<j.

with the connected vowel

or

^TO,

thus

*>

or

"^7,

77

used instead of 2o

The vowel
used, at the

^5

u,

with

cxx5

y above mentioned,

thus

9cxx> }

is

improperly

78

commencement

of Sanscrit words, for the vowel ue

&

but the

use of 9ox> at the

commencement
with

of a pure Teloogo word

is

is

not incorrect.*

The vowel

&

u,

& above mentioned, viz. &&,

&
is

incorrectly used at

79

the beginning of Sanscrit words for

uo

although

it's

use at the com-

mencement

of pure Teloogoo

words
&c

proper.

The
&.

initial

vowels, *?*^ TOO

1CXXT r oo, and their connected forms

roc

80

p>

roo,

which are peculiar

to

Sanscrit derivatives, are often confounded

with the syllable 5b, or with the double form of

nected vowel
\> oo, thus,

r (viz-

ti r)

and the con-

&&

krooshnu

is

erroneously written krooshnu

and

vice versa.

CHAPTER SECOND.
OF THE
ELISION, INSERTION,
TION,
Possessing for the communication
semination
is

AND PERMUTAmedium
81

OF LETTERS.

the refined and inexhaustible Sanscrit, as the established

thought

to

of knowledge, to the few among whom it's disbe lawful ; Teloogoo writers have had little induce-

ment

to give

much

attention to the cultivation of their

;

own

language.

Their

literature consists almost entirely of poetry

and their Poets, desirous only to

please the ear, or, to flatter the vanity of the reigning Prince,

seem

to have

deemed the improvement of

their style a secondary

consideration.

The

ca-

dence of their verses, and the tones of the words composing them, have oc
cupied almost their exclusive attention.
of the

The consequence

has been a neglect

more important

qualities of composition,
itself,

and a studied conciseness of

has frequently the effect of

expression, which, though not inelegant in

rendering their sentences obscure.

the

At

the same time,

by a judicious union of
of the

sweetness of the original Teloogoo,

with the

majestic sounds

sonorous Sanscrit, they have succeeded in giving to the language a pleasing

variety of modulation,

which distinguishes

it

from

all

others current in the

Peninsula.

Another principal cause of this euphony is the extraordinary care that has been taken to prevent any incongruity of sound arising from the conjunction
of dissimilar letters.

82

The numerous

rules, for this

purpose, are scattered, in a

;

confused manner, through the works of

many Grammarians

and, as the folit

lowing
after,

is

the

first

attempt to reduce them to methodical order,

may

here-

perhaps, be found susceptible of great improvement.

24
I shall

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
endeavour
to explain, 1st the alterations
;

which take place in

letters

at the beginning

and end of words

and 2ndly, the changes which occur in the

first

middle of words.

But

it

is

proper, in the

place, to apprize

the Reader,

that the following rules are by no

means

rigidly

observed, except in studied

of the changes will

compositions.

In the

common
:

or colloquial dialect,*many

occasionally be found
cally,

it is

true that they are not there adhered to systemati-

but even in that dialect they are seldom entirely neglected.

it

The

Student,

however, may find

more convenient

to refer occasionally to this

chapter as

he advances, than,

at the

very commencement of his labours, to enter into

niceties of the language.

some of the most perplexing

OF THE ALTERATION OF LETTERS AT THE COMMENCEMENT AND

END OF WORDS,
83
In treating of this subject, the whole of the words in the Teloogoo lan-

guage are divided into two

classes

one termed s'sfew

kululoo, the

other

{&>}?$
84

(So i?r\e>ex>

drootupritkrovtoolo)'

The

class

termed

^ew kululoo

includes, 1st the singular

and plural nomiit)

natives of

all

nouns and pronouns, (except <<& land "WrS) he she or

all

and

the oblique case, or what I have termed the inflexion, of

nouns and pro-

nouns, both in the singular and plural number.

2dly.

The
of,

"SfcoSf postpositions <^c>?f_ or

55

of,

3cn>9^

or ^o8o5) towards,

on account

^Cc*

through,

~^&> from,

&&

through, S)Sc^cS5o^oo respecting*

of,

&s5bo on account of,

,

^^s5oo or ^oStfs&o for, on account %

*"

&P&
-=>

or

3dly.

^ or ^ expressive of doubt. denoting emphasis, and

Indeclinable particles, like
&>,

away JromThe final significant

letters

or

expressing interrogation,

or

4thly.
5thly.

S'S, 3&

efe,

&er*>, SJo-Jfcr,

^otf,

&c

All Interjections, and vocative cases.

6thly.

The

words,

S^Sfc

now>

&3g&>

then, ^SSjSfr

when

OF THE CHANGE
7thly.
gular,

.OF

LETTERS.
and third persons

25
in the sin-

Every part of the verb; except the

first

and the third person neuter in the

tenses,
;

plural, of the first

aorist
;

forms of the past

and future

and of the affirmative

;

the

first

person singular of the

negative aorist

the infinitive

and the present verbal

participle terminating in
relative participle

*&
in

and,
or

&

when followed by vowels only, the mdifinite <&>, or the root when used for this participle.

ending

The Negative

verbal participle, which always -ends in

is

classed

both

in.

85

the S'sfew kululoo, and the <Jfc>#

^S/^S&ex)
he she or
it,

drootuprukrcotooloo.

The nominatives &(&

mentioned above,

2,

U"r&
;

and the several parts of the verb

all

86

as exceptions

together with

the other words in the lanSf

guage, not included in the foregoing specification of the

the numerous class denominated <J&>j

ex>

kululoo ,

form

e^S$^&ew drwtuprukrootoolw.
in the class of S'Sfew
kululoo,',

Every Teloogoo word, whether included

"

or
'

87

<J&,

^S^ex> drootuprukrootooloo,
I shall
first

naturally terminates in

some one

of tho

connected vowelsof these words

is

point out the changes which occur

when any
;

followed by another

commencing with an

initial

vowel
is

and

shall then explain the alterations that take place,

when any of them

followed

by another beginning with a consonant.

In Teloogoo, two vowels never can

come
is

in

contact

therefore,

when

88

word terminating
with an
initial

in a

connected vowel

followed by another commencing

vowel, there is either-the change termed by Grammarians Sundjii,

is

or a consonant

inserted between the two words

letters

unless the initial vowel be

loo,

one of the Sanscrit

"WM

roo,

K&T'roo, and "2

which

at the

beginning

of a word, are to be considered the same as consonants.

The consonants
mer of
if it

inserted,

when Sund^hi does not

class

co occur, are

if

the fortf

89

the two

words be included in the

termed

"^ex> kuluho, and

;

belong to the

^&,#^S^&)ex3
is

drootuprukrwtoolw

but, which ever of

it's

these two consonants

inserted,

it

chang.es the following initial vowel into

it,

connected form, and, coalescing with

forms, in conjunction with

it,

one

syllable.

26
90
Sund\hi
is

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
the elision of the connected vowel terminating the
first

word, and

of the initial vowel

commencing the following word, and the

;

substitution of
in the ex-

the connected form of the latter vowel in lieu of both

as

shewn

amples hereafter given.

91
Sttnd,hi never takes place unless the first

word terminates
oo,

in

one of the

three short connected vowels

"

u,

i,

or

*o

except in a few particular

instances noticed hereafter.

FINAL,
92
It

may

be adopted as a general rule that a word terminating in

initial

followed

by another commencing with an

"tkcO?^ that grazed,

vowel,

may

at option have Sundjii; thus,

the

and 53q) a cow, make ~&:'&~& $)

cow that grazed, by

dropping the

final

for both the connected

<* n,

"&&# and form of & viz.

in

the initial
o
;

&

in &$), and substituting

which, uniting with the preceding

coalesce-

makes the

syllable

^~, by means of which the two words

optional,

But

as

the Sundjii of final

\ululoo,

^
is

and ~&>r^

is

included in the class of s

take place,

ew

sk^f^and &$), when Sun d,hi does not

become

"So.^cS"

<S&-$), by the insertion of cx

between the two words, and the change of

&

in

the latter to .it's connected form

cfccro,

o,which, uniting with o**, forms the syllable

coalesce, as

by means of which the words

above stated*

EXCEPTIONS.
93

Words

of the class termed <&>;

&$j&$ffi$

drootuprukrootooloo, ending

in ^, never admit of
after such words,

SandM-

By
for

rule 89, therefore,

& n
?

is

always inserted

when

the following one begins with an initial vowel.

;

The

word ^oS' more,

22o"13&> 94

is

excepted

adding to
tf

it

*Sx>
*>

what

we may

say, either

w hat more ?

by inserting

n,

or ^o~lf

by Sundfii.

Vocative cases ending in

and the nominative case singular of pure

v,

Teloogoo nouns denoting women, and terminating in

Sundjii,

do not admit of

when followed by named

word commencing with an initial vowel. Being of

c**5

the class

?T^e>D kululco, such words assume

as explained in rule

89

thus,

I^CCT

a tvoman

nd

sf^&

he she, or

it

gave,

make,

OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERSa

27
'

woman

gdve, never

fi

SopcS*

O Krishlnaf
!

and

SJ

here,

make ^S^c3ooo^f_ aStf^ O KrisMna

come here;

never

^^^^^^^5%^.

FINAL.
A
where

word terminating

in

followed by another beginning with an

initial

!>,-

vowel, does not, in general, admit of Sundjii; thus

;

$&
make

a ^wz/e, and

<^

'&

&
in-

cannot by Sund hi become

t

SfjgSli^

but

?f^Sb_?P;i8S zMcre
STJ^ being

w Me

Awz/e

by

cxo in the inserting

manner above explained,

cluded in the class

named

?fsfex> kululoo.

EXCEPTIONS.
In the
ending in
first

form of the perfect tense of verbs, the second person singular

>,

96

or

the

first

person plural terminating in 8&>, an(j the second

person plural ending in

vowel, invariably have
the gods,

8,

when followed by

word commencing with a

and
final
(

Sund,hi> thus
tf/i0M

(OSo-ffiQS) thou servedst,

make

iOS)c)e9SJSfc>bo

servedst the gods,

by dropping

and

initial 65,

and substituting, in

lieu of both, the

J

connected form of 65
55",

viz.

"% which, joining with the preceding

u,

forms the syllable

by means of

which the two words

In the same

coalesce.

tense, the first person singular terminating in &,

and the third

;

97,

person plural ending in 9, may, or

may

not, have Sund.hi, at pleasure

thus,

l_

the have saluted, and 65-j&g&>cO

Unperishable,

make

l^^J_

//foue saluted the Unperishable (Vishtnoo)

Ae

Crotfo,

make

sS'S^S'x&SbeA)

^ GoJs came

^^9
;

^ey came, and

the Sundjii, however,

being optional, these phrases

jf

may have

another form-

We may say ^^^J^_ &

the in-

AaW saluted the Unperishable (Vishtnoo) ^^QcCo^b&^x) ?5-I^3b^ Gods came; here <^ n is inserted in the first phrase, because\~oto>; 9 is
cluded in the \&j
sentence, because
*$i So

;\C^)O
is

drooluprukrootooloo

and c00 y

in

the

second

^"^9
? the

of the class

named

^v

ex) kululoo.

'The pronouns 65S

what

^^

S5S

^ ow ^a
,

this,

^S) ^^e,

^^ z/cA?
to,

^S)

98

word 53o^

again, more, and the postposition

have

28
optional Sund.hi;
thus,

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
e>a and
>

make
HJ/MC/*

&~&> or &>>%
are these 9 in the

what

is

that?

and

&>
say,

make

&s
wore?

or

9>o>S)

same manner

we may

"-^r^lS^

or "-CcOrSftOToSX) wAal y^as Jeen done? 35ox)SX> or,

T^SSoo^S^^

or

Tr J5bo$&'^f$9
)

he, she

or

z<

^aue

to

Rama* In
ooo

all

these phrases, except the

;

last,

when Sundjii does

not take
in the

place,
class
i,

is

inserted

because each of the

;

first

words are included

N>

termed JT$ex>
it is

hululoo

but in the

last

sentence,

is

inserted after

because

of the class
in 9
?
,

named (&}*$ \3>j&\&ex)

drootvpruhrootooloo.
to adjectives, or

99

Words ending

if

followed by the word e9x>tf added

how much

have Sund,hi at option, thus;

">& and

^o*

5 ^"

make
or

3d5box>?5 c/^/".

In the same way, we say <v)O~Soe

much flour

FINAL.
100
It

may be

taken as a general rule that words ending in

V>,

followed by

others beginning with an initial vowel, invariably have Sundjii ; as Tys&DcSSb

llama, and

^^^f&

he, she,

or

it

gave,

become TT'SfoDoSlS^Rxj

Rama

gave.

Innumerable other instances might be given.

EXCEPTIONS101

The
Sto^bo

accusatives

^f&X me;
^o&>
i

^^^ thee, *$&^ him,

^#&
for, &>
in that,

her, or
to,

it,
i

U s,

you, &S&3,

thenii the postpositions

&o&>

the

words <^o&>

in which,

#/, ^9o2^

and the particle

&> added

to the roots of verbs to

form the present verbal

vowel, but
it

participle,

have also Sundjii,

when
and
*&

followed

by an

initial

is

entirely optional; thus ^"rfo^. me,

&ex>s$x> nffe

MOM, make tfl3^e>3B$

thus he, she, or
if

or S(^^J*4xiaio rw/e

MOM

me,

speaking,

^&$cfo

sa7, make

9&)k>!03o

or
/ie {5

^^P^

speaking, he, she, or

"

# /A5

saz'c?,

"S^-i&> saying, and I^sri^c2fc

make ISSjj-x&'Sr^c&o when SundM does not

drootupritkrootooloo,

or

3e3>j>-C&^)"(2r^j:2^2 Ae
first

saying.
all

In these phrases,

take place, the

words being

\&&\&f^

^^

&

is

inserted between

them and the words which

follow.

OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS.

The
first

Zif

and third persons singular in the affirmative

aorist, the indefinite

102

participle

in

&,

or the root used for that participle

*o

and nouns

in the accusative

singular ending in

when deprived of

their drootuprukrootica affixes,

never
now,

admit of Sand, hi $

as

j& I come, have

come, or will come, and

^^2*0

make

T^|oS5>j>2Sb

come, have come, or will come now.

^"^^

he comes, has

come, or will co me, and ^So^So now,

or will come now.

make

S5"-Kk^s3>j>& fa comes, has come,

^axo-lfc that protects,

e

-^C5bi

the'god,

and

ocrsr;&

I have meditated, make

the protecting

lxOafc)3';:

5bce>c-a'Sro &> /

have meditated on
of
it's

God.

"75"5&o the accusative of "G^SxttC^ib

affixes,

Kama, deprived
or
it

drootuprukrootica
:
l

and
it

-H<&\o":3i&

he, she,

saw,

make

&

he, she,

or

saw Rama.

All words ending in any of the short vowels, invariably have Sundjti,
followed by
<^C<J& full, S9oe

when

103

as much

as,

^^

at the rate of,

and &&> a leaf;

or by the words

^^. an elder brother, ^^

to

a mother, ^9
,

an

elder sister,.

e^cOog
fyc.

a father, ^>_g a mother-in-law,

proper names
to

^^ a father
and
<^C<3Sb

K>S5

a grand mother
;

when added

to

express familiarity or kindness

thing,

thus,

1*^
a

the hand, held so as

contain
;

any

full,

make

I3l3c<j&

handfull;

S^6

an areca nut
;

and 9o& as much

and
<^<o

as,

make o^S'oS' as
<

large
at

as an areca nut
the rale

<^S5^Q

eight,

at the rate

of,

make ^ &~*u~z&)

of eight

<^^
T

Soobee, the proper

! ~e3^63

name

of a

woman, and

^^

mother,

make
a

^^^

friend Soobee
fl

a Palmyra

(in the inflected case)

and

&&
104

leaf,

make !T'&r >o

Palmyra-leaf.

Nouns
?,

of Sanscrit derivation, even ending in the short connected vowels ",

in the nominative singular

or

^, which
C&bj
S$iv>,

do not adopt the Teloogoo termina;

tions

or $), never admit of Sund,hi

thus,

00^^,

a swan, and <^&

which ?
grass,

make
<>5^

^OpS^)^
ivhich?

rohich is the

swan

2$^e~ durb,ha, a kind of sacred

z>

and

make
7<e,

>$"e-c3oa to/'c^
it

^*e

durljia?

Sj-*8

<^ e ,(70^

Vishtnoo, and oOC~^r&

sAe, or
first

went,
is

make ^"6coC~7??&

Vishtnoo -went.

In

all

these instances, the

word

included in the class of

30
and therefore,

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,
as Sund.hi does not take place,
*> is inserted

between

it

and the

following word, according to rule 89.

105

Words ending
'

in

any of the long vowels never have Sund.hi, nor do the short
2/

"*

vowels

or

admit of Sand, hi, except when followed by the words

specified in rule 103.

initial

When

followed by any other words beginning with an

if

vowel, words of such terminations,

they be ySfc/Cf^

3^i3bex>

drootu-

prukrootoolno insert

^
in

n,

and

if

&% &>

kululoo coo.
class

As

the
?

first
is

word

each of the following phrases belongs to the

it

termed

coo

inserted between

and the word which

follows.
is

a
0:0
a)

W oman,

and

<*>&

where? make ^55"erc&>a where

the

woman

being inserted between

its

#>tr
,

an j

oift

changes the following

it,

initial

vowel

of <^& to

connected form

and uniting with

;

forms one syllable c&>,

by means of which the two words coalesce

he, she, or
it

SS^S a Palanqueen, and

he,
she, or
it

&>

mounted,

make 3>&sc&r

&)

mounted

the

Palan-

queen; S5"^x coloured, and 2ol3 a garment

make Sl&c&MiS a
;

coloured

garment; ~o night, and *>o<6

ancl 2oJ5qJ) beauty,

lustre,

make ~oc^>o5p moonshine

S>

"^>

Me

make ^>^>o?5^) personal beauty;

</ ie

money, and

donation,

make ^ooo-oS)
,

donation of money

Me woow, and
named

or

crro.se,

make

^ Al

cCooSoooo^itk Me waoon arose.

The
\&3j*$
[

first

word

in

each of the following phrases being of the class

&)^$)ZX)
follows.

drootuprukrootooloo,

& n

is

inserted between

it

and the word

which

$3S ~^
he,

slowly,

and &C~7\&>
;

he, she, or

it

went,

make

!%C^

sheit or

it

went slowly

$ n being

inserted between

ScSi^A* and

"^ changes the following initial vowel & of &c~7\;& into it's connected form , and uniting with it, forms one' syllable ~^, by means of which the two words
coalesce;

the accusative
i

-&>tl\o" 3f& )~$~e^ the Creator, and

:

he,

she,

or

it

saw,

make S3!^'r) JUo~T3r&

he, she, or
:

sazy the

Creator;

^^

(9orf,

in

the accusative case, and -&i JUo'

Ae,
5//e,

3f&

he, she, or

Saw,

make ^ K^jA.o'SrW
(in the accusative case),

or

it

&aio

God; ?^?^J Me Goddess of learning,

OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS.

and 9<&~^r&
the
he,

31
he, she, or it

she, or
;

it

asked,
the

make

&x>

<* $~J(&>
>

asked

Goddess of learning

J*

moon

(in the accusative case)

and tser^io-O

having seen,

make

"ST'er^lo-O

having seen the moon. It must here be parti-

cularly observed that the accusatives

for the sake of

afcovementioned are, in the

first

place,

example, deprived of their drootuprukrootica affixes.

is

When
is

a word, both ending and beginning with a vowel,

repeated, there

106

Sund

hi; thus,

&Z>^an

elder brother,

when

repeated,

becomes

^^J^.
!

bro-

tlier !

brother !

^S

what, in the same manner, becomes <&~&>2to what

she or
initial
it,

wliat !

The pronoun
9&
9

&&

when added,
;

in

composition,

to other

words, 107

frequently loses the

she,

&

thus,

"S^ c ^)

a husbandman, a

labourer,

and

become,
;

in composition, ~5~c <$)8> a female labourer,

^>,

by the

elision of

in

9&

but in consequence of ~3~C^) ending in

Sundjii also

may

take

place, according to rule 100,

and the two w/>rds in question will then become

the

TPCXSa

in the

same way S^SSb &3 a man of

,

Comtee

cast,

and

^>^> she,

make

b&3& a woman of the Comtee

also say

cast,

but as the elision of

is

optional,

we may

Inflexions
kululoc, affix

^S$b3cSoa by inserting "^ or ending in V)

^,
(

coo

according to rules 95 and 89. included in the class of s"sfew 108

in composition

though

n when followed by postpositions, or prefixed

to other no.uns
<^;&><b

commencing with an

initial

vowel, thus, ~&&x>. Rama, and

opposite,

m^er^^^^^opposite Rama, ~r>x> a serpent,

a serpenfs bones.

bones,

make ir&3ol35Sx)^ ex)

Having thus endeavoured

to explain the
is

changes which take place, when a 109

art

word terminating
initial

in a

connected vowel

followed by one commencing* with

vowel, I shall proceed to state those which occur,

is

when

word ending

with a connected vowel

If a

followed by one

commencing with

a consonant.
in

word beginning with a consonant bo preceded by another included

110

the class termed

Sv ex>

hululoo, there

is

no

elision or insertion

of

lettflfs

and

permutation takes place in the following instances only.

32
Il
I

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
Nouns
in the

nominative case,

even when used accusatively, and

all

parts
then,

of the verb ending in

^S5^><&> now, <^S3^&>
letters

&>

2&>,

and

&

together with the words

9>>j><&>

w hen

? preceding a

word beginning with any

;

of the

hard

preceding

&&'&, change them respectively to X# *^2& she or it will not go, changes the *>
riches
will not

thus,

^>*X> wealthy

of S3"^&> into

3 v,

and

we say ^ >*>*> &>

-ST^CcSb he
is
is

disappear

in the

same manner, c^^)-^3

tfte

going,

and S">8 a robber, make sW^fcSft^^C&KgS

she,

roooer

going

^^) ^^^
make
e,

or

it

is

departing,

and "&& **> /h'tf ndship, make

sb^afcf^a^OSto friendship is
or
it

departing;

ef>55>j>&b

^eW} and -tf^c^or&Ae, s/j^

;

went,

9S5^&b^>63o;&
it

she,

or
ij

it

then went
Ae,

^So>j><b now,

and

she, or

went,

make

^S3>j>2&&

cs5or&

.<?fo,

or

it

now

went.

112

But
from

Sanscrit derivatives, preceded

rule,
is

by pure Teloogoo words, are excepted

to

this

and are not subject

any change

because the nature of

coalescing in orthoit

such words

considered so different, as to prevent their

graphy
t>

thus,
:

&<5

a master, and

?x>?%o~:d>&>he) she, or
rT>
;

was pleased, make

fbc&o he,
this is

5^ 5'5b?^o' Sr^> the master ivas pleased

this

never

<S

(5X'5b?<io":3f& _

man, and ^T^Ct&jCi&D a virtuous man, make SXSfc^T^^e&^c&o

Nevertheless,
if

a virtuous man.

two words both of Sanscrit derivation come

together, the general

rule holds

good

because, in that case,

:

both the words

are of the

same kind, we
:

therefore

3?& say T73$x>c2>X5bro'

never "O^S&oC

<&>'5b?!o" 3?&

Rama was pleased.

113

When

tive conjunction,

two pure Teloogoo substantives are joined together by a copulanot expressed, but understood, and the latter word^begins
the

with any of
fQ${$&o5j
;

hard

letters

^&&

So,

these letters are severally changed to

legs

thus, "5^e>3

leg,

and "Te&>ex> hands, make 'S^ew e^<3bew

brothers,

and

hands

^^
elder

gSaSx^exJ
*

an elder brother, and ^^M^exj younger and younger brothers.

into

make

^^^
S5

Although
,

may be changed

-f

into

&> into

&

5 into
.

&

and
:

into

the rarerse of this rule does not hold goud, these letters are not
?f,

interchangable

K cannot

by any means become

nor X$, "$

&c.

The

first series
first,

may

be converted into the second,

but the second can never be converted into the

OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS.

If a word

33
***

commencing with any

of the five hard letters

class

&

~&

>,

be pie-

114

ceded by another included in the

krootooloo,

termed

^^e^^iS^^bew
is

drootuprui
;

both permutation and insertion of letters invariably take place

but

if

the latter word begin with any other consonant, there

optional*

insertion only,

and

it is

When a word included in the \&j & \&i3^&)Vd

*

drootuprukrootooloo precedes
letters

115

another word commencing with any of the five hard

'%>

&

C"

So, it

invariably changes these characters respectively, into the soft

letters

XK

&

w,

and
?&

if it

end

in 9

or ,3.

it is

requisite to insert
;

between the two words, or

if it

terminate in any other letter

but

if it

already end in

or j&, these
.

terminations cannot again be affixed, for the repetition would be monotonous

at the

same time,

if

the i&>

*$\&i

^>ex>

drootuprukrootooloo'end in a short
or &>, but only c
if it

vowel, either o or C

may be

substituted for the

termi-

nate in a long vowel; thus,

~&$v

(the accusative plural of

all
it's

~&&
or

God)

deprived, for the sake

of example, of

drootuprukrootica affixes, antf

I served, make

^^W^^8>Rl or ~sT#e;o^>-a8<o
the initial s
in

-&$
into
i

by changing &> and between the two words, or A, inserting

IzsS&i o

I served

the Gods,

of

^)-;0

consequence of the 'o

being short, substituting either

o or C

for &>.

Any

of the

^ ^^
may
but
if it

^^drootuprukrootooloo preceding

word commenc-

1 1

ing with a consonant different from the five hard letters, without causing

permutation,
other vowel
;

at option affix

if it

end

in. 9 5

or

^1, or f&

if it

end

ii\

any

already terminates in

or & these affixes are not again

either
<o

to be added, because the repetition

would be monotonous:

n or

may be

affixed, in lieu

of $ or

&, provided the consonants & & $

if-

& are not

the initials of the following word; and

v>

the following

word begins with

3& S-

^&$
X-

&
rf

in place of

R)

or

^^ w
tf into

r is

converted into

into

- fc,

into

^
5

and

So into

W,

but, as befor

observed of another rule, the reverse of these changes does not 'hold good.

34

TKLOOGOO GRAMMAR.
if it

provided the drootuprukrmlmloo terminate in a short vowel, but long vowel r we

all

end

in a

may

insert C n only

thus, deprived for the sake of

example of
~7^

^58 an arootuprukrootica affixes, the accusative

or conquered,
;

enemy, and

!)>$> /
of ^59 or

won

make t98$~KO-)&
or

by

affixing

in consequence
affixing
;

ending in

or e>81?e)-a9

e>8-~^0-a8
affixing

by
o or
C

o n ori~;

es8ol?)-aSS> or ^>8c~XO-a:0 by
affixes are optional,

or as the whole of these

the

we may say simply e95~^>-8<0 / conquered

of
all
t>

enemy

thus also deprived, for the sake of example,

the accusative

drootuprukrootica affixes,
they
killed,

TT'dxc&O
by by

Giants,

and 3 oc-g)7T
:

<5b

make
or

~&\
are

affixing &>, or

T^vlxJobotfo&o-a^Sb
;

TP'&Joo

affixing

n or i~

or as the whole of these affixes

ffoy killed the
1

optional,

we may

say simply
affix

~G*&'&vSpoo--^>&>
C,

Giants;

but

we cannot

here

o or

and say Tr

>

&&oo<Son3
or
all
its

5b d r ~S^<&

?oooc3Jo<So->l3" 5o, because 4> follows, and

letters
affixes,

the affixes o

precede the

XK

to 55o

& &

>cdx
first

only

deprived of

drootuprukrootica
to

the 3d person in the

it

form of the past tense of ^"^^

o,

come

viz-SS'liS^

he, she, or

came, and TS^OVSOCI^

coxcomb,

make

^f&~C5~

olp?ioCi2b

by
C
;

affixing &>, or
or, as the

^"^o-fs^o^^c^
we cannot
j

or

^"^C-cjoo^soca^b by

affixing

o Or

whole of these affixes are optional,

affix

wemay
or
i~",

say simply 55"^^ "i^ov^C^b

a coxcomb came, but

&

and say "

r \'m~ "W 6fi oQ&cSfe or

because

these

affixes

never precede the consonants

Certain masculine nonns in

*^>

C-5^>

form their accusative singular either by

altogether
;

changing C&b into

>

or

by dropping

C^
to

thus,
it

Nom

T^S&DC^

Rama, Accus: l^s&oiO

an exception
prukrootica
to rules

or l^sSixD: in the latter case,

must be observed, as
\> the

115 and U6,-that

such accusatives in
;

drootu,

affix

is

to be added, instead of the affix ?&

thus, ~S"S&o

one

of the accusatives of

Rama, and never "^S5bo^)K^D-5)^ I served Rama.

">>>

served,

make

lTS&o<C'K

"

)>;>?$

OF TllE CHANGE OF LETTBS.

Nouns ending
;

).">

in

c&>S$

change

this

termination optionally into

"^^o

O r 118

thus,

S&DjgcCd3w a pearl,

'<SoOo^oo a bracelet,
oo

^8cCo5Soo

&c.

make

_ Jf SSiwj^Soo or SSiwetC^oo

Or

oo .

>oo

Or

this rule

is

also applicable

to

nouns

in

c&b.

ft03--OF THE CHANGE OF LETTERS IN

THE MIDDLE OF WORDS.

The changes which

and
consist chiefly of

take place in

the middle of words are few and easy,

contractions which

occur naturally

in a

quick pro-

nunciation-

Present verbal participles ending in *& preceded by r&,

the

optionally drop
saying,

119

^ of <&, or sometimes
&&>&
hearing,
. -i5"?Sb-iS3

change the &> into o, thus,

9i$j-v&>
-

seeing,
-c5b

make

&&

- s

Srfr^, or

&o&

going, $J^&>-&> entering,

and some other verbal paticiples do not

"o in ?&.

change &> into o, but they frequently drop the

Verbal

Roots of more than two

frequently drop the

syllables, of

which

^
;

ew

&o

5b or 120

few are medials,

of these syllables
zoee/?, ?o
>

thus,

~ld'&>&>t3
;

plait, to twist, often

becomes

~^^^

and

<^5Sb -Z& ;
<^o

cry,

^^^
nor

but

if,

in
"O

such roots, one short

takes place
;

syllable only precede

to

or

few,

no

elision of the

thus,

&>2&-b

wipe, cannot

become

e$j<So^,

The words

^)& not^ t3^)^b

then)

"4)2^

when? optionally drop

the

o 121

of the middle syllable, and

become respectively

^)
da
is

55^)
(K>

J^).
Cs.

Nouns
ly

of three syllables, of
N>

which the middle one

;

&> ew or

<2Sb,

freqt^nt- 122

drop the

of these syllables
;

thus, -)<yo^ a parrot, ~$^tx>

a watei^cottrse,

make "^^
6

"^T>e;

and

this elision

of

takes place even in other words;

thus, "S^ftoST ?!)

buffalo 1&T""iW(i)0 a

species ofjiger,

sometimes become

in the

middle or end of a
Y//,

word

is

often changed into

thus,

\*fijfo

J23

become

also

36
124

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
have

Many Teloogoo words which

lose
it

11
cfr

r in the first syllable, frequently or >$) an ear-ring,

is

in the vulgar dialect

thus,

^; Ao
6 ^)

com-

monly both written and pronounced 125 The reader need not be surprized if,
meet with some examples good authority.
so

or

&*&.
studies,

in the course of his

he should

in opposition to

the foregoing rules,

supported by

On

no part of Grammar are the opinions of Teloogoo authors

with respect to the changes attempted to be explained

much

at variance, as
:

in this chapter

the ingenuity

and subtilty with

which

each combats the

arguments of his opponent, have gained for every celebrated writer on Gram-

mar some adherents and

;

as authors rigidly

observe the precepts of the parti-

cular

Grammarian

whom they
to

select for their guide, a

comparison of almost

any two books

will exhibit

some discrepancies not

select those opinions
itself is

to

be reconciled. Every

endeavour has been used

which are most generally

received at present, but the subject

native

so intricate, and the opinions of

Grammarians respecting
to illustrate it

it

so contradictory, that a foreigner

feel diffident of success.

who

at-

tempts

must necessarily

CHAPTER THIRD.
The the foregoing pages,
distinct heads.
1st.

words

of the

Teloogoo language, formed of the

are classed

letters treated of

in

126

by

Sanscrit
or, as it is

Grammarians under four

more emphatically termed,
;

~o$S&o

Deshyumoo,

^^^

^^

Utsu Deshyumoo, ihepure language of the land

2d.

Tutsumumoo, Sanscrit words assuming Teloogoo terminations. 3d.

Tudb.huvumoo, Teloogoo corruptions of Sanscrit words, formed by the substitution, the elision, or addition of letters
;

and 4th.

\^/v>^3&C3&o Grdmyumoo,

Provincial terms, or words peculiar to the vulgar.

the t5

To

these

we may

also

add

^""?^^

x)
,

'

Unyu Deqjiyumoo,
first

or

words from other countries, somtimes

and
comprizing,
according to the

given as a subdivision of the

definition of ancient writers,

Class,

words adopted from the dialects current in the

Canarese, Mahratta, Guzerat, and Dravida provinces only, but

cluding several of Persian,

now

also in-

Hindoostanee, and English origin.

In each of the three following Chapters, which treat of substantive-nouns

127

and pronouns, of adjective -nouns and pronouns, and of the verb, the ISVcs&o
will be distinguished

ing the &i\^S>x> and

from the &<3>J55boo W0 rds but all abservations regarde3?Sel3'C3S wor ds will be found in the Chapter
:

respecting substantives

because

the
;

words of the

two

last

mentioned

classes consist chiefly of substantives

and the reader, reasoning from anaunder that head,

to

logy, will find

it

easy to apply the rules given

adjectives,

and verbs.

38
128

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
The
rfiTMS&CSSbo, or provincial terms, are
contractions or corruptions of
;

than a separate class of vocables pure Teloogop words, rather

fore

have there-

deemed

it

better to offer, in

the course of

the

work,

such

remarks

respecting

them

as occasion has suggested, than to collect the

rales regarding

them under any separate head.

UB

STANTI VE
THE

S.

1ST OF

POSTPOSITIONS-

Before entering on the subject of declension, a few preliminary observations

are necessary, respecting that very useful class of words, by
the various cases of the

means of which
this

substantive nouns

and pronouns, in

language,

are formed.

129

English substantives are declined by prefixing to them, in the singular and

plural numbers, certain particles,

termed prepositions. The cases of Teloo

in

goo nouns and pronouns are formed

particles

the

same manner, except that the

it
;

follow the noun, instead of

preceding

hence,

have termed

them postpositions. In Teloogoo, we would not

^say with swords, by men, of

me; but
130

^J&e;^ 3&&>s3a^&
-

i^>^>o?f_

swords with, men by, me

of.

When

a preposition

accompanies an
in the

English word
;

which
it

is

liable to
it's

inflexion, the

word cannot stand

form
:

nominative case
I,

must assume

inflected or oblique

we cannot say of

to I,

&c. but of me, to

me,

&c. In the same manner, in Teloogoo,

nearly the same form in the

notwithstanding

some nouns have

case, yet as all

inflexion, as in

the nominative
it

nouns and pronouns may be

a general rule, that

said to

admit of inflexion,

may
'

be

laid

down

as

when
;

followed by

postpositions, they cannot continue in

the nominative case

their oblique

by, some of the

postpositions, they are converted into

this

form

by others, either into

simple inflected state, or into

into the accu-

the dative

and by a few, derived from verbs, they are changed

sative case.

The

following

is

list

of the principal

Teloogoo postpositions.

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD INTO
1'f's

39
OBLIQUE FORM.

<3oo?f

of',

the sign of the genitive case.

;

to,

for

the sign of the dative case.

er"

in; the sign of the local ablative.

~3> -

~>$

by, by

means of; the sign of the instrumental

ablative.

e"~

eT'Si -

e^S^ef

with, along with

in, by,

the sign of the social ablative.

with-

.loithin, inside-

'---by,
to,

by means
for.

of,

from.

.for,

on account

of, about.

>S$co

..,on account of, for.

'...respecting.
in.
like.

through.
-

x>o-

.from,

away from.
IN

FOUND

BOOKS ONLY.

with, along with.wi/A, together with, for.

by,

from.
by means
of.
IT*S

by,

CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD EITHER INTO OR INTO THE DATIVE CASE.
........out-side.

OBLIQUE FORM

upon, above-...below, under-

o^D^C

r^^55b

between.

25

40
~3
>

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
?f .................. ...... behind,

after

13oa>cl ....................... behind.

tO&Dj&TT -<02&>o .......... against,

,

opposite*

CONVERTING THE PRECEDING WORD INTO THE ACCUSATIVE CASE.

.

Scr-2>H- - />8cS>

foQo-& towards, on account

of.

FOUND
.

IN

BOOKS ONLY.

....through.
.......

.from, by.

through.

131

Under

the following rules, the whole of these words

in

may be added

to

any
is

noun or pronoun, placed

stated above to require.

the particular case which the postposition

132

The

postpositions

o the s signs of the dative case, are not used promis;

cuously with* any inflexion

or

is

added only

to inflexions

terminating in
;

thus, inflexion

^9

Vishtnoo, dative
s\

^8l

to

Vishtnoo

inflexion
;

$\
o

The Goddess of prosperity, dative ^.^i^

to the

Goddess of prosperity
""&>

and

to inflexions ending in any other letter, inflexion

to

stick,

dative

stick,

inflexion

S>

&

a
to

ruler, dative

<S^>0
it is

ruler, inflexion Sfo/fosS"

woman, dative Sfo/foS^

a woman: but

requisite to insert the syllable

between

o anc a \\ inflexions ending in

|

N>

"^

or

as,

inflexion

Rama,

dative

TT S5ixD^6
3

to

Rama,

inflexion

65o?5s^o

beauty,

dative

JSs^xD?5o to

beauty.

133

/The postposition

is

added only *
^>; thus,

to

the inflexions of nouns denotin^ O

inanimate things ending in

we may
*o
;

say

-^^x$

in the paper,

because the inflexion

~3^s&j
ends in

ends in

but we cannot add

to

S^V
it

a an

female garment,

for

it

*-,

nor

to

/^ow^ *)

a horse, because

is

animate object.
134
Inflexions always terminate in
eJfcoo,

some vowel, and the postpositions

&O&,
by the

e)ewtf,

&>&

a nd

^SbTV

commence with vowels;

come

but,

rules already given, two'^owels cannot

in contact; a singular inflexion

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
terminating in
\>

41
class

or

although included
<

in

the

termed kululoo,

when

followed by these postpositions, affixes

&c. (rule 108)-

n\ thus,

~5"s5ex>

rjd&

opposite

Rama

When

these postpositions,

however, follow a singular

in
^>,

inflexion ending in

any other vowel, or plural inflexions which always end

such inflexions being of the class

named

vex> kujulov,

<:>M

is

inserted be-

tween them and the postpositions

respectively

in question, which, in
-

consequence, become
';

ci5bob
;

OCoeao
at the

- cOofe>oe

c3o&>k> and o^2$aJfc"7f

as all

thus,
in
>,

^S"
and

Od5oo.!56 in rulers

same time,

plural inflexions

end

therefore have inherent the connected vowel ^,

which before an

initial

vowel,

may, by the rules before given, have

ooCSb
1&>
i*

Sund hi
t

at option,

we may

also say

Sf&

rulers &c. .&c.

o^"Saow and "^^ are never subjoined to any words except verbal nouns, 135 or nounldenoting inanimate things j and 3J~> is used only after abstract nouns.
- So i^x>Cc* -

ls;b

and $~3 always change into '^fte

- *&

^c& -

*8?o

]3g

and ^J^jwhen used

as postpositions.

The

n^ure and use of the foregoing words will be

it

more

fully

explained in 137

the Syntax, where

will

be shewn that

many

of them, though used as postpo-

sitions, ap in fact parts of

nouns, or forms of verbs. I have no doubt that the

:

whole anderived from the same sources

knowledg of the ancient dialect than we
trace the rigin of
j

at the

same time, without a further

it

now

possess,

would be

difficult to
t} ie

some pure Teloogoo

derivatives, such as csiooJf

|g n
'

of the geitive, and

& or

the signs of the dative case.

as

This

difficulty has led

some

to Nat these,

and similar words, rather

a separate class of
;

affixes inseparable

from subthe

stantives,han as

vocables.

But, whatever

may be

history oktymology of these words

whether they are derived from nouns or

is

verbs novt>bsolete, or are themselves original terms, there

in use, theare distinct

no doubt

that,

from

all

others in
I

the language?
think, justifies

and precisely equi-

valent to

ot

English prepositions. This,

my

classing
I

them
have

as a separa part of speech,

and giving them the appellation by which

endeavours to distinguish them.

42
138*

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
The
articles

a and the

according to the

may be considered context, may mean either a

is

as

inherent in the noun

or the person.

139

The

indefinite article a

somtimes expressed by the numeral &>", vulgarly

;

written

Q, meaning one
is

as,

^^55o^oX

one or a person.

140

There

not any separate

word

to represent the definite article the.

In the
to-

concise and nervous idiom which characterizes the

Teloogoo,
is

this article,

gether with the relative pronoun

verb, in that curious part of
it

tvho,

which, that,

incorporated with the

termed the

relative participles,

which possess
;

the combined force of the definite article, the relative pronoun, and the verb
thus, in the sentence
glish

<^c

?"*-) #s$ari^> t^ e

rson

fr

saw me
signifies

five

words are expressed by three Teloogoo terms,

#r&^

person,

and t^&cS
3d. OF

has the power of the, who, saio.

THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTATIVE NOUNS.

numbers
;

141

The

substantive nouns have two

t

the singular StfofosSfebo, anc|

in-

the plural

rw>T$<S>X)

and three genders, the masculine s^e^Cs&o,

8
;

eluding the gods and

men
;

only

the feminine

j^,

>oXsSx>,

compizing the

goddesses and
things,

women

and

,the

neuter

t^)o'e)oX35coi
species.

including nanim ate

and

all

animals, except the

human

142

The

cases are properly three only;

;

the nominative,

the inflexio, and the

to alhouns, the

accusative

but, in the following general

is

remarks applicable

usual arrangement of six cases

observed-

SINGULAR.
143
It

has already been mentioned

that there are few

words

in

tl

Teloogoo

language which terminate in a consonant,

among

the nouns theres not one.

(

In the nominative cafe singular, they

vowels ^^=3
s

all

terminate in some of e following

sr>^

"^

^^-^
"^

or

"^ thus, &*$ a ruler, $2^ a worn cm,

stick, "J.
tl

^>9

a robber, ^o$&>o beauty,

a shawl, 3"jk a w

hand &c.

144

The" Inflexion singular varies with

the declension, as explaed hereafter-

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
The
Genitive singular of
all

nouns

is

the

same

as the inflexion singular

but

145

in books,
X5

and

in conversation

with Bramins, we occasionally find the postposition

^_

or cxfco?f of, added to the inflexion, to form the genitive.

is

The

Dative singular

formed by adding

to inflexions in 3
all

or ~^_

#35

145

to inflexions in

N7TS

or ^, and

5 to inflexions in

other terminations.

All nouns in the Accusative singular are the

same

as in the singular inflexion;

147

except that the inflexion

of that

is

of the class termed "$

ex) kululoo,

and the accusative

alit's

named \&>
in

iio5

i^Qbex) drootuprukrootooloo. That the reader may

be "written in
all

ways bear

mind

this distinction, the inflexion will hereafter

affix
<

simple state, but to mark the accusative, the

flexions in
s>

will

be added to

in-

or 21, (except to inflexions formed

by changing the termination

&> to
all

of the nominative into that syllable), and the affix

those ending in any

other

letter,

(except to those mentioned in rule 117) and an

to

&c

will

be further

added

to

all,

denote that although the

affixes

or

& are

universal in the

common

dialect,

and

in correct

language may, with propriety, be used before

in lieu of them,

any consonants, yet others may be substituted

for drootuprukrootooloo
?

under the rules

\^j*$\&j^&) ~X), contained

is

in the preceding chapter.

is

The

Vocative singular

either the

same

as the nominative singular, or

;

148

formed by merely lengthening the

tive

final

vowel of that case

unless the nomina-

end

in

v>,

when

that vowel
is
.

is

changed into
to

or

o.

The

Ablative singular

formed by adding

the singular inflexion the

i

149

postpositions

er6 .

^#

S* & c
"O.

or

to

t } le

n fl ex j on o f nouns denoting

nanimate things ending in

PLURAL.
The Nominative
plural
is

formed, in various modes, from the nominative

150

singular, according to the declension to

which the substantive belongs.

It

always ends in

ex>.

The

Inflexion plural

is

formed by changing ew of the nominative plural into w. 151

all

The
in

Genitive plural of

nouns

is

the same as the inflexion plural; but

152

books and in conversation with Bramins, we occasionally find the postpositior added to the inflexion te form, the of, ons"^^,

^wr

genitive.

44
153
154

TELOOGOO (UlAMMAR.
The
The
Dative plural
is

formed by adding So
is

to

ne inflexion plural

in e>.

Accusative plural
is

the

same

as the inflexion plural,

both ending in

O; but the inflexion

included in the kululoo, and the accusative in the

i&i&^&t^&vj

drootuprukrootooloo.

To remind

the reader of this material

it's

distinction, the inflexion will hereafter

be written in

simple state, without

any of the additions peculiar

to

the ku,luloo; but ?&,

with nn &c. will be

in

added

to all plural accusatives, for the reasons

:

mentioned

treating of the

accusative singular

is

always end in o, never in

never aftixed to plural accusatives, because they "^ s

5

or

155

The Vocative
plural into
o

plural
o

is

formed by changing the

.

final

N> of the

nominative

or

TT
is

156

The Ablative
positions.

plural

formed by adding
&c.

to the plural inflexion the post-

W*

"-c^

&^

157

The Vocative
vocative case
:

particles,
first is

*9

- &><

2oox> an(j

2*

i)

are often prefixed to the

;

the

used in calling

men

of inferior rank only

a wife
is

the second

in calling females inferior to oneself,

among whom

always included

by the natives; and the third

in calling

men of

equal rank with oneself; these

:

three are prefixed to the vocative singular only

the last
is

is

prefixed to the

vocative both in the singular and the plural number, and

in

used indifferently

calling superiors, inferiors, or equals.

158
in

It is

of great importance that the reader should constantly bear in

is

mind

that,

nouns denoting inanimate things, the nominative

generally used for the

this is

accusative,
<

and the accusative

for the ablative,

but that

not the case

with nouns denoting animate objects.

159

By

the addition of the various postpositions to the different cases which

they govern, the reader

lo'O

may form any number

to the

of other cases at pleasure.

or language of the land, are more iSSgsfco, numerous than those of any other class and, as the rules which regulate their declension extend also to nouns of the three other denominations, it seems

The nouns belonging

proper to treat of them

firsh

:s.

OP REGULAR ~S$

vSSbo

NOUNS.

The

regular nouns of this class are divided into three declensions.

all

The

first

161

includes
c

masculine nouns, the nominative singular of which terminates in

all

2&; the second,

feminines or neuters of more than two syllables, having the

in

nominative singular

&>

""

&>

or

&

the third, nouns of

all

genrule?,

ders not included in either of the

already given, explain the

two foregoing declensions. The general

which the
different cases are

mode

in

formed from the

nominative singular, the inflexion singular, or the nominative plural. It will be

sufficient, therefore, to

show how these three cases are formed

FIRST DECLENSION IN C 2&.

in each declension.

Many nouns
c
b; but, as

denoting masculine agents have the nominative singular in

is

162

the letter C

unknown

to any,

C except the learned, the precedis

ing

<&b is usually

omitted in writing, and the nominative of this declension

&>.

consequently made to terminate simply in

c before <&> will notwithstanding

The

obscure nasal sound of

be found in the pronunciation of even the

most

illiterate

personsis

The

singular inflexion of nouns belonging to this declension

final c <5& of the

formed by

163

changing the

nominative into

&

thus,

nom.

v>Xc<8b
inflex.
9<JX)C5Sb

a hus-

band, inflexion oSaAJD.

nom. *$&x> Ccb a younger

c

brother,

e^^Six^S).

But, with the exception of f c&s

law, all

&>

a younger brother, and

son in

nouns of this declension, which have the vowel ^ preceding c<b of the

nominative singular,

may

also

form the singular inflexion by merely dropping

the termination C 2&; the inflexion of

SJ>A; because
*o

S&Xc&b a

husband,

is 35bX<0

only, never

does not precede the

all

c <&>

of the nominative case ; but, with the

N>

two exceptions abovementioned,

words which have

;

before c

&

of the

nominative have two forms in the inflexion

thus,

nom.

man,

inflex.

wD&D^

Or

^^ ^
is

W^ 2&>o!So

a strong
164

5.

The nominative plural

.

formed by changing

C c&'of the

nominative singular
husbands,

into e>J; thus,

nom.

sing.

S5bXc2sb a husband, nom.

plu. SfcXew

nom.

sing,

55^0

C^

a younger brother, noin. plu.

^S&^ew

younger brothers.

46
The

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
oilier cases of this declension are
;

formed according to the

^eueriil rules

given above

and, for the sake of illustration, a

word of

this

declension

is

subjoined, declined according to the usual arrangement of six cases.

SINGULAR.
C3& ........................... a younger
i

brother*

o r es&o

>15^x>j:f_

........

ofayounger

brother.

&o

)i3

.............................. to

a younger brother.
brother-

Acc
V-

efo&s

& &c. ................... ....... a younger

......... . ...... ....'.......9

efS&> C~GJ
&Sxx>
iO

younger brother.
t

Ab.

ef^

"iS^"

^** ....... in by, or with a younger brother.

P L

UKA

L.
brothers.

NG.

e^^x^oo ............................. younger

^^ V ^^
or
e^^Soo e)o^)

>

c^50

.^.

---- of younger brothers.

D.
Ace.
V.'

ef5&,e;^> ........................... fo younger brothers.

&c. .....................younger brothers-

iS"S^

er
SJ -

"^ ........ .... ............

er*
all

Ab
165

^^J
By

- ^SeS" -

younger brothers.
by } or with younger brothers.

....... i nt

rule 163,

words, except

e^^c^b

and esejoc^, which,

the final termination

in the

nomi-

native singular, have the vowel

^ preceding
:

C^ may in

the inflexion singular have two forms

such words, therefore, have likewise

two forms

in the genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative singular, which are

;

formed from the inflexion

sin. O v&> <v
sino-. o
fy^

thus,
sren-

nom.
sing;.

sing.

a)j)x<&b a
"U~~"

strong man, inflex.

~U~~

or

>>&>.
V>

&>>>b<0c&>o' or>
to

or w^CSb^ooS'
*v>

dat.

We)25o^)| or

W&^^So ro

the addition of by *

>e)&>!0 on

or

^o to a)e)5$o on

rules 132

&

146. ace. sing.

&>
or

&c. or we)^> &c- see rule 117. abl.

-

- er-6 sing. D ttSeS^^ or)

"^^

^^^
V>

er6

ir

&*

and even
in

and

^^tfc,

which, in the other cases, are exceptions to this rule,

the dative

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
similar, take

47
.

two forms

viz-

s&

%.-

Or

^55c
6

ef>ex>!0

or <H)>iwo. <v>

The

plural

however has no change of

this kind.

In the inferior dialect,

this

&

is

substituted for

$
is

in all

the singular cases of 166

to terminate in

declension, except the accusative, which

made

Hk
g.

in-

stead of

thus,

nom.

sing,

^\x> c5& }
~~tS

inflexion sing.

e$2$&

d a t.

sj n

5"s5cx> 4

^s

accus. sing. &c. but these forms are never to e^S&^rl!^

be found in cor-

rect writings.

EXCEPTIONS.
Some wordchanging the
>"^ ar.d
1

of this declension,

form the nominatve and inflexion

and o

plural,
.

by 167

final C

&

of the nominative singular into o

or into

^, instead of forming them regularly, by changing cu& into ex> Xo&cSso robust man, makes in the nominative plural respectively ; thus,
c
C5sb O7ze

Xc3*-V?/<?,- 2os"
son-in-laic,

man, makes

in the

nom.
and

plu.

eSwc-^-o
fcjsj^^sb,tu

makes

in

the

nom.

plu-

ft9o,

this rule applies

many

othei words of the

same kind. INCLUDING FEMININE OR NEUTER NOUNS, OF MOUE DECLENSION SECOND

THAN TOW SYLLABLES,

There
is

IN

o5ivD

"="

SSoO

or

o So5.

a numerous class of neuter words of more than tow syllables end- 168

ing, in the

nominative singular, in
a wife,
is

^
&*>,

and several

in

"^

>co

and -~*x>

but

"^OT^SbD
The
sing,

almost the only feminine noun of this declension.

is

inflexion singular

the same as

the nominative singular

thus,

nom. 169

^oea^oa/wr^e,

inflex. sing.
is

^H^.
ex> to

The nominative plural

lar
;

formed either by adding

the nominative singu- 170

ex),

or by changing the

termination

^
if

of

the nominative singular into

and lengthening the preceding vowel,

^oef)S5JxD
e<9

not already long; thus, nom. sing.

a horse, nom. plu. /fce>3&>ex> O r /^o^^X) horsesi es

The

other cases are formed

according to

the

general rules already given. 171

to the usual

Subjoined is an example of this declension, according of six cases,

arrangement

48

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
SIN GULAR.

N
G

XSftsSSbo..,

..... a /tore.

/foesisco or
e*9

/&&9 3oo csfco^

66>

...of

horse.

ee

Ace-

/^oes^f
ee

&c ...................................... ahorse.'

V.

/fcesSsr ........... ................................. o horse. * ee

Ab.

/foe>3co -tr &9

&-

........................ iX by, or

with a

horse.

PLURAL.

N
G.

/^oes^ooex) or
&e>

/S^ex) ............................ horses.

ee
6"

or

or
or
66)

of

horses.

66)

66)

or Aoe^i) 6>
bce>?6o

........................ ^

h orses

'

&c.")
}

Acc.
ee

or

horses.

V-

7^oeso5ooo~ 6S
p c\

o u or AD

ef>

<yrT)

o
i

'

.....o horses.

66)

Ab.
.

or

)>

>

.............. , ...... in, ,

er

6 -

by, or

ivith

horses.

6>

172

All nouns in this declension, besides the dative singular as given above,
also form that case

may

by changing
if

S$DO

o f the nominative into $, lengthening

the preceding vowel,

not already long, and affixing the postposition? instead

of

&

thus,

nom.

sing,

/^o^^o

horse,

dative sing. /fo&9S5i>D?5o O r fc~&

e.)o^S"S^o?5So or

nom.
173

sing.

00x3"^ a

bribe, dative

sing.

The

postposition

added to the singular inflexion of nouns ending

is

in

*o

denoting inanimate things,

either affixed in the

regular

manner

to infS,

sSoo of the inflexion is ,flexions of this declension, or the

changed into
;

and
or

the preceding vowel,

in paper.

if

not already long,

is

lengthened

thus

IT^JS^MrS

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
The nominative
changed, from
xx>,

49
is

singular of nouns in this declension

to

often, in books,

found 174

%^

or

thus,
-

nom.

sing,

^ows^x) a

horse, is

often found written AoeaS&o^

to

O r ^b *~> O2X>
*

This

rule,

however, does not apply

final

nouns which have the long vowel

wife,

preceding the
or

&*>

TfcpnHRjfci

can never become

"*3"^

T>S

"^oTpoew.

In the inferior

dialect, all

the singular cases in this declension, (except the 175

;

accusative), ending in

o &>, constantly change that termination into

thus, in
;

conversation

we

frequently hear

^^

gmrrum used

for

KoegSSbo

gmrrumco

but

this practice is

contrary to the genius of the language, which requires

all

words

to terminate with a vowel.

in the inferior dialect, is

The accusative,

formed by changing &> of the no- 176

if

minative singular into

>X and lengthening the preceding vowel,

^o|g
3oo a
>

not already
sing.
fc>o

long

thus,

nom.

sing.

horse,
.

ace.

sing.

^||*^

nom.

5^o$bo

bribe, ace. sing.

>o"Tir

The

following, with all

other neuter or
""
S5x>
?

feminine nouns, of

mor than two 177

&&

syllables,

ending in ^x>,
the
sale,

O r ~~s5bo, are declined like

chin,

a beard.

yaw.

.a fight,
.tin.

battle.

a wife. V

a dispute.
lime, chalk.

.residence.
..an elephant's. trunk.
..an accusation.
.a

a key.
the lock of a door.
lead.

crime.

.a wager.
style.

an i ron

raw riee
S&o
beauty.

.a bridle.

50

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
THIBD DECLENSION-

178

This declension includes

prized in the two foregoing
neuters in
&>, all

all

other regular nouns, of every gender, not com;

declensions

it

comprizes, therefore,

all

regular

S5w O f two syllables only, or of regular nouns in

is

more than
it

two syllables when the 5&>

prizes every regular
it

not preceded by

*" "=

or

in short,

com-

noun whether masculine, feminine, or neuter, provided

c

be not a masculine in
~= 5&> or

&o, or a feminine or neuter, of more than two syllaS&>-

bles, in ^sSx),

179

The
nom.

inflexion singular

is

always the same as ths nominative singular

sing. 03*.

thus,

sing.

><g

child, inflex.

nom.

sing.

^_

knife or

sword,

inflex. sing.

&.
plural of

180

The nominative
to the nominative

nouns of

this declension is

formed by adding

ex>

s singular, except to those ending in short

which change
;

the final 9 into

*o ex>

as,

nom.

sing. CJ

)8*
(j^

child,
it

nom.

children plu. C)^ex> ^g

3"

but

as the

noun

9 "_Q a knife or sword, ends in ,

makes

e&gx) swords, in

the nominative plural, never ST^exj*

181

The

following

is

an example of
six cases.

this declension,

declined according to the

usual arrangement of

SINGULAR.
N.
G.
or

PLURAL.
a child.

N.

children.

G.
1).
'

or
,

>|e)C&30' of

children.

.....to children.

Acc.

&c
o child.

Acc. OSSoi\x>

&c
,

.children....o children.

V.

V-

SsSera^r
(A*

Ab.

Ab.

OF SUBSTANTIVES.

51
declension are annexed.

A
9)\

few of the numerous words included in

this

182

52
an

TELOOUOO GRAMMAR.
ass.

Do"S

a large metal pot.

a window,

spear, or pike.
chest,

a creeping plant.
S3 13

a box, a
Sp

table.

a small

village.

the body-

IRREGULAR PLURALS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.

183

Many nouns

ending in &,

^,

^, |?,

<&,

or &, which are regular both in of the penultimate syllable in

cast,

the singular and plural, frequently drop the the plural

plu.

<>

number:

thus,

^Sft &3 a person of the Comtee

if

makes the nom.

"b

S^SfckweX) or ir'afo^; and

it is

a double consonant precede the

thus
thus,

dropped,
"^

reduced

to

a single consonant in the nominative plural

tree,

"S^ex)

or

"^^f

trees,

wj?

bottle,

nom.

plu. ax>gbex> O r

^Jo

bottles.

^o<2& an eqq, IAS

in

nom.

plu. fto5bex> or
6s>

^o&> eqqs &c ro V9

384 Some nouns

plural,

&

or 2&, regular in both numbers, forn> also an irregular

by changing the
sing.

&

or

#o

of

the nominative singular into

plu.
c^Sfcex),

&
;

thus,
i

nom.
Arti j^C**

fr>& powder, regular nom.

irregular nom.

plu. A

s^^y. Or>
<a

185

All nouns in this declension ending in

or

<>&,,

which have the

letter

C or o immediately preceding these terminations, besides the regular plural,

may have two

irregular forms, viz.

<*&>

singular into either

ajoSfcex), irregular
ISfi

or

by changing the

& or ^
a

of the nominative

thus, nora. sing. fc)OGc

carriage,

nom. plu.

nom.

or a)oyo. plu. 8>oJfo fir fv>

Many nouns
in rule

having the termination of the nominative singular in

or ?^,

in addition to the regular plural,

form an irregular one in the manner mentioned

184

thus, ~*>x>'&

&

an alligator ,makes in the nom. plu. either "S\>^ ex>ex>

or
**^

or "sfco^W but nouns of two short syllables ending in

ex)

have the re-

C*i
187

gular plural only, /'

e)) a
o<*sO

tiqer, * v

makes

never ^)ex>ex> tiqers, */

in

^)&.
Or)

The noun
"^oJOwOvJ or

"*>

marriage, makes
marriages*

the nom.

plu.

"H>o<Xs02&,

or

~^)O<soc!s>?sX)

188

Some nouns, having

the nom. plu. into

the nominative singular in &>, change that syllable in

.

C&ew

thus,

"?&

tank, nora, plu.

^;coex>

others

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
change the

53
tree,
T

& into C^oeX)

thus,

^ JAe wawie o/ a
as,

nom.

plu.

?v

c?6ew

others change the <& into o) in the nom. plu.

Xr*ex>
fishes,

W >?&>

jfoA,

nom. nom.
nom.

plu.
sing.

and others have the regular plural by adding

nom.
plu.

W to

the

thus, ~&>(fo the body,

~&>r&e>3 bodies,

1TV&

^e
the

tcaisf,

plu.

IPj&eX) waists.

The noun ~ooo

makes

n^rfa

makes the nom.

3q5)ex3

plu.

$ p-*>, and

noun 3q) a cow,

189

in the norn- plu. either

O r 55ew.
"SJSTCS&O NOUNS-

IRREGULAR

As

it is

hardly possible to form any general rules for the declension of the
:

190

irregular

"w^f CS$M nouns

list

of most of them

is

subjoined, shewing the

nominative singular, the inflexion singular, and the nominative plural of each.

Except

in the

formation of these cases, the whole follow the general rules for

declension laid

down

in rule

143 &c.
last syllable of the

Most of the following nouns change the

gular into

nominative sinto

191

&

Or

C3

to

form the inflexion singular, and into o2fc or &o

form

the nominative plural,

regular

some of them
*>

also

form the nominative plural, in the

manner by adding

to the

nominative singular.
Inflex- sing.

Nom.

sing.

Nom.

/
(^

Waler boiled>f of dressing nee

^e purposed
.

fyc.

....... J
|

^&
>C&>^

plu.

ZZ&vo
oc&5b^o

or

thing placed under a ou ld vessel to P revent ifs ) J, \ \falling, such as a straw

f

Any
'

Vo^^S
I

or

( rope

8fc.

...

.......

...... )
c^?^5bex)
"^b-D5bex>

Theforehead. ...........

or
or

The mouth ............. The

west. ....

~&rt>3
S5c35b&3

.....

SSSiS&esex)

^ ew
00^8

J empty

A river .............. C A plain, an open field, an~\

space ofground, an {^esplanade, the outside. ..)

&&3

^asoew or

_
^e3oex) or
fc?o?sewo or

>J/^
o^^S

The palate

or throat*

54
Norn. Sing.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
In/lex.

Sing.

Nom. Plu.

A
TcX<D
/

kind of pap made of raggy.

breast, literally the place

Cftoa)^

tJowewew O r
or

The

\ of embrace

Or
"-3S

The check
( The imaginary pollution pro-~\ / ceeding from the birth of a >
( child

Or

^
<)&><&>

or

j of both hands jointo

fifo

0/-6

cooD
cOe)

/ "^ c points
\ ed
together,
cfo

hold anything. J ^0

Or

<$>

"sr^XQ

plough

Or

^)

i_0
(
/
-v

The

interior

of the cheek
con-

^)

^3

^)

ex>exD

Or

c^)<SfOw

/\2L "\^

m such
tain

The palm of one hand, held\ E

a manner as
to

any

thing placed in it...

r
<

stones,

number of loose bricks or ) formed into a fire- >

)

& ^3
S

ou

vy or

(.place
s

t>

|r_^

The navel

S5woAe)

C The Courtyard, the enclosed V J with- V

empty space of grouna
in a native house
(^

or

S^S'
i

A
An

large pestle. *^ *

S^c
"SP3 1^3
~^

5^ S'

Or

<o&D

opening, a door-frame...
e

"53^1^ or -^p

a ''^ between the sh&ul- )

\derandthedbow

A->^

^ A^ JeX)
"T^C^beX)

J
i-

or nr

> "TT

^
,

"J
(
'

A sepulchre, a place for bu- 1

f

"" or burning the dead, j

^ ^

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
Nom.
Sing.
Inftex- Sing.

55
Norn. Plu.

mater in which

rice

has")

SThe boiled,

been washed,

grown sour andt-^r vinegar ........... 3

bed-stead-

^ ^, So^lS^iJ&ex) O
r2&*x>
or

The kg of a

----

&3

rope ......

..........

reFM&3

IT

,c&ex> or

on salt or barren!

\ground, fuller's earth ...... j

tree ..........

IT'&S

~&*<!X> or
X&*btyo or

nest ...........
or district
;

%?>&

{ A Country,

general assembly : it also (^ means a day, or time .j

.

{Rising ground
\
5

estivation ofg rain,in w hick { tobacco ana other plants of [ same kind are grown. . J
.

unfit for the~\

^g
"lo^^S

-&*&>&> or

yard ........

-^^^bex> O r
l)afcex or
oJoSoex) or

Pasture land. ........... t)i3

j*

town*

'

ojw

Most

of the following nouns have the singular inflexion the

same

as the no-

192

minative singular, or form it by changing the last syllable of the nominative 3 ; some however form the inflexion singular very singular into irregularly.

The nominative

plural is formed either in the regular manner, by adding X> to the nominative singular, or by changing the last syllable of the nominative

singular into

$ or
The

&
Inflex.

Nom.

Sing.

Sing.

Nom.

Plu.

Aspindle
nail or claw

&&>&>

or
/^

^5b or
&Sb
or

Water
Blood
Rose water....
an '^ ^ oes not a dmit
t The pronoun
,

<ob5b or

*^A

or
it is

of any change of this kind,

included in the 3d declension.

f)c2&3, he, this man, does not admit of any such change.

56
Norn.
Sing.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
Inflex.

Sing.

Norn. Plu-

\the

first water,)

The

sea...
is

j
oo1ex>

The front,

that which

oppo-

lite

............ . .................. J

hare.
ex>

The forehead ..................

or

Tfte beginning .................. 15do<5ex> or "Sooc543 -13oo>ex>ex>

Atortoise ....................

..U^ex)

or
-

^4 wiorter .........................

6^ex> O r S^^S
C?TD or

5^ex>ex) or

Hunger,
5jpzZe

appetite ................

A sickle...
Apandal, or shed ........... ..SSoftO or 3o&&3
I

SSoaex>ex) or

f Boiled rice mixed with milk,~} wrf seasoned with sugar and :
other articlesjhat give

a high
to

'

r^asA

this

word
verb

is

derived
........

^ oX?)
\

'.

\from
n

the

o^o^b

\_ejfgrvesce ............... .

j
)

j^ ^^ummt for digging, (somewhat. like a short hoe...

An
axe...

^^
>
,

o
C/i

o
C*

^^D or ^^c$S.^^ex>ex) O r
CAO

5^t ica^e*
,

?row

'1***"**

which

l-?
C

are toasted'. ..............

^pZace ...........................

TS^4,X) or

^^3 ^60003
.

or

j
.

C Apiece of wood, placed upon~} ' Ae shoulder for carrying a -5^3 & or -^>^^3 like that used by milk) burden,
.
>

-^^JgbeX) or

\jnaids in England. .............. j

A pair,
f Bran, J below
[called

a pair of shoes .......... "^2& or

the

"^3

"S"^ex> or

substance on rice
the

"\

the husk,

husk

is

&&>

..................

>tfq)5b or )

Fruit .............................. Soo<3& O r

S5o.

ceX) or

t>

or

or sore-.... ...... , M .......^)o^ or ^)o^3-

)0&oe.x-q$;)os& or

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
Nom.
SingInflex. Sing.

Norn. Flu.

The body

2oO

or
or

2oo3

2og3ex>

A village
Thread....
^4

&&
...

^Q

&>5bex> or

&r>&> or

humped back

&*.&

or

4 field producing grain J free, worf

The body
^4 ?zame,

~&<& or
S5cn>;& or

sr->e
~^>
~^-'&>ex>
~"!j<5bex>

or

~&>?5b'or

an appellation

^Sb or "ij9c^3

or

A share...
daughter

^n>0 or ^r^c^S ^rex>ex) or

STC^:) or S^c

^8

^c^oSbex)

or

The

following nouns change the last syllable of the nominative

singular

193

into o&3 to form the inflexion singular,

and into
also

oScex),

oroW

or

ooto form

the nominative plural

some of them
ex> to

form the nominative plural in the

regular manner, by adding

the nominative singular.

Norn. Plu.
or

Nom.

Stay.

In/lex.

Sing.

A house
tooth

^o&3 ^x><yo or gp-&ew

^o^b

or

Soo^S SSewooor Soo^boo O r Soo^b or

or ojoc^oexj or or

ojow

or

&o&>

or

female's breast

TSToiS x3'r5b>ex) O r

Sand The
sky, the atmosphere

35bo3

Soo&3
singular
;

The nouns noted below change the last syllable of the nominative into 8 in the inflexion in the nominative singular, and into &>e
those which end in

194

plural

and

ox>, with

a short vowel preceding

:

it,

lengthen that vowel

trf

QMS

does not admit of any such change

it is

a plural

uouu

the 3d declension.

58

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,

both in the inflexion singular and nominative plural, -5-00000 stone makes in
the nominative plural "^ex> or ~G*&>.
Norn.
Sing.
Inflex*

Sing.

Norn. Plu.

C Any
"Z5~ooo
-J (^

thing on which arc.

tificers place their ivork

an

anvil,

75"ooo
-53-0030

stone ...............

~5"&

"troo O r

The mouth

hole in the ground, a pit

Thehand .......

A small well ......

Ghee

195

The

following nouns in
;

fe^xo

change that syllable into

_ef

to

form the

in-

flexion singular

they form the nominative plural either in the regular manner,

the nominative singular^ or by changing the last syllable of
&*>.
*v>

by adding

ex> to

the nominative singular into

Nornee
e

Sing*.

Inflex.

Sing.

Norn. Plu<
e5>ft^>ew O r

The neck..

,.5eo

ee

or

T y4n z'rojz

J
(,

or wooden spikc~\

on which criminals were L

^_^
K*
Sto

^gjp

or

impaled ............... J
soz^'wo ^

machine .......

eB
o

^twex)
g(9

or

Elevated ground .........

J^
>

196

The nouns noted below form

nominative plural either in
s.

the inflexion singular in

or

or &3, and the

ex>ex)

some of them want the nominative.

Sing.

Sing*

Inflex.
left

Nom.

Plu.

The

side .........
......

"^SoO

or
or

The
That

inside

........

er^O

side..

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
//?:. Sm#.
The
further side
side ........................... S5e;SoD or

59
iYom. Pto.

The right

This side ......

The nearer side

X)

Thefinger ............

The

singular inflexions, and the nominative, plural, of the following nouns 197

denoting time, are formed very irregularly.

Nom.

Sing.

Inflex.

Sing.

Norn. plu.

(Every
fy "Sr>(2^b

day, ever. (^ which c^b corrupted from

1 >

a day}

Ayear ....... ,
Last year...-

That time,then
This time, now

Which
t
'

time,

when ................

Time...

Day-time, noon
Yesterday ...........
.

The day

before

yesterday ......

Night, evening

*A")

mornng

.. C

Time, in composition only

as,

zf&v

<JZ>$

in3 hours

time*

Former -times.
t when
the noun

sfc2&

affixes the postposition ?5, thus

^J^)??,

it

means

in the

morning

60
398
"ex>

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
when
it

denotes the liquor extracted

from the Cocoanut, Palmyra, or

;

Date

tree, is a regular

noun of
sing,

the

3d.

declension
,

but when

it

denotes a

stone,ii

becomes in the
is

inflex.

^o&3

and

in

the nom. plu. SoflSo*

in the in-

199

<ocb measure
flexion

used only in composition with other nouns, and

;

becomes <^C3

thus, <^c2&

compounded with ^ytf a fathom, makes

measure of a fathom, a fathom's length,

the nominative

"sP~3C(5&> the singular

and the inflexion singular "23~~C&3.

200

Most

of the irregular llsf^sScx) nouns,

which have the

inflexion

different

from the nominative singular, by changing

into *% form, in a

the final vowel of that inflexion

manner peculiar

to themselves, an inflected local or instru-

mental ablative
positions

they have

also the regular

form by the addition of the posteye, inflected ablative S'ok),

er*

T&# &c.

thus, inflexion S'o&S the

regular ablative

S'o^-er^. -to^ &c. in or ly,

the eye
;

and many of these

iflected

ablatives are used as adverbs or

postpositions

thus from the inflexion

in the

]J3

comes |^k>
ning, or
at,

in

a plain

or

outside;

from lto>>63, ~5ook>

in the inside, or inside.

begin-

first,

from er^sSD, cr^Soo

201

The student
ing
list

will find

it

of great advantage to

commit

to

memory

the followaffinity,

of nouns, denoting the several degrees of consanguinity and

peculiar to the

people of Telingana.
..

............

a father ...............
i^i
a father's elder brother-

\astep mother
his

wife ....... .........

~^Jf

also

a mother's

elder sister.
i)o5"ef

i^

a father's younger brother his wife ........ ........

also

a mother's young

sister.

grand father ........ a grand mother

in law father in law ....... a mother

a mother's brother ...... his w(fe

also

a father's

sister.

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
<

61
'}

the son
sister,

of a mother's brother, or of a father's a marts brother in law .... ^ \'"

")

Z
00

V3

-3

a -o a a
18

a woman's brother in law

oa

=r *

r a a
-a
-

n
f another's brother, or of a father's
the elder sister
sister.

{
I

$ I the daughter

| |

},

L "1

^
also denotes
brother's wife.
55befCJiex) also denotes the

*
I

.-^-J

g
elder

of a

wife, or

husband,

or

an

or a younger sister of a wife or husband,

younger brother's wife.

an elder brother
1$

an elder

sister

^fr
-^
"

^a younger brother
.

a younger .a wife

sister

~lo>

to&o

a husband

'<

a child a son

a daughter
a grand daughter a daughter in
j .

*...cn>Ce&5b

a grandson
a son
in

law
%

laiv

s>

5l>

ex)

/Me sow /"a waw's J 5^er or of a wo(^wzaw's brother .....

the wives

#Ae daughter
s/sfe?

of a man's 1

j
\

or o/ a woman's > brother ....... . ............ )

to

of the same husband

each

other.

X) the wives the

of tivo brothers to each other, joint daughters-in-law. husbands of two sisters to each other.
mothers in law to each other.

ex>

fathers in law to each other,

All the words in the above

list

a grandmother, and following

a* grand father, and preceding a younger brother, and "^ eSsSo^cSo

~W&

202

younger

sister,
.

together with the

words

35bca

sfc

and
are never used in

though

expressing degrees of relatipnship,

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
addressing the person to

whom
.

they refer
-

in
-

speaking

to

such relations, the

males are called

^dSotf

ejS^cSc

$_

^fco, and the females

O
203

or
c

native never

addresses his wife by name,

nor by the term denoting the

degree of her

affinity to

him

but, in speaking to her,

makes used

of cu o^>

and

other words, equivalent to our phrases

a great indelicacy,

1 say, Hear you/' &c. It is considered to almost approaching indecency, even to mention the

"

name
204

of one's wife or husband to any person.

in the foregoing
list,

Such nouns

denoting females, as have the nominative

singular in ^o, form the singular inflexion

by changing that termination

Oyufc^.

to

),

and the nom.

plu.

by changing

it

to

o^

or

OF NOUNS TERMED
205
All Sanscrit
*

&8>\>V>3$b:)<DO O R

SANSCRIT DERIVATIVES.
this

nouns may be adopted into

language

but they appear

in it

under a new form, by assuming terminations

Teloogoo.

and cases peculiar

to the

206
'

In explaining the derivation of Teloogoo nouns from the Sanscrit, Native

Grammarians divide

all

the nouns in the Sanscrit language into two classes,

3&3$rJ&*,

tfo

superior, an(j

e93&r>>ex>

the inferior.

The

o5br>8o<>x> or

superior class includes

nouns of the masculine gender, and the 5>5SbtiS-e&e>3

or inferior class comprises those of the feminine, arid neuter gender, as defined in rule 14 J.

207

The

Sanscrit derivative

is

formed from the crude Sanscrit noun, and crude

nouns, in the S anscrit language, generally terminate in the vowels

^
e)

or

m tne consonants

-S"2Tef~<"(^"?"fr^~So5

IT <f"

Ix T

S?T>

208

If the crude Sanscrit

noun becomes
it is

a nominative singular in

Teloogoo by
first
it

affixing the termination C^b,

declined like the nouns of the

regular

~'S&

declension.

If, in
jj

order to form the nominative singular,

for the

assumes
~zS3fC35ba
all, it

the Teloogoo
declension
11

affix S&x>,
if it is

follows the rules

second regular
is

and

modified in any other manner,'or

not changed at

The

rules

respecting Sanscrit derivatives and corruptions apply to adjectives, as well as to

substantives,

borrowed from that language.

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
is

63
declension.
is

declined like the nouns of the third regular iS^TCsSbo

It will

suffice, therefore, to

shew how the nominative

;

singular in Teloogoo
is

formed

from the crude Sanscrit noun

for,
it.

when

that

known,

this general rule will

guide the student in declining

OF CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS ENDING IN VOWEL9.

1st OF

THOSE IN

^
the nominative singular,

Crude
in

Sanscrit

nouns ending

in short

v form

209

Teloogoo, by changing that termination into

superior class,
inferior

^c

<JSc,

if

they be of the
they be of the
superior class,

and by merely
thus,
in

affixing 35^
3fc sS~>e&>ex>

if

class;

the

or

The God

Rama makes

the

nom.

sing,

in

Teloogoo

&
3"

the sun literally light-maker

the f
Sec.

do do

moon

literally

snow-rayed

&
rule 164
;

are declined precisely in the

all

same manner

as

^sSco^CuSb

Sec.

see
N>

and, as

Sanscrit derivatives ending in 0*0 nave tne vowel

preceding c2gb of the nominative singular, every noun of this description takes
the two forms explained in rule 165.
thus, also in the

C93&roj&ex>

inferior class.

a garden, a forest makes the nom. sing, in Teloogoo

a mountain a
dwelling

do
do..
.

do do
do

an elephant
sin..

do do
do-

do
do

lotus

&e. are declined exactly in the same

see rule
1

manner

as

72.

EXCEPTIONS.
The noun %H\&> a
i

friend, together with words used in composition to

-/

210

imply eminence, as coo,,^ a

t The sun and

lion
in

*T

*SrP*; a tiger &c. are considered included

moon

are

included

the oSboJ^e^beX) or superior class, because they are

divinities.

t;onsiiiered, or ai least personified,

by the Hindoos, &s male

64
both
in

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
the superior and the inferior classes. Thus,
Z$x>

we msy

say either

or &>\&j
person,

affiend,

^)5b5$v^>o^=^
S$x>

Or

^Sbsl&otfrwiJfc a man-lion, a noble

a

211

<)&>5x-rog^>^ "<^5b&~^Cy^x>oycb man-tiger, a fierce person. The noun 5S# offspring makes never WSSSbec&b, and the
WSSe^sSbo,
either

or

word atfra denoting,

latter

house, or a protector, refuge &c$>

when it has

the

meaning, takes in Teloogoo three forms,

it

$ tfrsSJco or &FW

or'S'^rax 2&;

but,

when

means a
c*5crcc

house,

it

has the

first

form only.
a messenger, a spy,
all

212

The nouns
included in the

an experienced person, and &n>e

or3)OO

O r superior class, together with

nouns of the

female gender, and the words

^^

a kind of holy grass, usually named durbjia,

sivan,
se> the

a woman's garment,

rOfO a

Indian nightingale,
9*per*>&
desire,

-XQ&

or

8j

a history,

$j*$$

delirium^
ttw

confusion,

S^o^rs
of the

sooc exaggeration, or enlargement,

9xOo&"D <3oex>
or inferior class,

earthen pot, with

affix

some other nouns

do not

the terminations mentioned in the

for

above

rules, but,

remaining unchanged, are declined according to the rules

the third regular

^^ C^o

declension.

2d OF THOSE IN
213

9 in short 9

Crude Sanscrit nouns of all genders ending

Teloo[oo, do not undergo any change
S
;

when brought
all

into

and, therefore are

declined like

nouns

in

of the 3d. declension.

sing, in

The God Vishnoo makes the nom.

Teloogoo

Sr8
55b^

Mind

,....do

....<fo

precious stone.., .do

do..

S&ro

3d OF THOSE IN
214

Crude Sanscrit

nouns^in

short

^ when adopted into Teloogoo, either undergo

affixing either

no change, or they form the nominative singular by

if

&

or' C

they be included in the S5b^5oex) or superior

class,

but $b only

if

they be of

the

Wofo^^W

or inferior class;

thus, in the

5&3S-j&w

or superior class,

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
or

<),")

or

rs

God Vishnoo .......... do .........

or
ra

or

The sun ............... do ........... ^Tr&or "^r&qS) or

Themoon ............... efo ......... S^b

or

>>)

or

An enemy ............ do .......... 3

&c. follow the rules for the
Sec.
1st.

iSbior'^'iQb.qftor

declension.

and ^o5b &c. are declined

like

nouns of the 3d. declension.

Thus,

also, in the

9S5b^e&ex> or

inferim' class.

Me

iorfy

makes the nom.

.

sing, in
rfo

Teloogoo ei& or
35?$>D or

wme, honey.

ray. .....

...... ......

........

do ......... fi9o3o O r
do

t^a^r.

co?/;

......... ..........
^^3^) &c.

........ rfo. .......

es'oax)

or

"?&> or

&c. and

follow the rules for the

3d declension.

4th OF THOSE IN

in short 215 ^, form the nominative iinguter in Teloogoo by changing that termination into ^; thus, l.^/^) a brother S$Jn>f\ a mother &c. make and 5^r^ respectively, which are, of course, de-

Crude Sanscrit nouns, ending

{^J&

clined like nouns of the 3d declension.

EXCEPTIONS.
The nouns
a
fearer, with a

~F&

the Creator,

#S>^

the sun,

~^^ a giver, and "3^

affixing c

216

few others, admit of another form, by

thus,

we

may

say either

St^^c^b

or

S^S"-

the Creator &c.

5th OF THOSE IN

^^ AND
ending

*.
in

The crude

Sanscrit

noun ^_

wwvy

^_ makes
cv^

the

nom.

sing, in
<^>

[Teloogoo
do .......

K*

a cow

.......

.'

... do ......
do.

X*&
~&*&

ship

......

.....
'

~sr*$ or

the

moon has no change, the Teloogoo

*
-

norn. sing.

[being also

66
No

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
other crude Sanscrit nouns ending in
It is, therefore,
"""

3_

or

are ever found in

Te-

loogoo works.

unnecessary to lay down any rules respecting them.

6th OF THOSE

ENDING

IN

LONG VOWELS.

217

Except monosyllables,
5

all

crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the long vowels

or vr^

w hen

adopted into Teloogoo, change these long terminations into

the corresponding short vowels,

and \>

All nouns ending in long vowels, thus converted to short vowels, are consi

dered as originally terminating in these short vowels

and, accordingly,form the

nominative singular in Teloogoo, agreeably to the rules already given for crude
Sanscrit

nouns ending in short ^

9 or

respectively.

EXAMPLES.
The
protector of the world, being

changed into

S^ 5
4.

makes the

[nom. sing, in Teloogoo S>3f$)cfe 8ee 209.

,

being changed 8 do do

Z^c&>'$> or

sgo^cSb

se e

( the wife of Vishnoo, being feminine, \ ( is merely shortened into ......... )

Suruswuttee
.

...... 1
_cj

>do
.

j do--

_,_
-rrefvS

866 213.

the goddess
.

of learning,

f
I

a woman, makes the nom. 1

'
.

sing,

^ or SdSo*) ^^ <>r^\ >..... ,so see m Teloogoo either, f

.

214.

21 8

cS^

an eye brow,._g the earth, \3^~*j

last

a woman &c. being monosyllables,

into Teloogoo, they

never shorten the

vowel

when adopted
like the

remain the

same

as in Sanscrit,

and are declined

nouns of the 3d. regular o3fcs5i

declension.

OF

CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS ENDING

IN

CONSONANTS.

210

Crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the consonants

^
3

5" ^" ^T $

f\ and

Sr form the nominative

to

singular, in Teloogoo, either

-

by changing
or

-o

and ^~
to *
""s&tt.

3&_ -

^ and 5" to ^

2?" to

$>

f" and 5?
"o

to

Ij

^_

and Ix

for all genders-or, if masculine,

by

affixing

03^, an(j

if neuter,

by adding

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
EXAMPLES.
Masculine or feminine.
Masculine.

67

i)3S^5&>T5~

makes ^)Sx^3&>&
. .

or fl)Sv^s$M-i&c<3Sb one
~co2$)o&>C'2Sb
. . .

w jto

strews flowers.

S?SS IT

.do

lo?$)&

.... or

one skilled in the vedas.

the cor-

do

-0#?f&So^> or ^PD&Sf^ospoC'Scone who protects

[ners

of

the world.

do
do .....

&&$^lfo_

or

^tf#3^6cb
<&c<J& .....
a-n

one who touches ghee.

/fll

3| ...... or

a per^m

3d Hindoo
[class.

..... do .....

^^Se?

...

or &>tfa5$j3C&>

erceroy

of *A
;

Sooras,

[or angels

a gaint.

Zr do ..... 93Siy)#Okx>

... O r

^S&^^^SS-ooC^bone^o/eerfson nectar or ambrosia, an immortal person.

Neuter.

tf^6_ ....... or S^iS'^bo ..... skin, leather, bark. 3$3o ..... do ... ^3 i& ...... or M^ wreath.
do
i

..

do ... a$8&e$o ...... or

...

)83&.J5oSx>

society,

an assembly.

...do
do

S'&So^

..........

or g'&sfcSoo

.....
.

a corner of the world.

the

.y; ^J)
.55b$b0^w
. .

---- or
.
.

\^^.^>

rainy season.

do.

or

&c

follow the rules for the 1st. declension.

&c. are declined like the nouns of the 3d. declension.

EXCEPTIONS.
speech,

a word, makes ^r'>^_, but not "^tfsSM.

220

c
ortune,

and W3<5~

adversity,

make ^o53^ and

^^J

or

and
~

calamity makes only

9

2) So

^>.

....... do .....

The nouns ^RO ^" appetite, &c. ^*^i$" a sacrificial and ^S^ or '$&>% and ^^^ T rore makes

stick,

make

either

68

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
I"
"a

an

eye,

&&<!

a side, or

quarter ,

make ^)^L aud

&%
<veo

'
,

or

and
anger,

& 9C<X 00

splendour,

make

5o^ ep

and &>SL or &y kw

.

ancj S}C,&.
w

221

Crude Sanscrit nouns ending

singular in

in cf

change
the

it

to $&, to

form the nominative

5$b5bJ~ wind,

Teloogoo

thus, SctfoeS
2DcOcM
-

sky,>&>Z&~
.

lightning,
.

X&& a feather, &c. make

4

)&>g_g>

5S^5b^

X5b>

which

are, of

course, declined according to the rules for the 3rd. declension.

EXCEPTIONS.
the Deity,

222

The nouns

^XSS'cS

and o5"r&5&~cS

Ifunooman, have respectively

the following irregular forms.

</<e

universe

makes &Xe& or

a village or country makes

^^^

or

223

Crude

Sanscrit nouns in %~ drop the final consonant, and then

form the no-

minative singular in Teloogoo according to the rules for crude Sanscrit nouns

ending

in the particular

vowel with which they terminate.

EXAMPLE.
the

sun by dropping

f~

is

changed

to ^PtfCSfc

and

then-

becomes

in

gold

do

....

do

...

[Teloogoo Wtfgsfcac&b see 209. ^rSfc ...... do do "ir^S&S&o see 209.

.

an elephant .... do
(
(

............

do ... do S'Q see 213-

the trident bearer

fa^ ..... do
in

^^
&&> C&>
or
or

EXCEPTIONS.
the sou/, the

supreme being, becomes

Teloogoo

a king ..... ............. do

f

when denoting Brumha, one

of the
J-

~-l attributes of the divinity, personified in l,the Indian Trinity, becomes .........
'

do ... \v*}'&

when denoting the supreme being

himself,

becomes either
or

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
Nouns ending
in

69

3&I~ have

also

an irregular form.

EXAMPLElightness, smallness,

makes

or

Crude
Teloogoo.

Sanscrit nouns ending in IT

are rarely adopted into the

224

Crude Sanscrit nouns terminating with S" form the nominative

Teloogoo, either by affixing
<&>

singular in

225

or

or, after

dropping the

final

consonant,

by following the rules for crude Sanscrit nouns ending in the particular vowel with which they terminate. Masculine nouns in ^ T admit of a fourth form,

by assuming

^oCi^b without

dropping the

final

EXAMPLES.
Masculine.

makes in Teloogoo
if a? c&> or
Feminine.
5

&

&b
Or

anchorite.

do.

do.

or

Nettfer.

....

do.

..

70
When
ihe

TELOOOOO GRAMMAR.
noun ^cSfcfT
"

signifies

a bird

it

makes SScS&tty, but when

it

total signifies the

tf

period of life, or youth, or age,

&c

it

makes

either, S$<3&&> or
;

cOo&y

e;S)tf

a nymph, makes ^>%)S3, or ^jtfioo)

~^#S~,

the

Creator,

Brumha, makes ^#.

OF NOUNS TERMED $>\S^5$X>eW QR CORRUPTIONS OF THE SANSCRIT*r

227
Besides the regular Sanscrit derivatives, there
is

in Teloogoo a class of worda

named &&\&x>?x> or corruptions of the

t

Sanscrit.

These are formed from the

for

crude Sanscrit noun by the substitution of one letter

the insertion, or addition of letters
;

another; by the elision,

letters,

by subverting the order of the

or

by doubling some of them. After these changes

in the original letters of the

affix

crude Sanscrit noun, some of the Sanscrit corruptions

nations, in the
affixes.

Teloogoo termi~

same manner

as

the Sanscrit derivatives, and others take no

C3$

In either case, the rules already given for the declension of the

nouns apply equally to the

>\5sS.

It will, therefore,

be

sufficient to

submit
is

a few explanations respecting the

manner
;

in

which the nominative singular

formed from the crude Sanscrit noun

at the

same time,

these,

from the

nature of the subject, must be necessarily very undeterminate.

OF THE CORRUPTION OF THE VOWELS IN CRUDE, SANSCRIT NOUNS.

228
If the
N>,
first syllable,

in the original crude

noun terminate
"*'

in the

vowels 9 or
;

these vowels are often, in Teloogoo, changed to

or cv*. thus

&T
.

a
&>

quarter of the world,

SStf

makes ~3S

. JDS'

600

a pungent

taste,

makes "SX^oo

an astringent

taste,

makes

&*$.
end with

229

If the first syllable in the original crude noun ^ ~" and letters are respectively changed to

"S

or

these

EXAMPLES.
SCfS? ............... sorrow ............... makes
~

$>

............. -...pain ...... ............ do .................

expenditure .....

...do .................

liberality ............. do ................

.justice,
.

propriety... .do .........

*...

........... do ...............

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
The same
end of the
this case,

71

rule applies to

C or

a in the middle or 230 og terminating syllable

syllable be short
;

original crude noun, provided the preceding

*"

in

however, the consonant preceding

or -<

is

doubled
......

thus.

...... learning, art ........................ makes

'C

......

ayoung

girl ........ *

..

.......... do

S
v

...difference ............................. do

terminating the

first syllable

in the

original crude

noun, are 231

changed to

or

v*;

thus,

fever .............................. makes

the

sound of the

voice,

note ............. do
.

a sound ........................
.S
f^e

..... do
. .

12/A day of the increase or decrease of the moon do.

in the

&%
?
,

The vowel ^
.

original crude

noun

is

sometimes changed to

"*,

232

or

thus,
.

beauty .......................... makes

a beast ........................ do

.Thursday ..........

......... do ......

a star ......................... do ......... 8^ THE CORRUPTION OF CONSONANTS IN CRUDE SANSCRIT NOUNS. The consonants $ o y are often changed to ^" thus, 233
, ;

.......... theplanet Venus ............. .makes

....... sugar ......................... do

.......... a plate made of bell metal .......... do .........

The consonants

-S"

1^, and
;

S,

in

the

original Sanscrit, are frequently

234

changed in Teloogoo to 5"

as,
>
'.

a cash (the coin so named)

........ makes

an

elephant hook .................. do

danger, deceit ....................... do

..language.,,
. .
.

............ '...do

72
235
*&~
is

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
somtimes changed
the

to 5"

as,

day omchich
of nouns,

the

moon

is

full.. .makes ...... q

.

disposition,

quality .......... . ..... do

is

...

236
"""

cSo, at the
as as,
cSSo55b ...
...

commencement

frequently changed,

in

Teloogoo,

'to

Yama,

the

God of death ........... makes

*

......

cScr$5d ..... fAree English

hours ................ do .......

is

237

S
5<&.

preceded by another syllable,

......... a
serfe

changed

in

Teloogoo

to

"?^Nor
5 ?f

|_
_

thus.

..................... makes ......

or

lac

......................... do .......
charactor .......... do .......
-Sf>-?f

/efter

do
.

....

rule, definition

................. do
is.

..

238
"tj.

preceded by the vowel ^,

,

generally changed to

^^

and preceded

by
cCo

to

thus,

.........

sacrifice ..................

makes ...... a?5^3&o

.... the sacerdotal thread .......... do .......

a command, order, or adjuration. .do

.

._o

command, permission ............ do ......

is

but

it

sometimes changed to 89
in X.
.

thus, 15^

^
a^-

Queen, makes

239

&"

is

changed

a crane. ...... .....

...... ... makes ....... ...... do

.

240

The

consonants of each vurga are interchangeable.

EXAMPLES.
a face ................ makes colour ................ do
. . .

seat ...... ....

........ do ............

a J7iwdc>o Aowr ......... .do ............ a forest ................ do ........... a history, a story. ...... do ........ ....
.
. .

the

mind ................ do
line^
.
-

..........
.

do
.

beetle

nut

do,

OF SUBSTANTIVES.
The consonants 5
^J~

73
other consonants

fx

^ or So,
is

when connected wilh

241

without the intervention of a vowel, are generally dropped, and the consonant
with which they
\o$

may

be connected

sometimes doubled

thus,

otf:ro3 ...... a journey .............. . .......... makes

.

...a

mark ......................... do
ej

f\

&

............. .a cow-house ........................ do

....... ........ fire ................................. do .......
......
.......... a

piece

of money .....
the

............ do .........

'*

Some

of the changes

among

^^\

&x> nouns are so

little

obvious, that

242

the reader

may

occasionally be inclined to doubt the existence of any connexion

that stated to

between the adulterated word and

however,
is

be

it's

original.

Great deference,
.

due by a foreigner to the concurrent testimoney of native authors

;

on

this

head

and when

it is

considered that most of the &\S5s$3o words have,

in all probability, passed into

Teioogoo, through the

medium

of the Pracrit, or
it

other corrupt dialects of the Sanscrit, and have been naturalized in

the
little

for ages,

resemblance

now

to

be found between some of the original words, and

their corruptions, ought not, alone, to invalidate the established etyTnologies of

successive Grammarians.

OF NOUNS

TERMED W^g 65^'S^O OR

-

FOREIGN.

In treating of the declension of the

55"s$x>

nouns, the peculiarities of the

It

^^iSSfCSSco &^bs&o an d <>\ 243 (^v^sC35bo O r common dialect, have been

duly pointed out.

remains, therefore, only to offer a few observations res-

pecting foreign nouns.

The

great facility with which the Teioogoo adopts arid naturalizes foreign

terms, must already have attracted the notice of the Student.

The

intercourse

of the people of Telingana with the neighbouring provinces, has led to the in-

troduction of a few terms from the Orissa, the

Mahratta, the Guzerat, the

:

Canarese or Carnataca, and the Dravida or Tamil

but, except

from the Tamil

and Canarese, with which the Teioogoo is radically connected, it has not borrowed extensively from any of these languagps. Since the Mahomnicdan con10

i-

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

quest of the Deccan, numerous technical revenue terms, and words connected

with official business, derived from the Arabic, Persian, or Hindee, have been introduced into Teloogoo, through the medium of the Hindoostanee; but the use of many such words begins now to be superseded by that of corresponding English terms.

244

Nouns

of foreign derivation are subject to the

;

same

rules as

the

nouns of the third declension

s'ax>3b
...

thus, the

Hindoostanee words.

news.
|

(OoJ->oo
,

question.

a
a

^^

treasury.

an answer.
a petition

country,

district-

arrangement, settlement.
"

and the English words.

^ ^

...

visit.

a number.
intrigue.

a disturbance, an
2 Co
.

ink.

.....
(

trouble,

annoyance.

a pen.
<xg~^ex) a pencil.

.... the chief town in

J-C&
'

district.
,
i

'

a carriage of any kind, a \ palankeen fyc. c

are declined like
4th.

decree.
fyc.

a summons

&* fo

child.

OF THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS-

245

The

rules of politeness

among

the Hindoos, although very different from

those in use

among European

nations, are so firmly established,

and so scruthe proper

is

from pulously observed by the people, that the least deviation

mode

of address should be studiously avoided. Particular attention

there-

fore necessary to the correct use of the

Teloogoo pronouns.

246

All the pronouns belong to that division of the Teloogoo termed "3Sf03&>
or language of the land.

247

There

are

no

relative

pronouns

in
;

Teloogoo:

the idiom

of the

language

renders the use of them superfluous

as will be fully explained hereafter.

;

The
248

substantive pronouns have two

numbers

the singular, and the plural.

is

The

sex speaker, and the person addressed, being present, their

is

supposed

to.be obvious: the distinction of gender

therefore confined to the pronouns of

OP SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
the third person, in treating of which,

we

shall explain the peculiar

manner

in

which

it is

marked.

The
sative

substantive pronouns, like the substantive nouns,

;

may

be said to have 249

properly only three cases

;

viz. the

nominative,

the inflexion, and the accu-

but they are here declined according

to the
is

arrangement adopted in
all

the declension of the nouns.

The

vocative case

wanting in

the Teloogoo

pronouns.
genitive or possessive case, without "c5fco^_,is likewise the inflexion, 250 which, with the addition of the postpositions, forms the different compound

The

cases.

The

inflexions of the

pronouns are of course included

\

in the class

termed

"sfeA) kululoo,

while the accusative cases belong to the (&> S$\&j^^&>vddroo~

tuprukrmtoolco ; but, in addition to this general distinction, it will be observed, that the pronouns of the two first persons have the inflexion entirely different

from the accusative.

THE PRONOUN OF THE FIRST PERSON.
Singular.
Plural.

251

N
G
.of me
to
.

We
........... of J us
S5cn>o ..............................
to

D
Ace.
or
"ST"

me

us

me
.

or
e.

us

Ab Men

-er*

--co

.&* in

me

us.

for the singular

of rank, speaking of themselves, generally use the plural ~&>S&o We, 252 ~j;& / indeed, arrogance often induces inferior natives to
:

when they

apply the plural to themselves ; but this is understood to be very improper address a superior. The Ratsawars and Velrnawars in the Northern

men, scarcely ever deign to speak of themselves in the singular number even to a Bramin, their acknowledged superior in cast. &> and 253 In the superior dialect, <*><& and oi^bo are sometimes used for
Circars, a bold warlike race of
;

THE PRONOUX OF THE SECOND PERSON.

Singular.
if*.

254

Plural.
-_

N
D-.

VL

thou

you
- &j-cs&>=5'

of
>to

thee

of you
to

feSo
.

thee

you

Ace.

.>&> or

thee
-in Sec. thee

or
4

you *

in

you

76
255

TBLOOOOO

ft

U AM MAR.
this

of Although both the singular and plural inflexions

pronoun end

in s

dative cases, they take, in the

rules 132
-

& instead of i,

in opposition to

the general

146

&

153.

256

Addressing

inferiors,

or conversing familiarly with equals,

this

>q) thou, the

nominative singular of

pronoun,

may be used

but,

when we speak

to

or inferiors, with superiors, or even to equals

any degree of kindness or respect,

the plual S>r5b you,

is

the only proper term of address.

his
inferior,
it

To

be called &q) thou,

bj a person decidedly

is

an insult not be borne by the most

disrespect,

meek Hindoo, he
bitter

will

resent

as studied

couched in the most

terms of reproach.
deference
is

257

When much

paid to

men

of superior ago, rank, or learning, the

they,

speaker uses the words IT'S&o or

&o&5b

~&sS$-zr>& or

"^"^

SXs

Lord,

"Which correspond with the English phrases, Sir,

My

Lord &c. &c.

258

In the superior dialect "&>$) and -&>5b are sometimes used for&q) and^5^^)-

259
.

The pronouns
numbers,
5kS5x>

of the

first

and second persons have

as given
first

their respective plural

and SXr&>,

above, corresponding precisely with

these

our words we and you* But

likewise another

the

of

two pronouns in Teloogoo has

jointly, which,

plural, applying to both persons

in English,

from

the

want of a corresponding term

This plural
is

we

are obliged also to translate we.

declined as follows.
Sfotfaoo
sfotf
,.

N
G

we
of us
to

5&>csko'

D
Ace.

SfctfSo
5Sbr^e>
SSo?5
.

us

or 3fo#35boe>

?/.<?

Ab
There
is

er*

~3 e t

&*

frc.

us

~So35w we, and S&Z>&x> we: very material difference between

iSoSSbo is the plural of the first

person only,

it

refers exclusively to those

who

speak
first

but o&f5&>

is

a plural, used
;

by the

first

person, but applying to the

and second persons conjointly it refers exclusively to neither, but includes both those who speak and those who are addressed, each of whom may be

either one, or

more persons. For example,

if

two gentlemen, meeting several

OF SriJSTANTlVK PKONOl'NS.
Bramins, were
of the
first

<

to

enquire

who

they were, they would not use the joint plural

and second persons and answer o$3cS$x>i^j'o3~c ea3O5x

for, in that case,

we (who

speak and are addressed) are Bramins;

they would be under-

stood to affirm that the gentlemen also were Bramins. Using the plural of the
first

~&>S&> person, they would say

13"

.^S^DO^X) we (who speak)

are Bra-

tnins-

THE PRONOUNS OF THK THIRD PERSON.

The Teloogoo pronouns of the

third person
first

may be

divided into two classes;

260

the definite, and the indefinite; the

fined objects,

referring to one or

more

particular

deless

and the second referring

first

to a

number

or collection of objects

defined.

The

class consists of the demonstratives,

and of the interrogative

collectives,

pronoun derived from them.

their interrogative.

The second

class

comprizes the

and

The distinction
mode
in
in

of gender

is

confined to the pronouns of this person, and the

is

261

which
it is

it is

defined in the singular number,

in the plural.

different

from the mode

is

which

marked

In the singular, the masculine gender

distinct

from the feminine and neuter, which are both represented by the same

word. In the plural, the masculine and the feminine are the same, and the neuter is distinct

from both.

It

is

of importance that this peculiarity should be

of the Student, for
it

strongly impressed on the

memory

will

be found to

pervade the verbs and adjectives, and materially

the language.

to affect

the construction of

DEFINITE PRONOUNS.

262
DEMONSTRATIVE PROXIMATE.
Singular.
M.
F.
If

N,

N.
G. D.
Ace.

)cob

...>&
G$& or oPcsfoolT
,

he, she
t

and

it,

this.

&

or oD^csko^T _

jpf him, her

f

and
an d

it,

this.

>>....,
>fS
,

&<Q|

hi my h er

^ ^^
it.,

a$
-

^ Wj herandit, this.
.

Ab.

->

^^

'S3'

p. .0$

er*. TS^-tS"

in

tyc.

him, her and

this.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,
Plural.

M. &

F.

N.
........................ they, these.

N.
G.

&5o .................. q

&8

or

fc8Soor_

...i^S or

&3iaxir_ ..... o/^Aew,

these.

D.
Ace.

Ab.

8- -er

.6.

**.

.in

^a
O^O

and

^^

are vulgarly Avritten

o^S

and QX, jj.

DEMONSTRATIVE REMOTE.
Singular.

M.

5r

N.
.

N.
G.

*rcafo ..................

a .........

.Ae,

she

and

it,

that. that.
that.

-sr?

-snS)^oSl_

. . .

TS^

--^^^ooj_

. .

O fhim, her

and

it,

D.
Ace.

-SJ^^I ..................... -25*^3 ............... ..

"sr

.to

him, her

and

it,

^ ..................... 7?T> ^ .................. him, her and it,

6 -

that.

Ab.

-sr^. .er

^#- ^..TS* ^..er6 .^^.^

N.

<.

Awn, Aer

&

if,

jtf.

4-

F.

N.
G.

-s^Sb ..................... &

................ they, those.

.o/*

~^8 - T^8"^>o I'

"sr8

...-5P>

63 --5T" iS ^o?f_

^Ae

D.
Ace.

.................. "sy^Si ............. to them, those.

those.

TT8^ ................. ^n'^SfD ............ them,

-sr8..er- T&&.S*.
.

Ab.
264

thSM C^. 4Jr.iSft m

^

<

-c.

them, those.

It will

be observed that the change of

of these pronouns,
is

ee to

a and of

<9 z

to

& u, in the

first syllable

the only difference between them.

265

Besides the plurals

>& and "wSb,

these two pronouns, like

;

some of the
>5b

nouns*, occasionally take irregular plurals regular !33fC3& o

thus,

often

becomes ^ C(
this case,

^ or

bc\&>i and "^r5b

is

"S^c changed into "5^c<^> or

>C<

^^.

In

they

make the inflexion

plural

or

&C

i^, and

"S3

^
rc

or

and

the accusative plural,^ c^ixO O r

CCiY^,

and"5

^^^

or

OF SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
In the

9
266

common

dialect, the accusatives

)> and ~ZT*& are respectively written

The

singular

numbers of the foregoing demonstrative pronouns, and

their
of:

267

irregular plurals, are never used, except

when

inferiors or equals are

spoken

when persons of very high rank are the subject of conversation, the plurals
s^>5b and Sa>, are used to express the English words he or
to a person only speaker alludes
in

she.

Bat

if

the

a trifling degree respected by him, instead

-&>C)3

of the

pronoun 3G2&", he uses ^<&c<&b to denote a male, and

;

or -^."^ to

denote a female
line,

and instead of the pronoun

~^c &b
;

tfJ^cSD for the mascu-

and tsOSi or

^"^

for the

feminine gender

or

if

he alludes

to a
)C<3b

person
he uses

considerably

superior to

him, yet not of very high rank, instead of

denote a male, and

for

"Y^^to denote

a female,

and instead of

"rcb,

the masculine, and ^S~5o for the feminine gender.

These pronouns
nouns of the
firs.t

have no plural number, SJ^C^band

declension
;

9f cb

are declined like

thus.

N ............ Wtfcgb
G

............. . .......... /ie .

...9#S- ef>&^DO*f
ef><3' <0

TJ"

..of him.
him.

D ............

........................ to
...........................
-

Ace ......... *3&

him.
&c. him.

Ab ......... ^^^...er^ 1$&-

cT

...... in

&$)

-&"!>>

and -^"Sa and e5dSocS

;

and

are declined like

.

nouns of the third declension

3o3otf 5d5o?5

thus,

N ..........
G -------

.................. he.
. ef

dCo^^oo^

of him.

........ him.
- (5^ *in |-c.

5 -

ly#

him.

Instead of

>&3

and TT43,

we sometimes

find

&

and

in the neuter plural of the demonstrative

pronouns, 268

used in bcoks.

g(J

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
1NTERROGATJVK.
Singular.

M.
wh')? which.?

G.
I).

of whom
C
!0

which

Ace.

whom
...in
frc.

which

Ab.
Plural.

whom ? which?

M.

F.

N.

N.
G.

'..who? which?
.....

of whom
to

which

whom? which?

Ace.

58$
e

whom? which?

Ab.

^S^9..

-^
which follows the rules
for the first de-

269

Instead of <&&, the word ^3S^

clension,
is

often used, in the singular, to denote a female.

270
the

The

initial <^

&

<^

of the interrogative pronoun

3

is

constantly converted, in

common
In the

dialect, into

&

o^3
-

".

271

common

dialect,

><3>

-F>%> and c*5oS5\

<&

are used, in the singular

number

of the definite pronouns, instead of

is

&

7T

and *ti$\pi except in

of ^.

the accusative, which

made

to terminate in

P^ instead

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

272

'

As

the pronouns of this class refer to a

all

number of objects, they have no

singular, but are

of the plural number.

COLLECTIVES.
M.
Sf

F.

N.
............... so many.
...

N.
G.

^oSeso ........................ ^<0^

^oe

^o&fcB 3cx>_?f ..Sp^OS

........

q$.C&'Sx>g_

of po many.
to so

D.
Ace.

^oSeBi .......... /.

--.^^^5^^ .........

many'
W y.
so

S?oeB$ ................. . ......

2?oSe,.<Lr*
.

Ab.

^^ -^..^^C^,,.f^

S?^C^
.

......... 50
.

w
frc.

~$L$

S^...in

many.

OF SUBSTAIs'TlVE PRONOUNS.
The
dialect.
initial

81

of this pronoun

is

constantly written ooo, in tho

common

273

M. %

F.

N.
G. D.
Ace.

ef>oe3

...........

...............

o&^ca

....................... to off.

e>oel

......................

..<if>^c3

....................... a//.

Ab.
Af.

F.

^-

N.
G.

^o&&*> ...................... "."8^.....; .................... a few.

^oe3.

r o^e3^x)' _ M r ^c^..r ^ci3cSx)^l ofafeio.

>

>

D.
Ace.

^025631 ..... ...................

Ab.

r^o^^er6 - -^^ - ^....r^c^S

M.
<^

..

er-

^^

^ ^a
,

few*

INTEBEOO1TIVE.
F.

N.

N.
G.

^o2SftX3 ........... .. .............. cOSK ........................... hoiotnany?

^o2SeS..<io2e^oo|l

....

<^^&3

..^S^cfeSSooS' ..ofhowmany?

Ace.

<o>e<. .........................
<^o^e3
initial
..

tco

...................... ^o

w many ?

Ab.

er*

^^

The

^
<>J

of this

$&j LC*3er*-l5tf-$'*. in & AOMJ mawy ?. pronoun is, in the common dialect, converted into c3o.
.
..
. .
.

274 275

None

of the foregoing pronouns of the third person can be used

more than

once in a sentence, with reference to the same person or thing. If I say, ~^c<5&
he,

"ofr^oQ

e^* with his father, S^-SV^'^'C^b has come, 1 should not be un-

derstood to express that he (the third person) has come with his
that

own
If I

father, but

he (the third person) has come with the father of a fourth.

ask

SX<&>

Soooo^is^awiyc-a* did

he go to his liouse ? I ask whether he (the third

person) went to the house of another, not whether he went to his

11

own

house-

82
276
This peculiarity
rise to the reflective

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
in the use of the

pronouns of the third person, has given

is

pronoun IF'So, which

the same for

all

genders, and

is

always used with reference to some nominative of the third person preceding
Singular.

it.

N
G

'.

er'jfc

he, she, or

it.

li#-lf#9blf:i

of him,
t

her, or

it.

D
Ace
.

&?5o
&&* ortfffc^

j l i nii

^r, or
it.

it.

him, her, or
in

Ab

^....erS-ll^^..
Plural

fa. him, her, or

it.

jq

15"

5b or

"ST*s5bo

O r &S5bSo they.

of them.
to them.

Ace...

es$cor &>x>,
#35b....er*
-

them.

Ab
we
say

"tf-

S*....

in

S$c.

them.

^c&5tf#o.^iT*>-S^-sr>c2& C ?5oooo&3l c?T* ^W "^T C-UJ rfirf Ae ^o to /'.

T)
(

Ae cime with his (own) father.

(oit'w)

house?

277

The pronoun
flexion
is &Rto*>fy

<&?*>

commonly
it

written oSoSo,
is

what?

is

defective:

its

in-

or

>3, but
sing.

seldom used, except in the nominative or

sing. oO&Sl, or

dative case

thus,
?

nom.

iX>, what? dat.

<6So63,

or

for what

278

why The words ^c^-efo^-^o^when

standing alone, are not to be consi-

dered pronouns, but adverbs, respectively denoting in this place, in that place, - er* - "^<& - $& and in what place ? but when the postpositions S'o'eb.^

&

and a few others, are

affixed to

them, they are indeclinable pronouns, res-

what ? as pectively denoting this, that,

^o2&er*

in this,

&Q&'$&

by that,

what? wherefore.?

ADJECTIVES.
O p "Z^CS&O

ADJECTIVES.
279

The

l#bo adjectives are indeclinable, varying neither in gender, in num;

her, nor in case

but dependent for these distinctions upon the substantive

to

nouns or pronouns,
lowing
list,

some of which they are

invariably prefixed.
will

The

fol-

containing a few of the most

common,
or
v>.

shew that they

gene-

in the short rally terminate

vowels

-Xv

cold.

84
289

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

A number of

$$

adjectives,

ending in

"

and denoting

qualities

which

are the peculiar objects of sight, taste, or touch,

when

prefixed to substantive
thus,
sweet,

nouns or pronouns, may,

at pleasure, affix the

particle '$.;

t$v black,

~S^

white, ^|g red,

^^
c.

yellow,

T^^> azure

blue,

^C^A

^)^

sour,

S?^
come

or

#>
all

~^_^
-

soft, prefixed to substantives, either

remain unchanged, or becloth,

cSfcg

iSeJSO

as

"%>

or

HoiOw|o a

white

or

d&CSO

SooSSb a sweet fruit, "^o

or 13oj

>_)

so/2 cotton.
to substantives,

281

To

~e&3gs$x> adjectives,

when prefixed

we may, at

plea-

sure, affix the particles

;-> cxwtf or ef>oook>3o&3

^.3> new

from the verb

q) to

become; but these affixes do not alter their meaning in any way whatever; thns,

~lo$ great, C^t

rT*^

Iar9 e >

>

^^
***

blind

>

short ^^ O

>

3&>w

slack,

&c.

make

"^-^ocootf or 1boc56x>o4SX)ew a
or

'^'^o^jSb^cO
to

a great person, and so forth; these particles,

<^,

however, cannot be added

until that affix is first
at the

the adjectives mentioned above as assuming

thus,
to

inserted;

we cannot say
/

^^^
^

but

it is

same time
to

be remarked, that the addition of

adjectives
is,

cootfdux^o^S
sary nor elegant.

"^^g^

in general, neither neces-

EXCEPTIONS282

The
K)S5rS)oX

adjective

^^-

handsome or fine, always

~Z>&

affixes

$>

thus,

we

say

-%&

a handsome person, not

and

S&^oX.
5?na//,

& empty, 5&o& good,

lJj

^^

take no affixes whatever: thus,

~?o an empty box,

S&94w59(0x a good person,

</tzw,

"^^J^^^ a small horse.

;

284

The

adjective

^ (^

swa//, affixes, at pleasure, the syllable S&o

to

which e>;6.> f^tf or

^S^ix)
it

ow^iw^otS may be optionally

:

added jthus,^^"^^
5$x>,

or

^f^^oc^T^A^sSbo ^'^ paper

when

it

assumes the syllable

admits of another form, according to the following rule.

All iSS'QS&o adjectives ending in s&o,

285

when

prefixed to substantives, either

final 3$*, to

affix

^KQ-^ocotf

or eocwtfSoosfo&S, or change the

3) or

OF ADJECTIVES.
thus, fc3o&3$x> beautiful,

85

makes e5os5b/<6-t9o&3&ax>tf or
590&4) or

or 1&n>3&><yo a beautiful face or /aces, or

or "sSoroS&Dew abeatttifulface, on faces.

All other-"eSsr^sSao adjectives ending in
affixes

O when prefixed,

wi shout

any of the

286

abovementioned, to substantives beginning with a vowel, require the

insertion of

&,

to prevent hiatus; thus, g'eaSo sharp,

and

^o^

an arrow,

make

^ef&o^^

a sharp arrow

$^o jwre, and

9?&S, a

mirror,

make

a pure mirror.

Some
manner.

"S^sSix) adjectives are derived from substantives in the following

287

SUBSTANTIVES.

ADJECTIVES.

a leak ................. &>3 ............... leaky.

lameness ...............

oo3 ................. /am<?

................ iron ................... SJ&SS... ................. irow.

................

hemp, flax ............ a^SS ................... hempen.

..............

deafness .............. "SJX>*3 .................. //w/I

It is

necessary to apprize the reader that

many

"wSfcsSM nouns are used

as a

288

both

as adjectives

and substantives, in the same manner

thus,

number

of terms

in our

own language;
a jamp

#&av^
noun
tall
:

c ioffl} the

we say &&&$gf&&8fo& the damp is great, and word $& jn Xeloogoo, and damp in English, being
a substantive,

used, in these sentences,

thus, also,

first as

and afterwards

as

an adjective

we

find that

^:&> means
or breadth,

either bitter or bitterness,

"3c^

or tallness,
Sec.

"S^ew^ broad

wCo)

heavy or weight, &$) sweet

S$bo,

or sweetness,

but e>o;Sx> 6ea M fy O r beautiful, and other words in

which

are used either as adjectives or substantives,

may be

.considered properly to
that,

belong to the Utter class of

nouns;

for

it

will

be observed

by rule 285,

they cannot be used in the former sense, without adding certain affixes, which
as substantives they never

assume.

86

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
OF OOj35DoS

ADJECTIVES.
for the derivation

289

The

rules

which have, been given

of substantive

nouns

from the Sanscrit, apply equally to the derivation of adjectives from that language
:

ft3^5S3xx> adjectives, therefore, in opposition to

""oS^*

adjectives,

admit of the distinctions of gender,

Sanscrit.

number, and

case-

Teloogoo.
Masculine-

Crude.

Adjective.

Feminine.

Neuter.

........ .virtuous

........ skiUed

#C

Q"

..independent........
..

^$C

&
e&>

,^

i.* ........

X>

&

S5bo

Stf&o.CS.

dependent ......... SS&eS'o,

i

JoicOb ....... rf^ar .............. i5o

i3

<).

excellent. .........

V-.>

lofty, tall .......

.poor.............

>.

........

...,,

.i

.^

proper..

extensive
dexterous..

290
.

e^t^S$>^x) adjectives, when immediately prefixed to substantives, do not in They usually require the particles general admit of declension.

OF ADJECTIVES.
or

87
if

&OM& 6oos5"o&3 to
if

be affixed to the nominative singular,

the substantive

be neuter; and

the substantive be masculine or feminine, either to the singu-

lar or plural nominative, according as the substantive

may

be in the singular or

plural
ticles,

number: feminine

^3&S&3

adjectives in v, before affixing these par-

previously change the final ^into

x3~5"ofl in the plural,

oiyex)

in the singular,

and

^Tfo
;

or

from the word

*ex3,

denoting a female

thus,

or ox>o*& a handsome house or houses,

handsome men,
C

.1 _
8* OXJJ5",
ro

a handsome z0oman,<&o&Ty*o^2
handsome women.

ooo?5
;

jo

ex>

or

<CJ

.^xD

Neuter #*^5&3bo adjectives in sS, instead of

C5oooj5 600^0^

affixing

fcS/fo.eSoxitf or
final

291

may,

like

the

"el'JfCSSx)

adjectives,

change the
or

&,

to

^) or o^>; thus, we may say

#tf#)

or

7^5^o^)^ewo
full

sSew&ew a

melli-

fluent expression or expressions (literally, words

of quintessence.)

Sanscrit adjectives ending in the terminations o^el

into Teloogoo,change them,in the masculine gender in the feminine, to

and

v>cS

when adopted
^b;

292

toS5"o&cband3fc&x~
55"

S5oe&TT

>

ex>

and

5fcoe^)"C~'cx )

or

and 5fo) ; and

in the

neuter gender, to S^otf o$x> and SSoo^sSix), or o?T) and 55b^o.

EXAMPLES*
Crude.
Adjective.

Masculine.

Feminine.

Neuter.

{
...sensible ....... ax5as^oQbc^

r <
/ >

1
I

C tf

jectives, preceding

#e^3&S&o substantives, often drop

of Sanscrit

all

their

293

Teloogoo terminations, and are compounded with the substantive in their uninflected or crude state, according to

the rules

grammar

thus,

88
).. ...wicked

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
nnd.....~5^Jx(OCC<2&

a gi an f

maj

become
[a wicked giant-

... .excellent

3to&...&$<\$to ...... ahorse

................

V/Vo^S^ an
[excellent horse.

and... ...<"3bo ...... money .................

&Z$$x>

[much money*
opulent,

and

3&& ..... a

master

................

6 fJ *rJf^s j&&

[an opulent master.

294

In the common dialect r neuter adjectives in S&>, of whatever clasp, ajre conwith the particles fcS>;6-fc>aitf or >ax>tf&x>tfo3, to substantly prefixed,
stantives of all genders

and numbers promiscuously;

thus,

or

box*W&c.
295

a handsome man-men- icoman-ivomen-face?-faces,

and
i

fyc.

The

rules respecting *25^SS'3xx>

9gl:5 ^"^o

zf

substantives

are

also

of the same descriptions. applicable to adjectives OF ADJECTIVE PBONOUNS.

296

be divided into the same classes as the pronouns may definite and indefinite, with the substantive pronouns of the third person, viz.

...,,.

_v

The

adjective

addition of the possessive pronouns.

POSSESSIVE S.
297

The

possessive pronouns

consist of the possessive or genitive cases of the

without the postposition respective substantive pronouns,

^|1_

viz.

his (remote)
.her or its (do)
.their

.our

fy

F. (proximate)

.our

.their -N. (do)

sr8
.your
his (proximate)

their

M> $

F. (remote)

r63....; ........ their

N.(do)

his, her, its

her or

its

(proximate)
;

.their

298

These pronouns are indeclinable

manner
*r*

as the

!#3&o

they are prefixed to nouns in the same but without affixes of any kind ; thus* adjectives,

ow*x>
on

my ^

-5T8^:)a955boex) their horses, &c. house, * ojn

OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUJSS.
DEFINITE PRONOUNS.
Each of the
definite adjective

89

pronouns consists of one long

it is

vowel

viz.

299

the demonstrative proximate "^, or, as

this; the demonstrative remote

vulgarly written,

osr

meaning
it

&

that;

and the interrogative

or, as

is

commonly
nouns

written,

<sx>,

what ?

When

prefixed to

substantives,

these

pro-

are sometimes converted into their corresponding short vowels,

is

and the

following consonant
it is

then doubled; thus, -&>;ffe33bo or S^JTsSbySSbo or, as

commonly

written,

cxw^oSbej&w or ox>'5S>y
or
<^;3"i>5$x>

this lotus>

&~&"vx>

or

that lime,

&T*^S$w

or as

it

ia

vulgarly

written
"

or

^>yw3fc> what

time?

Wh,en the vowel

is

shortened, the

is

doubled, in each of these examples.

INDEFINITE PBONOUN3.

The

indefinite adjective
affix
;

pronouns are prefixed

to plural substantives, with-

300

out any intermediate

nite substantive

they are merely the nominative cases of the indefiviz.

pronouns of the third person, M. & F. AT.

so

many.

all.

a few.

The

indeclinable particle

&0&, commonly

written

^olT9

meaning

thz

301

whole, in full, Sec. affixed to substantives, has the

e=

same

force as the pronouns

or

W^

prefixed to them
or

thus,

^oSwSfo&oStftaJ
all things.

or

all

men t

W^Sjbgew

3j&)e;o5

12

CHAPTER FIFTH.
VERB
;

S.

Teloogoo verbs are of four kinds neuter, active, passive, and causal. These verbs are divided into two parts, the affirmative, and the negative

302
;

303

and each of these two parts has an indicative mood, an imperative mood, partiThe affirmative verb has an infinitive, but the ciples, and a verbal noun.
negative verb has none.

INDICATIVE.
The
tenses
;

indicative

mood,

in

the affirmative verb, has, properly, only four

304

the present, the past, the future,

is

and the

aorist.

In the negative verb,

the aorist

the only tense.

;

Each of

these tenses has two numbers, the

singular and the plural

and in each number there are three persons; but

In the singular

there

is

no

distinction of gender, except in the third person.

number of most

of the tenses, the third person masculine

is

distinguished from

the third person feminine and neuter, both of which are the same.
plural, the third person masculine

In the
is,

and feminine are one

and the neuter

in

general, different from both.

In a few cases, however, the third person

is

the

same

for all genders. C3 ^

IMPERATIVE.
The
mood,
1st

imperative has two numbers

in the affirmative verb, has
2<1

the singular
;

and the

plural.

This

305

two persons

the 2d in the singular, and the

it

and

in the plural.

In the negative verb,

has the 2d person only in

each number.

PARTICIPLES.
The
verbal,

participles are of
1

two

distinct kirtds

the one

we

shall

denominate

3o6

and the othei

rekitive, participles.
;

The

affirmative verb hag two verbil participles

the present and

(lie past,

307

92
The

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR,
time. These verbal participles negative verb hss one only, indefinite as to

of some personal termination, or of some tense of another require the addition

verb, in order to distinguish

number and

person.

They can never be used

such phrases

as

like the English participles, in adjectives, or substantives,

in speaking, sounding shore, by promising,
Sfc.
fyc.

as, the

they must almost invatense of

riably be followed

by a personal termination, or be governed by some

a verb

as in the

ph rases, froionirtg she speaks, phased he departed, wondering

wondering, represent the Teloogoo

he stands.

The wordsfrowning, pleased, and

verbal participle; and the words speaks,

departed,

and stands, the Teloogoo

governing verb.

308

In the affirmative ve: h,

past,

rl-vere

are three relative participles

the present, tha

and the

indei.' itr

In

the negative verb the indefinite only.

nr>

They admit

of no personal tern nations, they ean precede

.-i

verb, and are termed relative

relative

participles, because
tkdt, is inherent in

the

power of the

Kn-!;l'*ii

pronoun who, which,

them: they

therefore* f.U- MVS refer to

some noun or prowhich grows, a horse

viz.

noun with which they

agree, as adjectives: thus,

tree

that leaps, would be expressed in Telo^g^o by the

relative participles;

"'SjSl^l^ a growing
reader

tree,

&>&>

3^^'xtf

ff

leaping horse. In order that the

this

may

recollect that our relative

pronouns are inherent in

part of

the Teloogoo verb, the relative that (selected, as agreeing promiscuously with
all

genders) will be prefixed to

it

in

English; thus, that leaps, that grows,

frc.

VERBAL NOUNS.
309

The
which
for the
like

is signified

verbal nonns are declinable substantives, expressing the action itself ^S&o follow the rules the verb. Those by terminating in
;

second declension

and those ending in any other

syllable, are declined

nouns of the third declension.

The
form of

origin of every part of the

it

termed the

'^T

root;

Teloogoo verb may be traced to that crude which is sometimes also an abstract noun,

and, in the
imperative.

common
It

dialect, is
in

often the 2d person singular of the affirmative

-<b:

always ends

t)bu,

OK VERBS.
to

near > to ^ s

toprevent, to oppose.
o*

console, to comfort.
to oppose.

80

&...

............................................ fo/>0wr.
............................ to venture, to

dare.

to bless.

to lie

down.

.................... to think.

GC-J& .................................................... to induce, to excite.

to fly.
... ....................................... to

be twisted*

............................ to shine.
to
.

make a
make-

noise, to bark.

.......................... to
i

.......... to write.

38cS58o .......... , .............................................. to rain.

to ask.
.

...................................... to
, ....................... to

thunder.
fly.

to clean, to
to

wash.

study, to read.

to icandeT) to

turn back.

to
.... ..............

grow.

................................... to spin.

It is

necessary to remark that, although the Teloogoo root has been transit is

311

lated with to* the sign of the English infinitive,

signification.

never used

in

an infinitive

94
312

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
From

the root thus terminating in *0 , are formed the verbal participles, and the infinitive of the affirmative verb ; and from these three principal parts of the verb, viz. the root, the verbal participles, and the infinitive of the affir-

mative verb, spring

as

all

the rest of
table.

it's

parts,

both affirmative, and negative,

shewn in the following

OP VERBS.
THE PRINCIPAL PARTS OP THE VERB.

95

From

the root in ^, the present verbal participle

is

formed, by adding

&
to

313

in the superior,
*$>

and

&

in the inferior dialect

k*3 to thus, $~ , beat,

makes

The or ^^>^),beatinff> S^kg be, may be added,, as an auxiliary, to

rules for Sund.hi,

participle

&c&^

from the root &o2Sb

each of these participles, which, by the

;

make

-vSa-^)^

and *&><&>. respectively

rn hence $
i

^^^^.
;

and

rt

^'S3^>^

beating.
is

The

past verbal participle

formed by changing ^ of the root into

9
to the root in

in

31-

other words, as expressed in the table, by adding

\>

^> the
beaten.
;

final

being dropped: thus, from

^?

to beat,

comes >~&, having

final

The

infinitive

is

formed by merely dropping the

of the root

thus,

315

from the root

^^>
tense

comes &*$>,

to beat.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

The present

is

derived from the present verbal participles

;

the past

316

tense from the past verbal participle

the future and the affirmative aorist from

infinitive,

the root, and the negative aorist

affixes

from the

by the addition

of the

shewn

in the table,

which consist partly of certain terminations definpartly

of particles

ing the several persons singular and plural,

interposed

between these personal terminations, and the principal parts of the verb,

whence the tenses are derived.

PERSONAL TERMINATIONS.

The

derived from the substantive personal terminations of the verb are

317

pronou ns.

The
For

personal terminations of the

first

and second persons

are,

318

all the tenses, except the first form of the past tense ..... . .............

thejirstform of the pa ,t tmse

>

Singular ...... 1

> .......................................... ..... ....................

2sf\ ^J"'
Plural ......... 1
.

!.

.1...

.!.

..I.. ........... ......

...}

sSbo ................................................................

^
9

&

.........

,,,,,,, Mt.t... in* ..................

.................

yb
319
o

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
Except the
to *
,

first

form of the past tense, which merely converts the

all

final

the

first

person singular of

the tenses ends io &>, the termination

in .the
first

of the pronoun ~^^> /; the second

person singular,

same manner,

terminates iu q), the final syllable of

in

&^)

thou

the

person plural ends

&,

the termination of "&>*

we

and the second person plural ends iu

&>, the termination of

xr 5o, you.
:

320

The

personal terminations of the third person are not so regular

ihey

stand thus.
Pruent.
Past.
1st form.

Future.
1st form.

Aorist.

Negative Aorist.

24

iorui.

2d

forict.

^
Singular.
'

*w

^ ...
F*.

...

fv^'

<%

A ..""

f
'"-

5o
*

8.
*<r

5o
o\

So
ff\

?>
fls

&>.
iS

<&
f&\

<y\

"H

321

In the present tense, in the second form of the past, and in the negative
aorist, the ,*,hird

person singular ends, in the masculine, with C<J&, the

in

final

syllable of the

pronouns oJC^b or "S^cSfc, he;

first

the feminine

and neuter

gender of the two

of the pronouns
last

mentioned

tenses,
it ;

it

terminates with 3, the final syllable

^S

or

&&,

she or

but in the feminine and neuter of the

mentioned tense,

it

ends with &>.

The

first

form of the past tense, and

all

the affirmative aorist, have ?&, and the two forms of the future $, for

genders in the third person singular-

322
9
9

Except the

first

form of the perfect tense, which merely converts

all

-o

into

the third person plural of

the tenses in the

masculine and feminine

"ST"?^), they,

gendres ends in ?&, the

the neuter of the preset
1

final syllable
1

of the pronouns *>&> or

in
it

tense,

and of the second form of the past tense,

>,

ends in

S3,

the final syllable of the neuter pronouns 2?> or

they; but

the other tenses have the neuter plural the same as in the weurex singular,

except the negative aorist, which terminates in

>

OF VERBS.
INTERMEDIATE PARTICLES,

97

Before affixing the personal terminations above stated to the principal parts
of the verb, from which the tenses are derived
certain intermediate particles, which are the
;

323

the affirmative tenses assume

same for the first and second persons

both singular and plural, but are liable to variation in the third person, as

shewn below.
1st

and 2d persons
and
plural*

3d person

singular.

3d person plural,

singular

Present

98
328

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
The negative
aorist does

not assume any prefix before the personal termi-

nations*

PRESENT TENSE.
329

The

personal terminations, connected with the

~~r>

intermediate particles for

'

D efo-~~ q)-~~' c &c. the present tense, are exhibited in the table ; thus, 8fc-S>^a. in order to form to the verbal When these affixes are added participle, present

verbal participle, in all verbs,

of the participle is dropped, and the present *&- &- T&r&v^- and having four forms, viz. which is formed from the participles, has also four &o&>^, the present tense,
the present tense, the final
*^>

forms,

viz.

T^rfo

!?"*&> - Ji>'sr"<
-

^> - ^"Sr^rfo & c

.

thus, the present verbal

beating, respec-

participles
tively,

rkx>a&

T'&x>&)
&c.
it

-^^-i^^^and S^^S&^^L.
~k13-*& & c
will

make
&c. /

^bg^&>
Sfc.

rfc-ifcT3^ifr &c. or

~^&>

iy\r&

beat

but

be seen, from the table, that the third

in the singular, and the third person neuter in the person feminine or neuter
plural, are not

added

to the participles in

-v&r&^or e&Sx^, but only

;

to those

in

*&>

or e>

they have, therefore, only two forms

;

viz.

T&O^&

or &bS$g&-

Sfc3frSS respectively -Sx>?5^jD or

o, in the

for the conversion in the singular of

<^
ro
j

to

common

dialect,

can hardly be reckoned a

it

new form
or

thus,

tgj

&>

tf^a or

S^ko&^a

she or

beats,

{T^-tfctf^ja
strictly

r|&>S>^g>
Of the
is

they beat.

The
and

participles in

&> and -J^f5^ are both

grammatical, but those in e>

four forms of

^^^ are generally used in the

^f^.
viz.

common

dialect.

the present tense derived from these participles, that only which

derived from

the participle in

-SfcTo^fc

&c

js

strictly

grammatical, the form

is

derived from the grammatical participle in

use
is

-&>, viz.

"^rfo,

vulgar,

and
:

it's

confined chiefly to the religious bramins of the Northern districts

,

but

the forms derived from the &b and ^boO;^ participles in

viz.

U'cS) an d

&>72P^$)

&c. are in

common

use,

and should always be selected in preference

the language.

to the other forms,

when we speak

PAST TENSE330
There
is

not any variation in the past verbal participle, from which the two
;

forms of the past tense are derived

their formation, as

shewn

in,

the table,

is

OF VERBS.
therefore very simple
;

99
r
first

&*&

having beaten makes in the

c.

form

&&> /
is

hast leaten have beaten, S^^BSS thou

The

third person of the first form

Tlb?&
nation

he, she,

or

it

has beaten, the

of
is

^|3 being dropped when

added to
beaten
it.

the termi^""3

"^

&>, beginning with a vowel,

.

In the second form,

having beaten, makes S^lS^jfo

strictly

& c I have

Sfc.

Both of
use.

these forms are

grammatical, and both are equally in

common
E.

F u T u R
All the terminations added to the root,
tense,

to

compose the two forms of

is

this

331

commence with vowels

are added to
it
;

the final

of the root

therefore dropped,

when they

thus, the root

^^ makes
is

^~^>25^ or ^"to^),
first

/ will beat. The second form

of this tense

used by the vulgar only. The

person singular of the second form of

the third person singular in the
is

this tense

must not be confounded with

first

form of the past tense.

^ "l^^

I will beat
;

entirely distinct, in meaning, from

^~^ji^

he, she,
is,

or

it

has beaten

but the
j

only difference in writing or pronouncing them,

long in the former, and short in the
latter.

that the ~*

before r&
to

It is of

much importance

the
;

reader to understand, that the two forms of the future tense are soldom used
the present or the aorist being

commonly

substituted for them.

i

A o R

s T.

The
aorist

formation of the affirmative aorist from the root, and of the negative 332
infinitive,

from the

by the addition of the

:

affixes

shewn

in the table,

is

so simple, as scarcely to require explanation

r

the root

^^
;

makes

it's affir-

mative aorist
riitive

kx

GO >&>f&,

7 do beat, have beaten, or will beat

beat,

and from the

infi-

^^ comes s^^^X), I do not

have not beaten, or will not beat.

IMPERATIVE, PARTICIPLES, AND VERBAL NOUNSAFFIRMATIVE VERBS.

The

afiTirmative imperative
;

is

formed by a'dding

to the

root&>or

Sxr* for the

333

2d person singular
plural
in the
;

&&x>, or in the
for the
is

common dialect
:

"^55oo, for thelst person

last

and

agb

or

cd

2d person plural the

mentioned termination,
;

common dialect,

added

to the infinitive, instead of the root

thus,

from

100
GO

TELOOGOO GBAMMAB.
come

^<^M GO
*X/

or

^ar CO
let

beat thou;

GO

^sSo,

or

in

the

common

dialect

^"^^M,

us beat,
;

^^C^o GO

or

i^cs GO

O r in the

common
that,

dialect

^^^,
we

&ea
itself,

ye

the reader, however, will bear in

mind

by rule 310, the root

in the

common
;

dialect, is often

used as the

2d person singular of the affirmative imperative

-D
,

instead of ^^>J5bo or
GO

therefore,

constantly say

=>

beat thou.

334

The
the

formation of the verbal participles, in the affirmative verb, has

;

been explained

see rules

313 and 314:

it

only

already remains, therefore, to shew

:

manner
is

in

which the

relative participles are

formed

the present relative

in r&r^
,

participle

formed from the present verbal participles

by changthe gramrela-

ing f&>^

into

<^

there are two verbal

participles

in

<&^
in

viz.

matical participle in

"*&w^, and

the

common

participle

*&f&^; the

tive participle, therefore,

has also two corresponding forms, -J&fS^and

ro

^>f^;
and, in
is

thus,

from

4W&3&^L
dialect,

an(j

&>o?&)&)^ beating,
that beats.

come

^t^ "^^.

the

common

^^^^^
^
s

The

past relative participle

;

formed by adding the syllable

to the past verbal participle

thus,

from g^

&
e*

having beaten,
is

comes

&$ that has

-=

beaten
*"=

the indefinite relative partici-

ple

formed by adding to the root

&b or

&

in the superior,

and ~* or
a
:

&3 in the

common

dialect,

and

as

all

these terminations

commence with
are

vowel, the

final

of the

root
its

must be dropped

when they

added
^

thus, the root

^^ makes

indefinite relative

participle
dialect,

S^^o^o
^

or
1

l^s

in the superior

dialect,

and

in the

common
is

^~

or

"fr

that beats, has beaten, or will beat.

as the indefinite relative participle.

The

root itself

somtimes, in books, used

335

The

affirmative verbal
dialect,

noun

is

formed by adding
tne infinitive
;

&

to the root, or in the

common

by adding

S^sSw to
dialect

thus, from

^^

come

or in the *"oo&o, eo

common

&&>x>
to

the beating.

336

The

negative imperative

is

formed by adding

to the infinitive
;

os5bo or

o&rt>,

or in the
in the

common

dialect ^, for the

2d person singular
2d person plural
;

and oc2& or ocd,or

common

dialect ^o<^, for the

thus,

from

^^

to

beat

OF VERBS.
come

101
not t/iou,

^k&3bo
60

or JT>eoloj)on> O r
60

^^Z* beat O
By
adding
to
it

and

60
,

or

or s

k>$ QCS beat not ye.

;

tc

the infinitive s

we form

the negative verbal participle

participle
;

by adding

$,

we form

the negative relative

;

and by adding
to beat

to it S5o,

we

form the negative verbal noun

beating or having
GO
the not

thus,

from "~k>
eo

come

%~^ without
*-3
;

beaten

"~<^<0 that eo

doe s not, has not, or will not beat

and S~to*K>

beating.

Neuter and active verbs are conjugated

therefore,treat of them conjointly
;

in

the

same manner

we

shall,

337

3$w from the merely distinguishing the iS^fc

ee^3&S&o verbs
and
shall

we
this

shall afterwards

submit an example of the passive verb,

conclude

chapter with a few remarks on the causal verb.

OF "3#3Sw VERBS.
Roots in &> or d&o undergo certain changes to which other verbs are not 338
liable
:

we

shall, therefore, divide

all

the verbs in to three conjugations

the

first,

including
<3&> or -i&

verbs the root of which terminates in 'any other syllable

all

than

the second,

those that have the root in cCco

*&>
;

and the

third, all

those of which the root terminates in

conjugation,

and, in

of each giving an example

we

shall place first the

correct

grammatical

form, the
it.

common

forms following in order, as they more or less approach to

FIRST CONJUGATION.
All the
roots (that terminate in any other syllable than ctfw or
;

-^ belong 339

to this conjugation tions

and merely require the addition of the

different termina-

mentioned in the foregoing table.

The

^
root
r
to

beat, is selected as

an example of
common.
,

this conjugation.

340

Hoot..,.. ....... ,...^

^^

common.

Present verbal
participle ......

g-^ ^^ck ..-^^^^^^..^30 beating. "y <*' eo eo eo

1
........................ . .......... . ............... liming
.

Past... do ..........
Infinitive ..........
,

beaten.

...... ...*., ........ "? eo

..... . ............. . ........... to

beat.

102

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT.
common.
.

..

^00^30..,

..Heat.

W^A)
{
eo

She or

it

beats,

.You

beat.

common.

common.
..I beat.

He

beats.

_S~

fe.'

J C^A,>.^^ft.
eo

it

beats .

fy^b.vtSf-mF^^

I
>

eo

c^

. .

eo

We beat.
You
beat.

f^

^
*N

HS

1^0

1 ^'

"^"

^ ^w W~ ^^^
S)

---

^
"

r
S)
I

*"

TIiey

beat.

(_^;

^6ooe$o^\

-.i^^ooQbJ^N

PAST.
^8"ST"^o
eo
"

I have beaten.
.
.

q^)

...thouhast beaten.
....

...He
-x

has beaten.

f^
i^Jcte;
1*

eT
r

eo

r~3?5a 60
~%-&>

.i Co

(c^

t...

<
I

cv-;

c mmon. ^3oo.

(.

She, or

H has

beaten.

OF VERBS.
..

ej
rt>

eo
...

We

have beaten.
beaten.

fe3^r 5o eo
...

You have
,.1
*

r'feSa

> They have beaten.

eo

.,

eo

( '

FUTURE.
common.

I shall
eo

beat.

-$)
-i

Thou
1

will beat.

fH&. she or

it

wi ill beat-

J
CJ

We shall beat.
..You will beat.

eo

.~~^So..,
eo

fa
^s|

eo"

"J

}.

They

will beat.

A O RI ST.
',

rfzW 6ea^, or shall beat.

kif

_
eo

TAow
.fie,

beatest, didst beat, or wilt beat.

z<

sAe} or

6eafe,

rfzrf

beat, or will beat.

We
fbl
..........

beat,

did beat, or shall

beat.

'>

^^ beat,

or will beat.

'^^ M

!*
TAcw
6efl^, c?irf 5ea^.

or will beat.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
beat thou .

&'sSbo ...... S^^-^Xoo..

eo

...letvsdeat.

common.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.

PRESENT.
common.

PAST.
........................ that

has beaten.

INDEFINITE.
common,

common.

VERBAL NOUN.
common.
eo
tlus

beating.

NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

AOR
.%

S T.

^~^^a

I do

not,

did not, or shall not beat.

^
gi

^
r^'
re

&$)
J

Thou

dost not, didst not, or will not beat.

beat.

05

^ [^

|3C<5&

ffe does not, did not, or will not

She, or
e
it,

k> &>

does not, did not, or

ivill

not beat.

do

not,

did not. or shall not beat. did not> or wil1 not

o nof>
1

*
N

> They do

not,

did not, or tmll not beat.

J
IMPERATIVE.
common,
r

^^03600

......

r*&&&r.... ....'., ........... *g';

Common.

"^^0^
&j

beat not ye. /

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.
.ivithout beating, or without

having beaten.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
that does not, did not, or will not beat.

VERBAL NOUN.
.....'-,.

.the not beating.

OF VERBS.
The
following are a few examples of the numerous verbs in the
all
first

105
conju-

341

gation which, in
Root.

their forms, are similar to

^^

to beat*

Present verbal participle.

Past verbal
participle.

Infinitive.

..,!^ ..... 5501

.....

...... S$ex>?f ...... to

utter, to pronounce.

______ S93& & c ..... W^. o

.

...... to sell

-6

...&c .....

...^^ * ......... to

plait

......

&c ..... 8 ........

tf ......... to

become
.

cool, to fie

[extinguished:

...... to

swim.
to produce,

.......

-&>$ ...... to briny forth,

[applied to cattle, or grain,

.

....&c.

...

......

....... to

swell.

eo"

eo

*=

eo
.

.fo listen.

v,

..&c....^C^

?&x

...,&c .....

^^

........ c^rS.. ..... <o

leanupon.
mount.
dry.

^0

-J^b^a....^ ..... <^i

......

^ ^

.. ..to

....... to

to press.

Jto

insert (in writing.}

& wash,
.&> bite.
.to

to bleach.

to over/low.

b e found.

.... to

break,
'

EXCEPT LONS.
The undermentioned and
by and
-C6 or &>,

change &>*$> or

a few other roots ending in &>, when followed at pleasure, into or o-^, ^> or o2^

342
;

^&,

&

in these verbs, the syllables

into' o,

or

tf>,

followed by

changed

the

&

^, are invariably
into
<t 3
.

being

at the

same time, converted

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
to

say.

to see, to
to
to

bring forth,

buy, to take.
hear.

to eat.

343

For

instance,

s^^b

to buy, in

order to form the present affirmative verbal

;

participle,

adds *&, and makes g^ok-Sb or s^rfo^ or i^o-Efc buying

and in

the affirmative aorist

^ &>&>(&

or

^r&^x)

or S^O&D^O.

Jn

the second and

third persons plural of the affirmative aorist, instead of

i^oS&Sb, we may, by
&>
will
itself,

a rule applicable to these verbs only, change the

into
<*
;

of &>, or the

thus,

^ocSc5b or s^o.&o^, yow or they buy, did buy, or

buy;

thus also S^ffo followed by

^^v^, makes ^o^f6o^

buying; and, in the

perfect tense, i""*^ followed by

w&, makes s^o&SiO I have bought.

344

The foregoing
to

verbs, together with

to

go
corrupted.........

laugh or smile.

to suit, to Jit. to
.to

.to fall.

break.
descend.

.<o

place, to keep
-=>
,

may

at option

change

at the
"

commencement

of

any of the terminations

mentioned

in the table, into

c&>; thus,

*^13?& or i^^^or^o he has boughty

"~^^^
345

or

^^^0^^ I shall buy.

All the roots mentioned above as exceptions, instead of forming the past of relative participle the affirmative verb in the regular manner, may, at pleasure,

form

it

by changing

the final

*o

of the root into

*"

and doubling the

that

preceding consonant; thus, or e$X thatjitted.

we

say either

"^

or

^^.

bought,

&^<5

346

The

roots in r& specified in rule 342, together with the three roots in
tense, in a

&o

mentioned in rule 344, contract the second form of the past

peculiar to themselves
;

manner

by doubling the consonant of the second syllable, which coalesces with the vowel of the third syllable, and rejecting both the

OF VERBS,
vowel of the second
g^&iapffc
syllable,

107
syllable
;

and the consonant of the third

ro-

thus,

I Bought, becomes
to

Rr

o
<

^&,

and SS"Sr*&>, Ifdl, becomes 3Tpi&.

full

The

verb S~&>,

buy,

is

here given at

length, as an example of the

347

irregular verbs of this conjugation.

Root ................ .............

^^.
common.

common.

Present

Past.. ....... do ................ s""

Infinitive ........ . ..............

'^

......................................... having

bought*

s^> ...... .... ....... ..... ........... ......to

buy*

Verbs

in ?&,

such as

*"f&, do not derive

any form of the present tense

348

from the participle in

&>-&>.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT.
I buy.
'.....Thoubuyest.
..- ....... He buys.
-

She or

LuySi

"oi&^3$i... .......... We

buy.

common.

common.

common.

rt>

.....

o&n>cfi&...j&

108

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
...JF<?

Buy.

PAST.
peculiar.

......

Iboughl

common.

She or

it

bought.

S
\

^ s^o^SB ...... riO-sn>5b ........... r'^r^Sb ...... Youlought.

fj r^^a ......... "{0^80 ........... s^^V^ ......

........

-^

They bought.

FUTURE.
common.

I shall
,

buy.

Thou
)

wilt

buy

r^
_
.

......

or
ibfo; ......

\ \Hesheoritwillbuy. J

We
"

shall buy.
will buy.

You

U
2
*&(**<
no

r'-saio ............................. r

r'^^T. ....... j

A O R IS
re ro

T.

^c$D?5>...
sr;5o2$;qg).

o25b^>.../^M y, bought, or shall buy.

i

^o2$D^)...7%OM

^^, boughtest, or wilt buy.

&>

^^3?^ ........ ,.,. ....... ,.,He}

she, or itbuys, bought, or will buy,

.OF

VERIis.

lOi.)

g^oc&SSM.. We buy, bought, or shall buy.

or

J&5b-)
> low buy, bought, or
trill

buy.

or

g^OiS&i
\*-S

^
1

They buy, bought, or will buy.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.
.....buy thou.

.let

us buy.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT.

common.
...

."~o

^f^

that buys.

FAST.
that bought.

INDEFINITE.
common,
"*

common.
r

tJ...

*~3$...that buys, bought, or will buy.

VERBAL NOUN.
common.
.s^p^SiSjco
th e buying.

NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
AORIST.
Idonot, did not, or shall not buy.

^
co

r
j

^?5q^

..... .............

Thou

dost not, didst not, or wilt not buy.

^
"*

sT($<:&> ................ He does not, did not, or will not buy.

She or

it

does not, did not, or will not buy.

We do not,
You do
-j

did

not, or shall not buy.

not,

did

not, or will not buy.

13

f-

Z*/je^ cfo

o^,

did

not,

or will not buy.

110

TELOOOOO GRAMMAR
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.

"?5r ...... buynotthou,

common.

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.
t... without

buying, or without having bought.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
that does not, did not, or will not buy.

VERBAL NOUN.
the not buying.

SECOND CONJUGATION
349

IN

All verbs having the root in cOw-form the affirmative aorist and imperative,
either in the

manner explained
>,

in the table rule 312, or

by changing cX&>&> of

the affirmative aorist into

and

cCfotS of the affirmative imperative into

cfcco

&;
into

and, in these cases,

if

the vowel preceding

'

be

9
,

it

must be changed

thus,

from "^cOw

to

do comes ScX&>&>;& O r
:

^^jfo I do,

did, or shall do.

q or "^>efs&o

let

us do; but the root tf&c&d, which has 9 preceding

makes

&<ScX5oo2&>?& or C2&e&>;$>,

and tfcld&>SS&

or ^S^cS'sSM, never

and ^^ifsSM.

350

In the

common dialect,

roots in cs&o form the second person of the

;

affir-

mative imperative by changing the cs&> into ox>

thus, "^cSSoo

to

do makes

"Sooo do thou.

351

Roots in
these

csfio,

when they

affix 9

^= or

-=*,

or terminations beginning with

invariably change the final
/

vowels, as shewn in the table, rule 312,

ctf

syllable

into

& or <&

thus, the root "3ctf

the past verbal participle,

makes
it

"^ or ^

^ when
5

ifc

addg 9 tQ form

AC

y^

done, and
.

when

it

adds

&c.

~~&&> when followed by

to forra the future,

makes "^"^2S^3 or

^"?S^> & c
by
?5b
i

never

-3>^&
at option

& to form the verbal noun, and

has two irregular

n the third person

]

singular of the affirmative aorist, such roots change

the cOoo

nto

Joo

N. B.

The verb

imperative, viz.

^or ^^

S^^

forms in
or

Jw^

^ OM ^o3&

OF VERBS.
only
;

Ill
$/, or
it does,

as

^c&ok
;

or

iS&eo
if

the doing, ~&<3$x>& or ~3>&ti> fo,

3
,

did, or will do

and

the vowel preceding the cS&> be

to be

it

must be changed
damp, *<3&c&r&

into

thus,
is,

8<3$x>

damp, makes ^2&c&<b

the being

he, she, or it

was, or will be damp, never e^&i&k), and

<^<&>r&>.

Roots
ble
D
cfcx>

incCco,

when

followed by e&r&^ore&j invariably change the sylla-

352

into the letter &,

which coalesces with the

&>,

e5

in

it's

doubled form
present verbal

thus, "-ScBcw followed

by e&r&^ or

to

form the

common

participle always

becomes

&<&^. and

"& respectively, never "-ScSSw^)?^^

353

and

"-ScOooo^b.

The

following

is

an example of

this conjugation.

Root ................................
common,

common*
doing.

Present verbal participle ........

. .

"S^r^J^. .."^ i^

Past ...... . ..... do ...............

Infinitive ..........................

^cO...-u/'a ................. . ..... o ......... having done.

^-ScOo ............................ ..... ...#> do-

Verbs of

this

conjugation do not derive any form of the present tense from

the participle in cfc&x&.

AFFIRMATIVE VERBINDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT.
common.

common.

I
*~
.

do.
dost.

..... Thou

1^
c|
.

u
.

e does.

-\

*
I.

She or

it does.

^J

They

do.

112

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

PAST.
...... i did.
)

......

.......

......

Thou

didst.

r*s

il.jfe;

"""

or

or

^
\

She or

it

did.

common.

common,

We
fe

did.

did.

FUTURE.
commoncommon.

I shall

do.
do.

Thou wilt

or -

\ He, she.or it will do.

We shall
-w5^v>6
r?5

do.

ax-^

v.

,m d0t

^^5 '

They

will do.

A O R
""*

S T.
/ do, did,

or shall do.
didst, or wilt do.
it

TAoM c?o^
He, she, or
......

does,did,or will do.

We,

do, did, or shall do.

did, or will do.

cbo2&3o .......... ^SbSo.

...

.YOM do,

^e&Sb...-j
{

^'
>

^-_^

.
.

......

____-5

/
_x

They & do

>

did,

or will

do,

C3(OOr5J-

OF VERBS.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common,*

113

?cK>ajGO

^Scoo
.

dotlion.

common.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT.

"25b<3\

.."-^oOO^A..

114

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

"^ctfo^T ................................. without doing, or without having done.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
13c55o<0 .................................. that does not, did not, or will not do>

VERBAL NOUN.
"ISctfoSo ..... ............................ the not doing.

354

According

to thg

common
t

dialect, the syllables

t

or ^, in this conjugation,
cO,

when followed by
persons in the
-

the consonant
5

&
it's

are at pleasure changed into the letter s

which coalesces with the

first

in

doubled form

thus,

the

1st

and 2d

form of the past tense of "-ScCbo

m ay

become-

-s

&
3

".

"3 **>$.., _^~"

................ ............ 1 did.

"3_o>S) ..........................................
,

Thou

didst.

...........................

We

did.

355

The
Root.

following, with all other verbs in

cS5co,

are conjugated under the fore-

going rules.
Present verbal participle.

Past verbal
participle.

Infinitive.

..to

become fatigued, or
[tired.

....^

iecowe
i?z

disease.

N .......

o<

........

...o obtain.
..

to twine.

....~3ootfcX5o to attack in the field

of

{battle.
to

ma^e a noise,

to sound.

to take, to

purchase, to
\pull-

fo

weave.
n/ft, to

...^

bloom.

OF VERBS.
Root.

115

Present verbal participle.

Past verbal
participle.

>

Infinitive.

(a

pour.

x ....... look) .........

oMcOo ....... fa graze.

____ to

bear a burdendisgust.
to throw.

S^cOo ...... to feel

.Is.cxxx) ...... 13

cfcooi&^x);^ ......
......

S.^> ........

y~s^cCb

..... fo castf,

SfOdBoo ...... rDcSS&o-i^^

JfO^b ........ r)o5o ...... to mix.

08 ci&o ...... ^QcKS&o-ESb,^^

22<Sci5bo ......

...... 3oQ^> ........

o9d5o^. ..^
.

ra<Vt.

^^cBoo^J^^ ...... K&& .......

i2.cCo ..... to

tremble tcith fear,

to

[fear.

Hoots in

cOoo of
;

two

syllables, of

which the

first

ends

in a

long vowel, often

the root

356

shorten that vowel

7

and, in this case, double the

infinitive wcOo, &cJ5o

ctfb; thus,

~d&>

ma} become 13cC&>C, the

&c. &c.
IN
-Efc.

THIRD CONJUGATION

All verbs having the root in &>, form the aorist and imperative, either
the

in

357

manner explained

in the foregoing

table, rule

312, or by changing

&&>
Cf.

in the affirmative aorist into $>,

and -&>>

in the affirmative

imperative into

If the root has a double

^^,

the
-

& and & are

>>o-i&&>o

also doubled, into

&

and

_&

thus

&>o-c$oo&>

or

^^o^i^>

or &S)o^55oo }

"So^^D^j

or

"So e^o?^, "3a-l^> \25s6o or

~So__^^.
the terminations-^w and SXr, in the second person

In ihe

common dialect,

358

are often dropped in this conjugation. singular of the affirmative imperative,

The undermentioned

verbs terminating in &, likewise deviate from the

*>,

35 i)

rules given in the foregoing table, (312) by forming the infinitive in

instead

of

itf,

and taking
.

instead of

&

before the terminations for the affirmative;

imperative.

116
..
.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
..to

make a loud or clamor[ous noise.

..'..to

walk.
stand.

...to

to iveep, to

lament.

...to call.
....to forget.

to bite.

only when

it

signifies

to

...to
...to

grow,

to

shoot.

[protect,
.to

quit, to leave.

suck, to eat.

...to rise.

(This verb has also

.to

measure,

to serve.

an irregular form in the 2d person of

the affirmative imperative,
rise thou,
viz.

&... .to pass, or

win.
thus, 5bew-&>
to

elapse.

l?^^
and
in

"SoSb

rise ye.)
obew-tS",

call,

makes, in the

infinitive

5oew^ } never

the imperative sbex>q)3Sbo never

>ex)-i&s5ix>.

360

following, and a few other .roots in -Co, may at pleasure form the infiin "& or *>, and may take either -Co or $) before the terminations either nitive

The

of the affirmative imperative.

>...fo

draw,
sweep.

to

drag,

to

draw up

any

thing

to

with the breath, as an

elephant does

o strip off"

any thing na-

water with his trunk.

to protect.
to

turally attached to
suffer.
)

substance.

cut, or carve stone; to

.

churn.
cleanse

separate sand from grain

by rubbing,

to

to

bear

a burden.

[efface.
>..to

to grieve.
.to love.

perforate,

to

cleanse

a
ob-i&....

pot or

vessel, to

carve wood.

to

blow as the wind.

sacrifice.

3../0

thresh.

.to

squeeze, to crush.
to

*&
~~j!>

to

place, or put.

thus,

<&v^

sweep makes, in the infinitive

or

and

in

the

affirmative imperative

&>)\X>x> or

&&\.

&c.

361

The

only deviations from the general rules given in the table, rule 312, of

OF VERBS.
which the following roots
for this conjugation (357
...to
...to

11
first

in

&> admit, are those mentioned in the two

358.)
to rub.
......to

rules

&

reckon, to think.
attend.

owe.

..to

share, to divide.
in

to

move a piece,

as in a

game

...to lurk, to lie

.

wait secretly.

[of chess, 6cc.

o love, to desire.
to claw.

.to

surpass, to go beyond.

,..to

harass, to torment.
scrape, to scratch.

...to

3\....to string (pearls, fyc.}

to

>

to take, to receive.
>

dig.

.to

imagine, to think.

^
in

to

churn'

>

to rob.

to trust, to confide.

to

perform
is

ceremony

to send, to
...to

command,

to rot*

which a string
particular deity,
the

consecrated to
tied

prefer, to approve.

and then
;

round
...to

break in pieces.
say>
*

arm

or wrist

it is

generally per-to

formed by females.
.

.to

weigh.

to increase.

All other roots in

& have the infinitive

optionally either in

& or in

S3,

and,

362

followed by -t&^So^toform the present verbal participle, by &> to form certain parts of the affirmative aorist, or by the terminations for the affirmative

when

imperative, they may, at pleasure, convert

-^

into ^); thus,

&>o-i&,

to bless,

makes

in the infinitive

SCOTS' or
i

&>o3,

in the present verbal participle

&>o
in

-SSb-SSb?^ or

&>o)-c&&>:^; n

the aorist ^S)c-e5:^?53or

&S>o^)2&>o, an d

the imperative <S>)o-is&o or

>S)o^)55bo.

The
in

verbs of the class last mentioned being

more numerous than any

this

others,

363

&, one of them has been selected as an example of

conjugation.

Moot
Present verbal participle
.

common.
blessing.

Past ............ ...do .........

.

.......

having

blessed.
to bless.

Infinite ...... ......................

118
Verbs in

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
this conjugation

do not derive any form of the present tense from

the participle in iSb^Sb.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.
I
bless.

&
*?^ *^

(~
I

^ oSo^TSblNrsCofc
~

^
a<Do<^)-S5b~fr
*

, '

Thou

blessest.

M:Sb

He

blessesz7 blesses.

S
OD

<r

A *\ *x oOQ-EwwSKa
^-.

_>

*<"

(^

A /t -/ ~s ** /^ 8>&oy)ifo(S\8>

She or

t.

You
-^

bless.

bless.

^T/tey

common.

common.

/
/-

6/e*.?.

1'

^JTab
-

......

Stoi&V.ctfb
or ZY blesses.

Cr

t*

'* S>So-ESjQb'srD ^,5b

:::}
PAST.
I blessed.

Thoublessedst.
-

f^
-e
I

S)o^S^o .............. ....$oy*cab..,, ........ He

blessed.

S"^
i

^:

r
* c^
<r\

^^

vif

\ ^

or

comOT)

She

it

blessed.

OF VERBS.
,>We
si -a
.

119
blessed.

(^
3

You

blessed-

fe;

^So^tit*

~&Z)o$ ".::-} FUTURE.

btessed.

I shall
.

bless.

Thou
r J
or
.

wilt bless.

............ He,she,or

it ivill bless.

We shall
You

bless.

will bless.

&S)o.&o
or

A O R I S T.
blessed,

or

shall
[bless. L

blessest,

blessedst, or

*e,

or

blesses,

[blessed, or will bless.

,

blessed, or shall

[bless .
5,

blessed, or

will

bless,

blessed,

or

}
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
\
..

[ivill bless.

frless

thou.

..

j
V
bless.

common.

,.l

common.

common.

f'bless ye.

120

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
RELATIVE PARTICIPLE. PRESENT.
common.
that blesses,

that has blessed.

INDEFINITE.
common.

I blessed,

or will bless.

VERBAL NOUN.
common.

NEGATIVE
AOR
I

VERB.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
S T.

did

not,

or shallnot bless.
wof, or iviltnot bless.

~
*2
,

efostf

no,

c?zo?5<

*:"**

I ^ J

"^ f^

>....[fe

does not. did

rfag,

not. or ivill not bless.

(J
2
-a.

no ^

^^ wo

^?

or

win nof

iSDo-^5'S5bo(S)oS3^bo""^7(e

not> did not, or shall not bless.

not, did not,

&)o#5b""&>o;o5b ..... You

f
)

do

or will not

bless.

TTtcy

fZo

wo^ did

not, or will not bless

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.
common.

............... ..bless

not thou.

....... ~\

V,,., ................... J/^S

j
Ar ERB

AL PARTICIPLE.
without blessing or without having blessed.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
J. ............... that (Joes not,

did not, or will not MPM.

OF

VI-.RBS.

121

VERBAL NOON.
,

.the not blessing.

In the

common

dialect, the syllables

t t5
,

&>

or

-S),

in

this

conjugation,

when
&,

364

followed by the consonant

may
its

at option be

changed into the

letter 8

which coalesces with the

**& or

&, in

double form
>_

_o.

In this case,

if

o precede
^oJ
"^

&
;

it is

dropped

thus aS)o-Ji5beSb<&^ becomes

& *^^

<^L

an(^

the two last forms of the present tense are accordingly converted into

........Z bless.
........

Thou

blessest.

He

blesses.
it

aOIooJS^
.

She, or

We
.

bless,
bless.

You

/-

They

bless.

........

J
form
of the past tense

and the
"

first

and second persons

,

in the first

become

"a

^>> '"
*

.......

.............

[blessed.

^>g) .........................................
o3S3o .......................... . ........ .....

Thou

blessedst.

We
You

blessed. blessed.

?o6

.,

.............................

The

follwoing, with

many

other verbs in *&, are conjugated

under the

365

foregoing rules.
Root.
Present verbal participle.

Past verbal
participle.

Infinitive.

ea^,

applied only

to persons of distinction.

fo

yawn,

to ffape.

16

122
Boot.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
Present verbal participle. Past verbal Infinitive.
participle.

or

V to

grin.

..p-c
or
.

) > to forgive-

SSoR^jDSS )
eo

<*

eo

eo

'" -v

or r

> to

double.

o. i

eo

'

"S
calculate, to

&c

n>e-.tfg- & c ...... tojom,

.

to sew.

&c.

&r*&~.&r--&, c
.

......
.

to change.

&c. 8-Os-. ..&^5"s~

&c.
&c.

......

to

se/e,

to decree.

&c.

"^8^ ..... "^5^

......
......

to join, to unite.
#o think.

&c.

ef^c-O,...C'oCTS' &c.

...... to roast.

EXCEPTIONS366

The

following roots in &> are

and in the irregular in the infinitive,

second

person of the affirmative imperative.

Root.
Infinitive.

Imperative.

2d person singular.

2d person

plural.

SW

.....'.

common.

common

'

OF VERBS.
Root.
Infinitive.

Imperative.

2d person singular. common.

to

2d person

plural.

common.

come.

common.
3\
x/J

common.
CsOu&2.
1

fn Jirinn

"*y
1

?3

lo$M.
.

'

pa

?O<*9

-r-&\.
.

-uT -v&

"

>

\Sbo) common.
r

-iS

"*&\C ^6

")

common.
"^
rc

to enter...

or

"^"^i^ \
common.

^^ c

common.

/"

13uq5v

5bo.

*^5-I$b\

^055v5c2&

common,

common.

common.
Or
t*>".

common.
T

"^

'^)^. ,." xT ^)
:

vTT> ^Sc^b

"TM^ZSOGv

common.

common.

These verbs are of course

infinitive
;

also irregular in

all

the tenses formed from the

367

thus, the negative aorist of

^"^5 OF IRREGULAR "^-zfCSSbo VERBS.

:

is

"^f^> &c. &c.

368 following verbs are so irregular that they do not admit of being classed under any particular conjugation on this account, and because most of them

The

are in frequent use as auxiliaries,

full

it

has been thought proper to give

them

at

length.
dec-JSo
>

Root
Present verbal participle.. .65

'*d'&

>

~\'

6so&-v&>. .....So-iSbf^ ^. ,cio-2&

1

common.
[6s

common.
.

o &*> cfo^

so kx>

.being.

Past

do

dsocis
csoS!*
,

having been.
to be*

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT.
I am.

Thou
s
^i
Lr\

art.

_
I

H?

. i J t3 J

v_

GSOQO-jfo <O"\C!jo. CV
.

..O5O-v&>13'T \ C 3^0 *
CS-

!***
Sfie

ftp }9

or

it is.

124

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
. .

....... (:35O-t&sr^j$bo ........

b.
.
.

We

are.

/ ..... You are.

*\

>
)
common.

common.

common.
.
.

.J am.
.

C w
JS
'
I
.

<^o-=u5^^) ......... ^o^xi-sr^^).

&o&r^$?).

.Thou

art.

^o-^r-c^b.

^o^7r=s C2gb.
"\

-^

^
'

6o-c&>?5^a. }

.... ^oioo^a.
..

..

.o&oo?5^a.^
>

Ifci

^ox5bo,- J .....&o6ooo&

.too^oa

.....

J
.

.We
.

are.
are.

You

CTOT^S ........
1

O&X>73-N5b ......

O&3~Sb...
S)

"^

^
r
I

feo-^?^) ....... So^oo^S .......... ^0600?^

P A
S

V They J

are

. .

./

OfO..
f

O'SP Cc*C.or..73~c N Ci....

>

"

.....

or

......

You

were.

^
2

FUTURE.
,

shall be.
wilt be.

fo
"

or

> ....... Hf she or

it will be.

J
*^

Is

OF VERBS.

v^rP

^c

You

will be.

'

They

will be.

...J

AOR
common.
(zs

S T.

o2&i&r&

cs O(&>r5i

/ am,

was

or shall

be.

art, wast, or wilt be.

s
^j S3
T3

r J

^ ocSb^>

........

S o^Cr^>
6s o2&>c5b

..........

He, she, or

it is,

was, or will be.

We
GO O6SOO3QO

are, were, or
are, were, or will be.

You

ere, ^ere, or

iw#

6(?.

IMPERATIVE.
common.

^ o^b

......... bethou.
..... letusbe.

...... lie' ye.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES,
PRESENT.
common.
(55

o-JfcS^. ...........

6 o^??^

...... that is.

PAST.

..

.................................. that

was-

INDEFINITE.
common.
common.
or

VERBAL

JJOUN.

common.

thebeing.

126

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

NEGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

A OKI ST. I am
not,

was

not, or shall not be.

Thou
a oSuG&b ^

art not, wast not, or wilt not be.

fie is not,

was

not,

or will not

be.

& o&>

She or

it is not,

ioas not, or will not be.

We

are not, were not, or shallnotbe.

are not, were not, or will not be.

YOM

*
^

are not, were not, or will not be>

IMPERATIVE.
common.
05
'^

& oSS&SSbo

.& o^os^j-o. .^ o5*^>c

GI.
.

____

& o^S'..... 5e not thou.

.^oSS^OfS....^ not ye

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

^ o2?f...........................without being, or without haviny beenRELATIVE PARTICIPLE.

?

o^?D ........................... #Aa^

z*5

not,

was

not, or will not be.

VERBAL NOUN.
3 oSiSto ........................ the not being.

the fourth form of the past tense of this verb,

^ ^r

<

&c

is

constantly

used as the present tense, in the

common

dialect.

Eoot...........

common.

common.

common*

Present verbal participle ----

<.

... ...... do..........

>cx

.......................... .having
beco

Infinitive .................. "S"

............................ to

OF VERBS.

127

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT.
Ibecome.

Thou
............

becomest.

He

becomes.

-)

<

or

J
You become.

^ > They become. J

/ become.
,

Thou becomest.

r
'

e^-^CSb

He

becomes.

> She, or

it

becomes.

We

become.

You become.

"j

> They become. )

PAST;
I became.
Thou
....

becamest*

^
'

^*

r ,He

became.

J
> She,
or
it

became'

128

TELOOGOO CRAM MAR,

We
.

became.

<if>a88

You became.

^
'

FUTURE.
common.

I shall become.

Thou
c
>>

wilt become.

)
\He,sJie, or
it ivill

become.

We
You

shall become.
will become.

f^
^
\Theywillbecome.
|

AOR
,

S T.

__^

1 become, became, or

shall become.

*2

^
13

t5>a)&>q)
<
t

Thou
He,

becomest, becamest, or wilt become.

*^

^
*

e9q5S<\x>..

she, or

it

becomes, became, or will become.

<^<-^--<~

jye become, became, or shall become.

You become, became,

or will become*

r*

r^ ef>^)!$D5o
^ m
<

Cfe;

C5c^)r5o.

V TAey J

~)

become, became, or will become*

IMPERATIVE.
common.
.1*
'

^
^

S's&o

e/tos&>
common.
t>

"5^

become thou.

"e

5q)2$o5oo
jfOiJ^o.,, "

,..^5^)"^
,

'

>

....det us become.
i

_
ei

,^0^,,,,

,,i

iMiMitc.

,.,become,yet

OF VERBS.
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.

129

PRESENT.
that becomes.

PAST.
that became.

INDEFINITE.
common.
common.
.
.

<JSb

eS^oC &

e>^oC ____ ef>^oC3

that becomes, became,

[or will

become.

VERBAL NOUN.
common.

common.

"tf2s$a>

............ 9^oca NEGATIVE VERB.

........

the

becoming.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
AOR
~5~?& ....... I do
not,
I

S T.

did not, or shall not become.

not, didst not, or wilt

Thou dost
5
.

not become.

'O
&*

1 <
I

^
"*+

"S^cSiO

He

does not, did not, or will not become.

it,

>>

ry.

tsf

"^f*^?

She, or

does not, did not, or will not become.

We

do

not,

did not, or shall not become.

You do

not,

did

not, or will not becon

> They do not, did not, or wll not become*

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.

become not
-3""s"o&
.

thoit.

.become not

ue.

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.
.

without becoming or without having become.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
.

that does not, did, not, or will not become.

VERBAL NOUN... the not becoming.

Root. ,,,,.' .........
..

17

130

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
.

Present verbal participle

*>-& &>^

*<)&

S^-cfctfo^

common.

common.
going.

Past
Infinitive

do ...... .SuPOM
.

having gone. .

ST6

S^SS"

to

go.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT.

rj&

go.
goest.

Thou

He

goes.

She, or

...

You

go.

3~S<5b
<^J^

ofr*i&73~'S 5o...

o
common.

common.
3
"d
<N

common.
sfr

ofr*T3rf\X}

f
J

^
fel

s5^T$br^\
'A

a
.

o^^br5-\
.

a
. .

ST^3bo5\a.'i
^

^. _^v

^.Cw'^rx

sfr^pfonP^

^")

^
PAST.

s5^coo&)

S^cxwsr ^) ..... .7%ow

.

wentest.

He

went.

OF VERBS.

131

We

went.
went.

You

FUTURE.
common.
>

I shall
Thou
~i

go.

wilt go.

>oC ^

> He,
KTOQSO <M
Jr,

she, or

it

will go.

We
bC

shall go.

ofr*c3o>5o

...,

!
G\
C*J ...

A O R I S TT
I go,
went, or shall go.
goest, tventest, or wilt go.

Thou
JS

f^

JVg g ~ lai

He,

she,

or

it

goes, went, or will go.

We

go, went,
,

or shall go.

went, or will go.

^70, zcenf,

or will go.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
P U E S E

T.

thai goes.

132

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
PAST.
that went.

INDEFINITE.
common.

common.
......

..S^^g

&0&Z&., .that goes,

common.

went, or

ivill

go.

VERBAL NOUN.
.,

................ the

going.

NEGATIVE

VERB.

INDICATIVE MOOD. A O R I S T.
g
&"(&>

23^f&.../ do

not, did not, or shall not go.

....Thou dost not, didst not, or wilt not go-

jJ ^

SLT*c 3fc

S3^C&b...H does
le

not,

did

net,

or will not go.

or

it

does wo/, did not, or will not go.

S3o5"s$

We do

not,

did not, or shall not go.

....You do not, did not, or will not go.

They do

not,

did not, or will not go.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.

qonotthou. y
S..
wo/ -y ve

VERBAL PARTICIPLE.
without going, or without having gone.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
that does not, didnot, or will not go.

VERBAL NOUN.
So^
X>.

the not going.

OF et};5bsoex> OR VERBS OF SANSCRIT DERIVATION.

369

All Sanscrit verbs cannot, at pleasure, be adopted into Teloogoo; those only
the use of which has already been sanctioned by custom being considered as

properly belonging to the language,

When

admitted into Teloogoo, such verbs

OF VERBS.
assume either the termination
9 o-&>

133
;

or

ex>

in the

former case, they are

verbs in "^ of the 3d

conjugated like &S)o-t& and other regular

conjugation
jugation.
;

1#S$

in the latter case, like

this general rule, it

With
is

&~^?, or any other verb of the 1st conwill be sufficient to shew how the Telooroot.
in five different ways.
;

goo reot

formed from the Sanscrit

*

Sanscrit roots are adopted into

1st,

Teloogoo

370

by changing

the final syllable

of the Sanscrit verbal noun into ? Q-C&

for instance, the Sanscrit root

crit 23* &, thj s

^)<^

to protect,

makes
9

it's

verbal

noun

in

Sans-

by changing the

final syllable into

o-J&

makes the Teloogoo

as &S)o-i&.

root

Sy^axo-^ which is conjugated precisely

few other examples are subjoined.
Sanscrit verbal noun. Teloogoo Root.

in the

same manner

371

Sanscrit Root.

to praise.

to contemplate, to meditate.
Job ............. (QQ

.............. ,. cv>o9o-t& ..... ............ to

praise.

-tobe anqry.

.XSo-c&
.^o^oOTSb
$4?

to pass, to go.
to tremble,
to to

shake,

Sfc.

J^

o2f
final 9

JwO$)ow
final

stand without motion.

^o^o-cfo, final

2dly,
,

by changing

or ^ of Sanscrit roots into

o or

into

^SDo^

and

or

^~

into "'So-vfc.
to conquer.
to fie
to

&OX3O-J&
A

^xox>o-c$3

exhausted.

damp.

to bear.

..to take..
to think, to rejlect,
,

to bear.
to select.

.55"9ov&>.,,,,,,

134
3dly,

TELOOaOO GRAMMAR.
by
affixing
s

G-T& to the Sanscrit root

Teloogoo Root.

thus,

Sanscrit Root.

"C.2o-2> ........................... to renounce, to quit

iS'so-Eo .............................. to be destroyed.
if

IT ................... ^sbo-zfo ............................. to curse.

to perform

penance.

to
.

sound.
be confused.

"tWWte ......................... to
-

to

praise ,or meditate on God.

to compose.

.330-t> ............................. to
.

write.

........... to

ddUCB.

to calculate.

4thly,

by changing the
;

final syllable

of crude Sanscrit substantives or adjec-

tives into S OT&>

Sanscrit nouns.

thus,
Teloogoo root.
oD
insist

.... ..obstinate ........... S$xr9 o-^> ............ to

obstinately. self independent.

...independent. ....... ^C?^o'

<

.o-^>....

^ wa^e one's
approach.

vicinity .............

f3XrD obo-5>:).. .....

...to

o-E> ............ to become lean.

....to
... ornament... .........

be proud.

^0-7^80-^.. ..... to
9
o-c6b.

arfom.
to

5thly, a few neuter verbs are

formed by atlding

certain Sanscrit

words

the affix

e>J,

sometimes

also

converted into

Sanscrit Root.

Teloogoo Root.
to be afflicted.
........... .......... to shine.

-8oeor

-SoOo-SSb ..... ,,to refect, to study.

OF VERBS.

135

PASSIVE VERBS.
Neuter verbs, from
all

Ihcir nature,

do not admit of a passive

signification

but 372

active verbs in Teloogoo, of whatever description,

infinitive the different tenses of the
to suffer.
is

adding to the
composition,

may become passive, by verb Soo t fa li^ meaning in

The verb which

made

passive continues invariably in the infinitive, the 373

all its

auxiliary So&o only being conjugated through

tenses.

persons, numbers, and

The

infinitive

being a

\&,*$& }^%fe^>
;

tne

^^
is

is

generally

changed, in composition, into

that letter.

and

in the superior dialect C

placed before

The
Root...

following

is

an example of a passive verb.

eo

374

Present verbal participle common.

[^1^ <><>&
Past
Infinitive

being beaten.

do

""|3CW<&

having been beaten.

to

^^CwSS

be beSten.

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT.
common.

I
)

am

beaten.

Thou

art beaten.

He

is

beaten.

arc beaten.

136

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
common.
eo
.

beaten.

60
eo

Thou art

beaten.

.He

is beaten.

> She, or
GO
o
.

it is

beaten.

.We

are.

beaten.

r
"

I
J

60

60

T/tew are beaten.

PAST.
beaten,

4 S
1*3
^eoCa)

icast beaten.

He was

beaten.

g^j
60
feO(
..

She, or

it

ivas beaten.

eo
ec *_^-

60 60 60

eo eo 60

We were beaten,
were beaten.

60
eo eo

were beaten.
60

60

FUTURE.
common.

60

W
-

be beaten.

*feoca)~S>5 exwISc^SSw..^^^"^ 60

He, she, or

it

will be beaten.

We

shall be beaten.
beaten.

OF VERBS.
AO R
I

S T.

1am, was,
Thou
)

or shall be beaten. or wilt be beaten.

art, wast,
ft jSt

sne^ or

waS) or

W HI

be beaten.

We
.

are, were, or shall be beaten.

Ifou are, were, or will

'

be beaten.

They
eo

are, were, or will be

beaten.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.
g^ iocs) 2^0 s&o.
eo
.let
..

us be beaten.

eo eo
eo

eo

be ye beaten.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.

PRESENT.
common.

eo

138

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
)., .......

We

are not, were not, or will not be beaten,

not,

..........

You are

were

not, or will not

be beaten.

-n

SJ

f w<

~^ C ^& ......
^'

> Tftey are

not,

were

not,

or will not be beaten.

(fc;

r*kCK>5) K>5) ..... ) eo

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
common.

k>C>&Scr
eo eo
"

.....

r'tocw^g' ..... benotthou

eo
*?

beaten,

..... S^toca^cxS ...... be ....4oCtt8&c& eo eo VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

not ye beaten.

^6oc a) 3
CO

..... ............. without

being, or without

having been, beaten.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
g^docsiSS^ .................. thatis not, was
not,

or will not be beaten.

VERBAL NOUN.
the not being beaten.

OF CAUSAL VERBS.
375
to

All verbs in Teloogoo admit of being converted into causals.

It is

however

be observed that neuter verbs, in

this
:

causal form,

become

in fact active verbs

to

language, the Teloogoo

when they assume the

root
v-&> to rise
is

a neuter verb, ~u^)

cause

to rise is it's causal,

which corresponds precisely

with the English active verb to raise.

376

Except verbs
noticed,
all roots,

in

&> of the 3d conjugation, and a few others hereafter

final *O into S OT&,

by changing the

convert active verbs

into causals,

and neuter verbs into

to salute to

actives

thus,
to

makes
do

^^a^lp^Sb
?fi^_p'&
SJ^oAo-Zfc

cause to salute.

vomit

to cause to vomit.
to

to bubble
.... to

do do
do

cause to bubble.
cause to swallow.

swallow

JWoAo^Sb
staS^oofc
7r8go-ifc
WofeSo-efc

to

>

to be raised^

to heighten.

tojlameup do
to touch

to enflame.

do
do

tocauseto touchto

to sting

"^wgo-ifc

cause

to sting.

OF VERBS.
.lo

ripen

makes
v. n.

&o&o-\&>

to
to to

cause to ripen.

to
pJ
_<5o

burn

do

3&OGso%&
co^So-il)
)^8o-i&>

burn

v- a. to raise*

to raise up..

..do
..do....,

cause

&
>

to
to

sow

to cazise to

sow.

&0im
plough
cover

do
v. n.

-&>cacK&

to

cause

to stcz'm.

to

a8 applied

2&^o-!&
?f>^oafc
&f)^o-*fc

to

plouyk

v. a.

as

[to

oxen

tyc.

[applied to
to

men.

*$

to

do

cause to cover.
cause to
cause to
sioell.
sell.

to swell to sell.

do
do do

to
to

tS&^cxfc
"^cooo-sS>
5&crax>o-ifc

to

make

to

cause to make.

to shut

do
..do

to
to

cause to shut.
cause
to cut.

sdffio

to cut.

ox>o -&

(^rJ <3&>....to
.fo

write

do

.(^J

ox>

to

cause to write.

throw, or put.. do

scxoo-^)
c$ox>oi&>
eJ^cxoo-cfc

to

cause to throw, or put*

to
>

weave

do do

to
fo to

cause
cause

to

weave*

to

pour

to pour,

>

to fly to

do

^8o-v&
wgo-sfc
SfcOo-i&

cause to fly.

plait

do do
do

to
to to

cause to plait.

to return

causeto return.
cause to dig.

todi9

..^S)o-^

EXCEPTIONSto burst v. n.

applied to soft...2&^r>&S$bo..fo OMr

as fruit &c.

v> a .

[substances such
to ftoi/ v.

"S^C^o
'55'C-i&>

to boil v. a.

to conceal one's self, to

to hide v. a.

[abscond
... .to ie

v. n.

weighed.
to

do
humbled.

&r>c->

to /a//,

ffi'nA;

to 6e

&o&
oi&>

im^A.
a?-

to catnip to /a//,

sink,

[to
to
>

humble.

6erf

v.

do
a child in a cradle.)

to

bend

v. a.

to fo rocAerf (as

&C-Jfc

to rock.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
>to be folded.
to be

makes-^b^C^...^^'-"^
do...5b-v

to fold.

broken

to break.

... to be fryed
... to

do...~3C-c$b or "5 owo-KSo to fry.

sound

v.

do..."srCT3bor'53~ oooo-i&to sound

v. a.

or

S&oeaoC/fo I ...to be drowned, to sink...x>o-&>

1

to

drown,

to sink v. a.

to

^rrot6-

........ makes
-\

to

cause to grow,

to

nourish.

to be stretched ..... do

<

> to

stretch.

j
to pass, to

go

added

1
to

to

the

infinitive

of\

J another verb, it signivfies to continue. ..do.

.
.
.

eawse

to

pass

Sfc-

.to

Ze beaten in a

mortar do.

or

25

o^).

.to 5ea

in

a mortar.

crushed

or ^6X)^)..,to
... to

to /6e

tonz

or

-S)0o^).

bebroken.

.......

or

..to break.

..... to &? broken or cut.....

-\

or

to

V ...... to

descend. ... ....... do...

f to ^e beaten in a mor- 1 j r i }to be inured ...do y
. .

or

.. to

put or pull down.

.

.....

<

to

to

\tar,
.
.

.to

be extinguished

....... do..

to extinguish.

.to

be habituated ..... do....

to habituate.

____ to drink
. .

cause to drink.

.to

cease ........... do.

cause

to cease.

to creep, to slide,

topass

cause to creep, slide,

[or pass.

OF VI5KBS.
to
...... to

141
to turn.

wander ............ makes

be buried

^
T)

?$J?*?^? .........
,

........... do....^J

2&-&> ......

......... to

bury.

...... to fade ................ xlo...."*^

^-^ ................ to
"

cause

to

fade.

...... to
.......... to

be roasted .......... do...^*^ ^....

3

............ to roast.

fall. .............. do....o5ef)T&

............. .to spread.

to

become bad ......... do..."^^^...^^^) ...... to corrupt.

be disunited ...... do...>&b-&>.

to

&^Q-

>&$.. to leave.

to be filled ............ do.

,&o&-$o$)-$Qo-&~to Jill.
r>

to be healed, to

ceasedo...&r &>'&) or

&r&'&..to

heal,

c.

tobe soaked ........... do...^.^-^ or "J3"r&^) ..... tosoak,to steep.

to eat .................
to

do...^

"^ ............. to cause

to eat.

say ................. do..9$>o-!& ................... to cause to say. or )obo-i ..... f caus e to hear. to hear ............... do...

&?&>

tosee, to

produce, to [bring forth ...... do.

v
t

\ J

?f>oOO-v& .......... .....to shew, or

to deliver

[in child birth.

..

to

awake

n ........ do..."^3

^^^^)
(

............ to

awake

v. a.

...... to
>

graze ........... ....do...-

') ...................... to feed cattle.

..... to

be tarnished........ do... S&r^) ................... to tarnish.

>

...... to

be afraid ......... do...^ <^S)O-^ ..... . ............ to frighten. *50 -^ to cause to rain. ..... to rain ............... do^.^Q^o-SSbor^Q
fo shine ..............

do...^^^
"

^
3

............... to cause to shine.

-g->(5b ....... to leak ................ do..."5

^-^

.................. to
............ to
.........

cause to leak.
cause to arrive.
extinguish.

to
.to

arrive ............. do.

"^ftb^c .......

be

extinguished..^. .e3fcfx>-i&or3&*>^)
.

to
...... to

change

v.

n ........ do...o^rfcWa&or^
z

T)

fcW^)....#oc7jawYjre v. a.

burn

v.

n .......... do...~3"e*>- & ................ to burnv. a.

5cn>ex> ....... tofalldown ........

to

do...^^-^ .................. to cause to fall

"S^ew-ifc or IT'exD^)
.. .to

down.

drop down-....... do...

cause

to

drop doivn.

to float .............. do..."^^"^3

or ~3So-i^>.....fo cause to float.

tomove, toshakev.n. do.^^ex>-^or

S'^

-^.... to move, Sec.

"J

v. a.

f
.to

X)0s>)

^50^)

go

do < -J

to send.

^0*)9b,>0)0-5& )

142
377

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR
B

tt\55bS5ix> neuter verbs in

^> become

active

by changing
;

^3

into s o-vfc;
afflicted

thus tfosSew

to be
fo

pleased makes SosSo-sSb

to please

^Stg

to be

makes "^ao-jfc
378
Roots in

a^c<.

&

of the third conjugation

by changing

&

into ooo-cfc,

and *&^
thus,

into oO^O-5>b, convert actives into causals,

to call ................ makes

and neuter into active verbs,

HoOsbo-Sfo .......... to send for.

to

open

...............

do...fc9*>T

........

to

cause to open.
cause to bless.
cause to give.

to bless............... do...aSo5bo-2o
3

......... f
to

,..to

give

do...^*^O"*S

to
I

bring

do... w<o^o-Efc

to

cause

to

bring.

EXCEPTIONS.
"***
...to

rise

makes

*->$)

to raise. to stop. to load.

..to
>

stand
bear a burden

do....>yo<)

to

do...^n><)

\.

..; to

come

do....& ^o-u$bor~5"
<

-l& to

cause to come.

...to

increase*

do

.cj^o-i&

to cause to increase.
to
kill.

to die
is

do..,...T^O<)

379

The
Root

following

an example of a causal verb.

S^&S o-c&

Present verbal participle

common.

63

common.
ro
. . ,

rS^^So-v^be^r^N

eo

3 3o-I&$$b..ctf

wszVig

Past
Infinitive

.do....

i^^So^)
~*|3o-iS'

having caused
or

to beat.

S^

to

cause

to beat,

Causal verbs do not derive any form of the present tense from the participle
in

OF VERBS.

143

AFFIRMATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

PRESENT.
. .

/ cause

to beat.
to beat.

M
*Sj
^

Thou earnest
.He causes

^"
.

to beat.

jB-|
V
CL"

. . .

Sh6) or

it

causes tobeat.
beat.

r^ I

^6"

60

\i
common.
common.

cause to beat.

I cause

to beat.

7%ow catM0/
.

to

..

He

causes to beat.

She, or

it

causes

to beat.

We cause to beat.
cawse

rt>

.......

4So-5&lT &.
)

T%ey

Thou causedst

to beat.

Be

caused

to beat.

We caused to
You caused to

beat.

beat.

They caused

to beat.

144

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

FUTURE.
common.

.r'feSo'^rfc ...... I shall cause to beat.

eo

.......
eo

Thou

wilt cause to beat.

--

He, she, or

it,

will cause
[

...... J

We
FOM

shall cause to beat.

will cause to beat.

c- -A*O-= S BOO -u)(*s<O e1

""
r J
J

or

<*

They

illcause to beat'

^^So-&^)

A O R

S T.
cawse.

caMsec,

or

cause

to beat.

>
.

caws)

O'
<?

or

ivilt

cause

to beat.

ni

^^0-260^0 ...... ^^3o^>?6o ....... r3o-c$b &....#<?, ^e, or

,

zY

causes,

or
,

or

cawse to beat'

[?t'z7/

cause to beat.
cause,

J or will cause to beat.

,,..

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
^u-QOSJCTO^
f

f
1

WOTSoSOO... .8

6C50S)5500 ........ S

common.

common.
^
eo

r 6S'6^)s>JT
D

......

eo

r'^o-^ ........... r^o^) ..... j

eo
eo

eo

eo

..1
v
/e<

common.

common.

common.

us cause to beat'

....

.
eo

eo

eo

common.

common.

J \\-cause

ye to oeat

\ V

OF VERBS.
RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. PRESENT.
common.

145

causes to beat.

that caused to beat.

INDEFINITE.
common.
eo

common.

00*104
[?r?7Z

or
beat.

VERBAL
common.

NOUN'.

common.
.

^ eo

...die

eo

cauftna '

to beat.

NAGATIVE VERB.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
A O R
I

S T.

o,

ck'rf

not, or shall not

cause to beat.

cfos^ wo/, A'rfsi not,

or wilt not cause to

eo

eo

no^,

didnot,or will not, cause

to beat.

eo

eo

She. or

it

does not, did not, or will not cause

[to beat.

Jfe
eo
irt>

c?o not,

did not. or shall not cause to beat. did

not, or ivill not

e3o-5'5b...'~ e3o5)&>

You do

not,

cause to beat.

do not, did not, or will not cause

to beat.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.
,
i

eo

eo

o> cauge k
J

not

thou

to

y
eo.

common.
eo

common.
eo

>

e3

<Smon:
eo
eo

(cause not ye

to beat.

j
19

146

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
VERBAL PARTICIPLE.

3^%

Q Z>$,.*... without

causing

to beat.

RELATIVE PARTICIPLE.
."|~oSo<0
that

does not, did not, or

will not

came

to

beat,

VERBAL NOUN.
the not causing
to beat.

CHAPTER
An
extensive

SIXTH.

SYNTAX.
command
of words, a knowledge of their various inflexions, and
fit

the choice of such as are most

to

convey our

ideas, are necessary to the

correct

use of every language.

But these alone are not

sufficient: the force, the" elegance,

still

and even the meaning of our expressions, must

depend, in a great degree, on

an idiomatical arrangement of the terms which we employ.

of words particular disposition

To

illustrate

the

which

is

most consonant

to

the genius

of the

Teloogoo language,
nected with

is

the object of the present chapter, and as immediately con-

this subject, I shall

here take occasion to treat of the adverbs, con

junctions, interjections, and other indeclinable words, unnoticed in the

preceding

part of this work.

strict

adherence to the rules which have been

elision of letters,

laid

down regarding

the

permutation and

might possibly distract the reader's attention

I shall therefore purposely neglect

from the main subject of the present chapter-

them, in the examples adduced in support of the following remarks, except where
the observance of

them may be necessary

in order to render the

for the elucidation of

any particular part

of the syntax
those

and

study of the Teloogoo more easy to

who have acquired

a knowledge of the

Tamil tongue, and

to

shew
as

in

what

endeavour as respects the two sister languages coincide, I shall

in this part of

much

possible,

my

work, to follow the Jesuit

Beschi, an author of established

authority

in'

the

Tamil language.

148
OF

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
POSTPOSITIONS.

THE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES, AND THE USE OF THE

The reader has been
is

380

already informed, that in nouns denoting inanimate

constantly used for the accusative.
treat of the

things, the nominative

This will be

explained more

fully

when we

government of nouns
seldom
affixes

by

verbs.

381

The
^oos"

genitive, possessive, or inflected case,

.

the postposition coo

We

constantly find TT5$bo$ oxxix^

S?o v &>/

used for Tr>s5bo^oo?f

the

ew Rama's

home;

$'

for

<9^&/ &c3oq?fj53f,
wealth

court of

Indra; Sfttf^ JO^PrssSw for and So^&fD^tfsSw for

Sv^c-kS^D?^

sycssSoo, the arrow

the

of Cupid;

ol35b'c^x>:lf_?5s&D,

of Koobera (the

God

of riches)

c.

Deprived of

this affix, the genitive in

Teloogoo has

fre-

the quently, as in English,

power of an adjective,
D

&&>5$QX&
river

means a
shine.,

beast

of the forest that

is,

a wild beast, <53oo~5~

oSSbiD the

season of sun

or the

wo&Scooi&Jf the sultry season;

the water

sand of

the river, or

sand

^5bq5)feC\J

of the
or

lake, or lake water.

382

Two

more substantives relating

to the

same object agree

in case

but
;

if

they refer to different objects, the one governs the other in the genitive
or

thus,

~)^oo|_
the

c3o the favour of the deity,

5o&S3p

or

35b5apC

ims of men

fyc.

383

The

inflected or genitive cases of substantive

nouns or pronouns, with the

viz.

terminations of the neuter demonstrative pronouns affixed to them,

the singular, and
S) in

&

in

the plural number, are constantly used, without any

;

verb, to denote the affirmation of possession

l

as

3(3~3$x^
theirs,

-r

that property

is

mine,

o>j-7 6e>3$fcewsp>9S) these horses are

6<9

&S>~&*>X)$8> that

is

Rama's, ax>3\v
this

^/^ra>a this
the

belongs to the

Bramin, o>n>&*&-&>v?&
to

garden

is

Kings, 53^)_^^"^x)S6cn>^o^ia that book belongs

this house belongs to

my

father,

oxn>awew;5^^o&3 ^JOft

a Bramin.
to,

384

The
English

dative case has.generally the

:

same

force as the prepositions

is

for iu

thus,

^^^ra^^S&o-fta

modesty

essential to
It

women, "SooA'

-^rooj&l? (5Co5bXCCS&o cmraye

sents the English genitive
;

is requisite

for men-

sometimes represoul of a promise

as,

3^&oo\^!ny raxx)N>?C

*xx> (/&

OF SYNTAX.
is

149
a woma n
is

truth,

aS^&Si^r^
is also

reS>ao^T?5s5oo
truth
is

ffie

sou i Of

her

honor.

Soomutee Shutukum, literally,

life to

a promise, honor

is life to

a woman-

The

dative

often used, without a verb, to denote actual possession,

to

385
;

as expressed
literally, to

by our verb

have; 39fK>8Po"EPj&

n> 'eX>

he has
the

much money

him, much money;

TTW&tf A&oaiT^SxyvSO
This coincides with the
est
is

King has

ten sons,

literally, to the

King, ten sons-

latin rule

" Est pro

habeo regit dativum," only that in Teloogoo the

not

expressed but

understood.

The

dative case, used with the positive degree of an adjective, gives the
;

386

adjective the force of the comparative degree

and the sign of the dative case

serves to represent the English than; thus, ~5T>>2Sb!33&c*i)e--,& f/^s

man

is

more

clever than that person, literally to that person, this

man

is

clever.

In stating the distance of two places from each other, either one or both of
the

387

names of these places may be

>

in the dative case; thus,

<

^^Ir^Jfo-gjiSV^s&o

^r\TT 55b^^cr^5's3bo
Benares.
*

or

"^^^i^o^^?5crB ^'TrD S5b^^j-D^s5bo Benares and

;

Conjeveram are 300 amadas distant

or

Conjeveram

is

300 amadas from

es^o
before,

beyond, oooS'&o on this

side,

~^$

above,

below,

S&oo&5'

388

~3>3& behind, and other words denoting relation of place, govern the
this,

preceding noun in the dative case; as &>3"15?5 above

that,

o^iOssoS

bebio

&&ls5boo2Stf before

this,

zy&l'Stfg' beyond that &c.

When we
be
S>55"-3\r&
that
if

speak of motion towards any place, the

;

name

of the place

must

389

in the dative he,

as,

<"ko S^c^oi^) he, she, or

it

it

went
is

to the

garden,

\^J &**

she, or

went

to the villageis

It

to

be observed however,

the object towards which motion

directed be of such a nature as not to

admit of entrance, the postposition *>& or 3$MJ (near) must be inserted

between the noun and the sign of the dative;, as,
it

13|^>^SJ
it

c3c>i& he, she, or

went

T> to the tfee, 13

2^^A8^' rS^^)

he, sfie, or

came

to the.

King.

Nouns of time are generally placed

in the dative; thus, 65>&

o5o3 cxwj^TT^ 399

150
&> / will give
to-morrowit

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
to-morrow,

^oejoo^l^^ ^ /

shall

come

the

day after

391

When
place the
^_,

any end, purpose, or intention

is

to

be expressed, we

noun denoting

it

in the dative case, or use the

to,

may either postposition "^&o or

a
or

corresponding with the English phrases in order

of,
2

with

view that, for the

purpose

&c. &c.

thus,

#Xe-3$3fro &>&>&:>
to

or

^$$0

^oxr#>5b
trust in

cOooci) ?^_D i^)o^^"S^> in order

obtain

bliss,

we must put our

God.

392

Words expressing

the different

degrees of consanguinity or affinity, or

denoting any connection or dependence, govern the noun, to which they refer
jn the dative case.

Thus,
to

if

we ask S^So'Sr
will

>x>~5~*!3&>, Jn what relation

<Jfc

does that

man

stand

you ? the answer

be & Q
he

*r so

^p^-ixT*

osScn>3Sb-

l^&3fctf
in law,

^2fc-TP'&^&g2&-i3^&&>yCfc^&
son, servant, or friend; literally,

is
is

my
to

brother in law, father-

grand

he

me
cO

a brother in law,

&c. &c.

In Teloogoo,

we may
is

ask, as in English

2^"

oo, w ]ia t

is

your

name?

r**><3& cO&> ivhat

your age? or we

may

use the dative, and say

To you, what name? what age?

393
a

The
side,

postpositions

^tfs&D-s^tfSo O r 2. (composed of the noun

2o5So the dative case of

&#,

from &>$ a
to

side,

and
all

9ooo the past

verbal participle of the affirmative

mood of ^^)

become,

added to the

are used nearly in the sign of the dative case)

thus,

same sense

as the dative itself;

'ee-'5$oo'"

(33's$ao

Or

"~6'o

Or

c 2.^'ex>3o&o&-sr &b

he sent

money for merchandize, or on account of

trade.

394 395

Of the
The

use of the accusative,

is

we

shall

tf

eat

under the head " General

;

Rules."'

vocative

used precisely as in English

<

but, in prefixing to nouns

the vocative participles to 8-?

and cocxw

particular attention should be

;

of the person addressed, as explained in rule 157 paid to the rank and sex
thus,

fco82S**o*r

Palanqucen bearer!

k^^^e^TT'o-*

Wicked

woman!

h><m(&>?x>-c^ O

Bramin

OF SYNTAX.
The
local ablative,
in, on,

151

formed by the postposition W*, corresponds with our 390

prepositions
is
;

upon,

among &c.

It points

out the place where any thing

for

example,

~^#ex>#C Xe-ofcaej^-^^fc
the

The Gods reside

in Paradise,

tf^^^8^^&c&^^^l^:^b
W* likewise
expresses descent
the rain that falls

Supreme Being in every heart;

;

on any object

thus,

3&r>toer'"6 Sol!l5'&~s5bo
derived

on the earth.

When

it

affixes the, particle f&oS),

it

from G5O-&, the past verbal

out of a

participle
6

of Gso-Kk, to place,
<

expresses motion
the flood

place;

as

Tl8er'' ?&o-i5

j^^x>'&5^$>
r5

comes
out

flowing out of the Canary,

^&^tfoX'Sk^s5boer

;&o-atffr&

/ came

of

Seringapatam.

W*

is

also used in comparison,

and makes the comparative or superlative 397

of are two, or degree, according as the objects spoken

more
;

thus,

"S^S&e)^

faDoeJ^T^SxwS^SodSb Rama

is

superior to

Lutchmana

literally

among Rama

and

Lutchmana

Rama

is

superior

Sfc&sSjDgoerSTT^ewwo^oefcex)
powerful

among
,

men, kings are the most powerful; literally, the

The

particle

or the drootuprucrootica afnxes&>&c may somtimes be added

is

to fiT*, which,

in this state,

often attached to nouns, in comparison

and the same noun

twice repeated, either with, or without this addition, has the force of a superlative
;

thus,

"io&oer6

^ or er

~i)2$ the poorest

6 of the poor, s&j-o^xis-oer ;^

r6 or er

3&cre3Ve-<b the most obstinate of

also,

the obstinate.

Like the English

6

in,

er

is

used with nouns denoting time

i

^^"^oSScoer

informer

times,

"3tf ^"S^oSSboer*

n after times.

From er6

ia

derived the word ef^SoO, the inflexon of an irregular ~"*

It
is

398

&o noun which wants the nominative.

ablative case
;

generally used in the

>l

dative or

thus, in the dative,

er6 ^
it

0q^3$

medicine internally.

In the ablative,
&c. as

3$;xDCxo^-sr>2& he has given has the same meaning as the English

y4>

prepositions within, inside,

5oe> inside
is

o^o^er^Soe; within

the house,

~"^f|beJ

the box.

an adverb of the same meaning as er^sSo, formed by adding

T,

399

152

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

the infinitive of the root,

^-gyvicr

&& to

become, to the postposition er^

as

^h

came

inside.

400

W*

is

often prefixed to the verbs

&&>

to fall, or

9q) to become, which then

&c. corresponding to the signify to submit, to yield

eT^So

English phrase

to yivk in.

&~3~(& he has

submittedit's

40 L

The
noun
is

postposition "-S^, or
is itself

contraction

the sign of the ablative term-

ed instrumental,
"-S

the inflected ablative case of the irregular

l /vx>
r

o*^

the

hand.

It represents the

cause or agency by which any effect

;

produced, and

may

generally be translated by the English preposition by

i

thus,

CT*|'^axro^jfc& :#^o;5s>ga
to SS^rS" or

the

world was created by

God,

$&-^^&3^Sto-MtoS&)t58>
sition "-wS", as

the earth is cooled by rain.

%>,

To

the postpoit,

well as

which are
often

synonymous with
;

the

drootuprucrootica
heat
is

affixes
the sun,
:

?&

c,

are

added

as,

rSr^Soc^ifejJ&ir
ifcw

^
is

produced by

cS^r^Xs&^o^

or "-p^?^"S^>$xS5oD/Cy2&>

attainable by sacrifice

literally by the sun, heat-by sacrifice, bliss.

402

&*

the sign of what

we have named

the social ablative,

5

is

equivalent to the
//ie
rt

English preposition with\

ivith his

o\, ^?5^ S&n'ftb S)^ ^"^^^)

satiated

father

came

son,

TT^^^^^oay^i5^^i7'^b^'oax)^_^e5
eyes,

'o'B^) viewing
verb

Rama
Scr

with

my

my mind ivas

3^^, the

infinitive of the
is

to join,

generally written by the vulgar

the connection;
thus,

&~o~t&,

often

added

to

&*
him

to strengthen
to

^S^^^TST'tfs&^'Sj^p
as

tell

come along with me-

*9&

and t^^io^ are not so much in use

<^-

403

The
ing in

postposition $, affixed only to nouns denoting inanimate objects end^>,

has occasionally the power of each of the three

(

ablatives above

mentioned; thus, l? ^>?5'S3o2&K)O~5l?&

th e

the fruit ripened on the tree,

sat

hing

upon

the

throne,

^5o^5

he staid at home
he vanquished his enemies

o from joy, a)e)^bo?5'^^s5X"sr

by

his

prowess.
to the

404

The

inflected ablative,

peculiar

the irregular "BSTcsfo) nouns, has

OF SYJSTAX.

153

same power with respect to these nouns, as the postposition 3 has with regard to nouns in v> denoting inanimate objects thus, S&v>oA<b^-sr^sc/^ is i, the
;

courtyard, -sr>~^rT>fc>s$)tf^a
i

# ^
bit

/^

OTOM

Ss5bto

&

f/ie

WM f

ft^k>

the nail,

Zote$Q&~*r&> he

with kis

teeth, (literally,

with the eye ^

tooth)

i saw w itjL my
he held the

eyes ^ (literal^

tn

tne

-^#;&ov

bow

lolth

his

hand,

S>o<b-i5'o~lo?6o

he killed with a bow,

me by
and
>&c*5oxx> arc nominatives

the

hand, he conducted me.

of two e^^MSfcS&o nouns, fre-

405

quently used as postpositions;

)*xc5o,&x>

phrases as

>&>jo&> denotes some cause, reason, <S:c. and corresponds precisely with our word respecting, or respect in such "in this respect," "in one respect-" The use of these words as

postpositions will be best understood by the following examples.

I purchased
he

this

house for you, or on your account,

respecting

spoke

the

marriage,

"T5"

i3"3~ o;?
<^

he wrote respecting affairs of state: s

JoS&o O r s
;

mentioned

in rule
:

393, has often the same meaning as

r

^*^_2^

thus,

we

say
to

StoSxM oiro" S^oocb

^Bj

^c^5s5bo or

^"cC^xT^^^

o^S),

/ came on purpose
,

see you-

t9o^

is

nearly

synonymous with the postposition

by examples;

r6
.

The

difference

406

between them
r5oC&> both

will be best defined

in the

thus, S5^S$ooeT'"

and zS$x>

mean

garden or forest, but the former refers more strongly

; "O^^JOeT^j a nd "S^3oocSbG&>$'_j both mean faith in Rama, but the former expression denotes the faith that exists within Rama, the faith that he possesses in others the latter phrase denotes

than the latter to the inside

the faith which others have in him.

SS"*3 is

derived from the root S^ex) which signifies to resemble

it

denotes

407

similitude, likeness &c. thus,

^ooS"s$bo^"S>

like

Vycoontha, (the residence

of Vishtnoo) "ST^"3
derived,
is

like

me: the word

^"^

whence

^^

is

immediately
it
is,

used, in books, instead of

^"3; but being part

of an active verb,
So

always governs the accusative, instead of the inflexion, and the

in this case, changed into
>,

of

sJr*^3

the accusative preceding

it

being included in the

20

154
class of
like

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
drootuprukrootooloo
;

thus

?fo^"3 like

me, IS

Vycoontha.

408

;&o-;&o>
)

are used to denote motion from a place

as

?f"e<r

r&o-a or

rfoosoSf-ft^rSS)

^rraz

number of

vessels

have arrived from

13^^;$Do<&c&;fc-a5sok>s$Dd;5o t y/'om Madras to Masulipatam ?

Calcutta,

c3oo<5'&ro3'sS;x>

how far

is

it

409

The
other

following are a few examples shewing the

postpositions are used, cxwocj* O r
x

mode

in

which most of the

common

cooo^S6.pSo^?5 or

between the houses, ~5J~) or 'ar >)13oK>Go or ~3?5's5'-uJ^'r3~

B or after him, ^oSsoA'clcSo GISTS' a>3f&-T ^r&
<

2&

fie

came
in
it

,#/

^ ye

z7

(or

after)

two hours; in

this last

example, 13oa)& cannot be used, because

refers ex-

Q*>o&3 clusively to situation, Dot to time.

<r0
<

or ocoo&Sc^o&jw opposite the house,

&ooc3o&>5b~7V opposite
Soro-fts-

the garden;

410
?^>

governs the accusative, thus

to

q)> ?<&*-- or
Shiva,

^e performed penance
/jg i^g/j^

(or on

account of)
city*

-Oe-^r cxx)73^(*^b

towards the

411

The very

useful

and

common postposition

S^n=JS OH, wpow, has

;

been omitted,
it

by mistake, from the

list

of the postpositions given in rule 130

it

denotes rest
;

on a place, and governs the noun preceding

SXr*

in

the oblique case

as 3fc~*Sx>

on the earth &c.

postpositions of which the following are examples are found only in

412

The

books :TrS*>y&tffcf& o r

&w~& $x>c!z<:~7\&>jRamaiventivith Viswamitra,

)

^oc^?&

Parvatee departed with Shiva, ^^s5ao^T"5b<SX

he was elated by riches, ^_J~Soox> or TSpC/sy 'y^s-o-a^

ivith

/ prayed

faith,

2^e3|j3C(Sl9e- through learning, fame accrues,

fc^(O^r^ex)

(60^*^x0^)8

the people are pleased by your coming,

cS5oS5cx3

victory is attainable by prowess.

all

413

With the exception of c&^Jl,

formed by postpositions ending
in

cases of substantive

nouns or pronouns

*",

such as ^^ % <"*& w^A, "S~^> outside,

OF SYNTAX.

\~)~)

~^>

above, upon,

l> doivn, below,

9
;

S>*$

near &c. &c.

when immediatly
final

follow-

ed by other substantives with

postpositions into
k><^> the

which they agree, change the

^ of these

thus,

S^w

G^DSto

the friends hip with you, X~

133 iS""
the

gardens icithout the gate,

rT>

o~BS>coo)ax>o&:> the houses above

SO
CO

terrace.

oSSofi)"^eJex) the lands below the mountain,

city,

So^caS^D^a^^sSwex)
of the god of riches,

the

gardens near the

O2o5b>o5"|<v>oS5j3o

the wealth

literally the wealth near the god of riches.

In such constructions, the

o of

the postposition ^>Ou;

is

changed into

^&

thus, "ST'cX&o&Qg'oors the regard

towards me.

OF THE FORMATION OF VARIOUS CLASSES OF NOUNS.

Nouns denoting

the agent

are often formed

by adding

to the inflexion of a

414

noun substantive the pronoun sr^c^b

for the masculine,

and

&&

for the femi>-*>

nine; thus, from ^o&3 ? the inflexion of

a house owner, from

erer,

^^

the inflexion

^x> a house, is formed cxwo&S of Soo& fruits, 5<g ^r c <^o ~a

officer

C5&

fruit-

from ^o^= a
>

temple, /fc<S~5rc3b

an

of the temple, and from

in

&OX&

shop,

9o/<<>~5r- c5Sc a shopkeeper

c. Sec-

Nouns

&>, however, in this

S5

con-

struction, are not placed in the inflexion, but change the final

into^), thus;

76&9^x) ahorse, makes &)

a Aoes^^fC^b Gc)
is

horsekeeper.

When

the agent to be denoted

familiar,

or contemptible,
5

~3^C<*&>

js

some- 415

times used instead of 3PC2&, and 8T'J3 instead of ^S*

friendship, comes "-SOsyD^T^ a female friend
>

thus,

from

thus, also,

we

say

ra&e,

tv

D r'Xc ^)~5^ C^b a coxcomb, a good looking fellow, $~ /"Ccoo?f Jjl ow affected
;

female,

a fine

girl.

Nouns denoting
by changing
that

the agent are also formed

;

from from

e^S&3&o
S5s^

nouns in

Sfio,

416

termination into
sb"
T>

thus,
}

anger,

comes
strength,

*>

w angry person, from

Soxx> ^zw, -^p

S)

sinner,

from a)obo

wO

a strong person, from

e/^^^) covetousness, d^^) ^ miser.

action itself which the verb signifies, 417

there are

Besides the verbal noun denoting the many abstract nouns derived
as

from verbs
;

some of these abstract

nouns are the same

the roots themselves

thus, from

156
the root
l~3co;

TELOOGOO C4RAMMAK.
^
.x

"u

&_ ...to

salute

comes... ~2o3i o ...salutation. o

\__^/

do

X5ex>so

to Sp eak

do
do

SoewSo
EbsScoSo

a word.
a leap.
sleep.
/fyfa.

do
do do

o3ooo

to fcop
to sleep
-

&rc;6
.."Sex)C/^o

do

e&rG>io

s/tz w<?

do do

Uewc/fo

do
do

sfob;fc

to

heighten

sfcb/&

height.

^
^t^ CO
Sf^)^

to abuse, to call

names.do
do
do

^^

abuse.

do do
do
418

to flog to hick

^^
EO

nlash^ablow.

^^j
c^SSC^

luck.

^^Qc
9
if

'to

laugh

do

laughter.

Others arc formed from roots incX&) or *&, by changing these syllables into
^),

and

precede
to
to

cX&>, it is

changed into

*o

fear
qlarc

^2^^)
"Sofeso^)...

.fear.

lightning.

.....to

stab
.

ZF&Q)
.,

stab.

to cry....
....to

oOc^c^)
3&ef>^>)
<

weeping.
.forgetfulness.
skill.

forget

to learn
to

~c35b $)

vanquish

~^ew^)
V^Sb^)
tfwc^j)
~3xro<$)

victory, success.

to suffer patiently
...to
/

patience.

think

thought.

bear a burden
ee

a loador burden.
sz^/.
approbation.'
syllable into ^),

to

-c^r<^).

to

cpprove
cSfco

,"^>S^>

419
if

Some
9

are formed from roots in

it

by changing that

and

precede cS&>

is

changed in

^>.

to tighten

)76>?)

tightness.

OF SYNTAX.
Others are formed from roots in c*&> or
to
-&>

157
final ctfco

by changing the

Or

420

t$

or

*$.

to

weave
sound, to

~^>C

texture.

to
\

roar

IpJ'.C.jS'

a roaring.
writing.

co

:<3&o

to write

(^*J<$
line

to

draw a

"&
...&xr

a
a

line.
lid.

to shut...

-to

deliver

-<

deliverance.

....*

.....dreaming-

Some
6

are formed by changing the final

to trust..,

O of the root into

&.

421

ex>

to float
...to

$)"
55icD?f

lightness.

be fatigued

tiresomeness.

to
...to

govern
hope

&&&
o

a governor.
hope.

8s
roots in <2&

Some
to

abstract nouns are

o&o.

formed from

and

<&>

by changing

&o 422

*, and &> to
....to

burn...

56boeo

flame,.

,...to

cook

^k>
-rb>. .......
^>ok>
jT'oib

cooking.

&

to sing
....to

a song.
a saying. purchase.

say

to

buy

The
roots.

their respective 423 following abstract nouns are irregularly formed from

>...tobe tired...
.to
5.

...?f)e)Cif-Gf

>

o'4)-^5ocxxj'.?f)O(5^... tiresomeness.
.grazing.

graze

~&)-~3oC..
3er
D

..tomake a noise
to shoot, or sprout.
.

C&'-:r

o c5'

noise,

cry.

tt

~^x>^.~S>x>ji,-'^r

sprout.

158
^oc-i^b...to disturb

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR...'e>Ce'-'e)CS'

a disturbance.

fold
to sell
&

?Sb2fc3)-5$b#

a fold.
a
sale.

OSfc^afc-WSv^ofc)
SSo/fcexJ-S^XCf

remain
>

remainder.
residence.
eating.

to fo or mz'rfe
..to
...to

dsotoJ^Sl

eat

8ok-8o
oj&s-oj&s&....

hear
resemble

hearsay, informa\tion.

...to

^jpJf.S&^O^
S)

...resemblance.
,

..to

sow
miss....*

&>-) e^rSoSw

seed.

,...to

So39-(<o\eo&3
^)
(

a mistake.
birth.

to

be born

^-^)|9

^)- ^)*00 ^....

<

to die
....to
..to

~^$)
iX>""e>o

death.

enter

a place.
/

pain
have

~^* ^
)
<

pain.
..riches.

>

to
....to

*fDv>

plough
it
,

^<f
means
to \

.a plough.

{"when V
1 serve

makes...
it

o^ <. >s ex}^;

service.

424

means to) prc^.^ >s Oe> a measure. / {measure makes j Soofc) a r^?era makes product of the earth and SSoSSb fruit. great number of abstract nouns are formed by adding the termination
f.

Iwhen

5c5;5x>

"^^ QsSoo

adjectives,

and sometimes

to

osf CS&D nouns, or even occa-

sionally to the relative participles of

w^CS^x) verbs; thus, from

comes. .....S^o^^^s^xi
goodness.

the adjective

& o-S

good
great

do
do

^
^J?
$"*

do

5^r5

>x>.... greatness.

^M ^

5fcc|{r5
^S"^

s^o

dullness.

do

....... beautifull. ...do

^(^o5w

beauty.
smallness.

dp
thus, also,

"$^t
from the
>>

swzaZ/

do

-SJr^J^S'S^x)

substantive

child, ,,.,,,do,

a)ej^^^o

childhood.

OF SYNTAX.
and from the
participle
relative
is,

159

f that ~3)cSo!0 ......... J

(_

was, or ^
.*

l&cX$otf tf sSbo

ignorance.

will not be

known)

is

never added to any except pure

tives or substantives of any

""&> words.
termination become abstract nouns 425

by

affixing

$$\x>

or $'; as,

.great.,

heavy makes. ../^oSoe^S&o... O r.. .&>&>& ...greatness, weight.

. .

siatf,

%fa ..... do ....... otf3$a>. M or..

^^....smallness, lightnees.

..... hard ......... do .......

.a

$&^~.or.
ii$6t$\3&or
iS3

master ....... do ......

$&&.. mastership.
....... heroism.

a Aero ........... do ....... )>fo>...or. ...>&

valiant. ......... do ......

OF ADJECTIVES. In the fourth chapter of

this

work,

we have

so fully explained the

little

mode

in

426

which adjectives agree with substantives, that

pecting that part of syntax.

remains to be added res-

The adjective
which
it

is

generally placed before the substantive

as

noun or pronoun with 427

agrees;

ofoo> ,25*

/S^E-asc^o

a good

bramin,

^" (^ ia
S)
)

good woman, "-3^/1oe3^>3 a bad horse, ~Z>&

<035:)(>x
it's

a beautiful person.

In English, when the verb to *

be, in

any of

variations,

comes between a

428

substantive and an adjective, the sense

may be
;

well expressed in Teloogoo by

is

placing the adjective after the substantive

but, in this case, the verb to be

not expressed, but only understood in Teloogoo.

A
it's

"S^CsSoo adjective has no

gender or number, except what

it

receives from the

it

word

to

which

it is

prefixto it

ed

it is

therefore necessary,

when

thus follows

substantive, to

add

the pronouns "S^Ci&b or ef>a, or ~5J*5b or

9), according to the gender and

number of the substantive with which

min
is

it

agrees, thus, in the phrases that bra-*

>

* 5 good ^(^y^Sr^e^c 3b;5b 0-^-53-00^0, those bramins are good \^J*&^

?&>zx)SSoo&~sr*8o t that

woman
?

is

good &\ ^)55bofi>,

#oe?rf

these

women

are aood

"^, ff?/

^S&0-O-P&>

that horse is

^fe^SSbo-oa,

tfa se horses are

1GO
yood

TELOOdOO GRAMMAR.
-^^OgoSppyoS^O^ no
pronouns
it

verb

is

used, the adjective merely follows

it's

substantive, the

in question being at the

same time

affixed to the

adjective, because

belongs to the

l^QS&o c l a ss. But && \35b3oo

adjectives

do

not admit of the addition of these pronouns, because they possess within themselves the distinction of

gender and number: thus, using a eC^5oibo adjective,

instead of a lsfC5$x> one,

we should

say thatbramin

is

good *3\?5* j Scr

that horse is

raa c<%b

r$

S$jDc Sib,

that ivoman is yood see rule 289 >

^\"^f
429

& fo^ A^, sSjpTT'ew,

yood ^^> &>

&c

Many
possessing,

substantives are converted into adjectives,

by

affixing the

word

Xo

from the root sTex>^

is

thus,

>e)xx>A''o

possessing strength, strong,

ax)&Xo

wise, that

possessing tvisdom,

cOO^o^Xa> happy, possessing happi&c. &c.

ness, <^c5,xbo/'Co wealthy, possessing wealth,

430

In Teloogoo, the degrees of comparison are formed, not by any change in

the adjective
positions, the
itself,

but by the use of certain particles.

-

In treating of the post-

manner tin which 1-^"^

;

er^s and &*^&> arc employed in com

only remains here to observe that the

parison, has been fully explained

"

and

it

words

?^)ind ^o~eo

are often affixed, in a similar manner, to the inflexions

It
is

of substantive nouns or pronouns, to express the comparative degree-

s"?& to see, generally thought that ^<^.is the past relative participle of the root
signifying that has seen,

and that ^o eo
thus,

is

the subjunctive of the same verb

there is nothing better
is

signifying if

anyone

see',

w>?ffv^x>O)&~S2SD

than

this signifies, literally, to

those that regard this, there

is

nothing better

and &^o~eos5co>S~e3*> there

means, if you look at
this, there

nothing better than this, literally translated,

nothing better.

is

But

it

seems more probable

that these particles are derived from the corresponding parts of the root

?>&

to

say, added to the dative case,

?f o~eb

and that
if

^<^ is

formed of 5 or

and

^f^, and
but

of

^ or

and 55o~eo y for

.

these particles were derived from the active

;

verb

s'cfo to see

they would govern the accusative, instead of the inflexion

we

say "^r'o"ec never r^a^ST'o

b than me; in this sensc the abovemenlioned ;

OF SYNTAX.
expressions, literally translated, would
is better
;

161
speak of this, nothing

mean

to those that

and if you speak of this, nothing

is

is better.

The
words

superlative degree
>S3-w very,

generally formed by prefixing to the adjective the

>55ncozx>a;JoQe&&>

431

Po'CF9 much, &c. thus,

a very wise

man, SoT^K^SS^oooex) a very large house.

&c. the phrase

To

express the wisest, the greatest,

9o>Q'o"'to than

all is

used for the masculine and feminine,

express the
that
is,

and

S3^3?fo So than all things for the neuter. If we would wisest man we must say in Teloogoo ^oQ^o""&;ax>aooe$bb
man
wiser than
S g'o "to FT*
the
all*

the

If

we would express
tree

the

largest

tree

we must

say
35^

s5^

^& $x>, or the

of
men,

larger

than

all,

^>o

d $ o "to TT*

greatest

^otfSS'o &<fr;Cc&'J3

the most beautiful

of

women.
OF

THE USE OF THE SIMPLE TENSES OF VERBS.

be more perplexing
to the

Nothing

will at first

Teloogoo Student than the

432

use of one tense of the verb for another.

to find gations, he will be surprized

After studying the different conjuI

what

have termed the present

tense

constantly used, even by his teacher, in a future signification. I hope, however,

that he will not, on this account, too hastily question the correctness of the
principles I have endeavoured to inculcate,

and recommend the following

observations on this subject to his particular attention.

In rule 329,
terminating in
districts
j
;

it

was explained that the particular form of the present tense

433

is peculiar to the religious Bramins of the Northern reader was requested to bear in mind that those terminating and the

^r^3

15"

T)

r& and &>~*r*&* are the only forms to be employed

is

in the colloquial use in books,

of the language; that in -i&^r^J&

distinguish the other three from
to
it,

seldom found except

and to

the word

them, in the conjugation of the verbs.

common has been always prefixed These rules cannot be too strongly

impressed on the

memory

of the student.

The two forms

of the present tense, derived from the verbal participles

434

ending inf&^,, spring originally, like those participles themselves,from theauxi21

162
liary verb

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
&o<5fc to
be.

They

consist

in

fact of

the
"i

participles in

&> or

& with

that tense of

&O3&

which commences with

& 7*^^ affixed to them,

S)Oa&-i&'src
<

thus, &,3oT&-ifc or &S)o-z&&>,

w th
j

^isr^jfr affixed, by the rules for sund.hi

given

in

the

second chapter,

become respectively

^&> O r
forms,

a>0TSbC&>*r^?&.
be affixed
to

The

verb cso&b, therefore, cannot, in any

of

it's

to the verbal participles in

f&^, because

it

has already been added

them

but, in the

common dialect, when we

the
final
*o

wish to mark more strongly the

present time,

we lengthen

of the verbal participles in

*& or *&,
3

and, without sund,hi, add to

them the abovementioned

tense of

&o&*
3

which
<

is

commonly

written &~fFj&>', thus,

&*&&*$)'&*(& V^^^TO^TT^^J

^
or

>

^ ^r'$)^r> ^^
am now
writ-

denotes that I
ing, &c. &c.

am now

beating,

that I

435

The perfect

tense

is

used to denote past time, precisely in the same manner

It

as the corresponding tense in English.

does not therefore here require

any elucidation.
436

The

first

form of the future tense scarcely ever occurs, except in

;

studied,
this

compositions

and the use of the second form

is

is

not common.

In lieu of

tense, the present

constantly

used; thus, ~3w&r5o"-S?^e3|or8S^S)^->o5'

left

^"^o
I
arrive;

otf iJaer^^fttfoXSkwsfco'^&ir'ffc having

Madras

to-day,

shall arrive at

Seringapatam within the 15th of next month, literally

to

o^&y^cx>oo<^;5jvn>r& I shall come

your house to-morrow,

letter the

literally

I come, c^ewo&2rzjo(^"^ j^rfo IsJiall write the

literally

day

after to-morrow,

I write

a thousand other examples might be added.

is

The

use of

the aorist for the future

explained in the following rule.

aorists express,

437

according to the context, the but I beg the reader will bear in mind that, The in the common dialect, they are most generally used in a future sense. will best shew the nature of this tense (Past) S' )&?&<) following examples
affirmative

The

and negative

present, the past, or the future

8f5oex>8"7Y;$b-

So2&>, &),

c&o&53b.

Before the

commencement

of

the

Caleyoogum men lived exactly a hundred years, (Present) cwosS^&cxOTrvQ

at present thty
live

on

an average

OP SYNTAX.
55 years,
(Future)

163
and

ow^&77c T^TF*7^^;5'o^cifo^l\raSx>q)&
life will

by degrees the length of human

P

be greatly shortened, (Past)

existed formerly

l^>Qo

frl^&^&of&^fto-GJp c0^jS-*2$w'Q There

friendship between Davadatta

a very intimate

and me,

(Past)

oSr*oofe3S^ ,a?5o;5'x5b^;&
house frequently, and

^i&^^^&c^o&SiSj" ^:^
6

he came to

my

I ivent
)

to

his,

(Present)

^^^-5Te^iT'^^^^X^O^b-5r^oooo4SsJr^o
present,
to

-^fcb
to his

S$T*cxo3~cr<&b a
house,

as enmity exists between us,

1 never go

and he never comes

I shall do

mine*

In the

common

dialecj,

we

constantly say
shall

^^"^(gb^
V>

so,

&n>5b#e&75^ O

w itt

you comet

"&&7F<& /

not come &c. In fact, the student can seldom err in translating the English

future

by the Teloogoo

aorist.

In explaining the Teloogoo

aorist in English,

he must be guided chiefly by the context.

OF

THE FORMATION OF COMPOUND TENSES OF

VERBS.

The

and the aorist, are the only tenses present, the past, the future,

men-

438

tioned in the conjugation of the verb-

The compound

tenses,

formed by

reserved for consideration in this place. auxiliary verbs, were

Tenses corresponding with the imperfect and pluperfect

in

English are
to the

439

formed by prefixing the present and past verbal participles of any verb
of perfect tense

^so&b

to be

thus,

IMPERFECT.
I was
singing.

Thou wast
He, she, or
.......

singing.
it

was singing,

...We were singing-

5b"<3&c&" qt$)o&38 ........................ . You were singing.

1
-

They were singing.

164

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

PLUPERFECT.
7 had sung. Thou hadst sung.
He,
she, or
it

had

sung.

We had sung.

had sung.
..... .........

440

For example,

if

we say
to/ten

Bharata came

to

Oude, his

eldest

brother

Rama was

going

to the forest.

As

far as regards the present

time, Bharata's

arrival is past, as well as

Rama's departure, but the two actions were simul-

taneous, and this

is

the past tense of represented by adding

&ob to be to

the

of present verbal participle

^^) to go

but

if

the actions denoted by both verbs

are not only past as regards the present time, but the action denoted by one

verb is antecedent to the action denoted by the other, then the past verbal
participle
is

tense of &o<5&, to form, the pluperfect; thus, prefixed to the past

before the

King returned

to the city, from the field

of

battle,

son had been born to him.

The

return of the King and the birth of his son

are both past, but the birth was antecedent to the King's return.

441

Certain other tenses are formed by affixing to the infinitive of any verb
particular tenses of the verbs
t

&*$)

to

go,

S'ew/fo to possess, to be able,

^^

to

learn,

crex> to

suffice,

and &>^)

to be able,

used as

auxiliaries.

The

original

verb remains in the

all

infinitive, -whilst these auxiliaries are

conjugated through

the persons of the tenses thus used.

S^6

^
of

to

go.

The

present, perfect and

aorists

this

verb

may be

affixed, as in English,
;

to the infinitive of any verb, to denote

a future signification

but the infinitive

AX.
being a \&>j
into
3,

&\*jQ&&,

the

55

of

*T$b

is,

in

the superior dialect, changed

according to rule .115; thus,

I am going to sing. Thou art going to do. M.

F.

N.
it is

or c>...He, she, or

going

to see.

We
M.
fr

are going

to write.
to

You are going

F.

send.

N.
>

..............

They are going

to

say

fyc.

'ex>fto

to be able.

or

the affirmative, and ^5f& the negative aorist, together

with
verb, imply

the perfect tense of this verb, added to the infinitive of any other of ^ew^o, the possession, or want, of power or ability the
:

however,

is

changed into

K when

preceded by an

infinitive,

or any other word

of the class

named

^j^^J^^^'
I can
sing.

Thou canst
M.F.QN.

do.

M.

F.SfN.

He,

she, or it

can

see-

We
M.%F.
M.SfF.

can write*
send.

you can
N.

7%^
'...../

can

tell.

cannot sing.
not do.

Thou canst
M.
F.SfN.

He,

she, or it cannot see.

-T

We
M. %p. N.
.i

cannot write.
send.

You cannot

.............................. -..They

cannot
sing.

tell.

I could
Thou

couldst do.

TELOOttOO GRAMMAR.

.........

..

................ He, she,

or

it

could see-

c*5ocXC)A9o ..............................
,

We

could write.

..........

.......You could send.

N.

They could
&cis

tell.

a contraction of fflbtf&&c$&
;

See.

the former sometimes imply-

ing futurity, but the latter ability only

or

IScS&cXorfo

may mean

either I will

I can

ciple

do,
is

often used, after an infinitive, in a future sense

requests

but "-^ci5oCXex>?$o&>f& means only lean do: the relative partil5cCoC ; the phrase
which I

XejcDf^^jSo^ex) the

am

about

to

make, occurs at the com-

mencement

of almost every Teloogoo letter addressed

by an

inferior to a person

in a superior station.
TS-wJifr-

to learn.

The affirmative and negative aorists, and the perfect tense of this root^added to the infinitive of any verb, have the same power as the corresponding tenses
of rex>/6.

.......

I can
Thou
He,

sing.

canst do.

she, or it

can

see.

rsr*

cJ>

ee-5xx> ............................... We can

write.

~i?&bE-5b ................................. You can send.

M.fyF.

N.

$^

9&r-$b

-l-ifcs-?& ................... They can

tell.

I cannot

sing.

Thou canst
M.
F.

not do.

% N.
....
.................... Jff t she,

or

it

cannot

see,

We
'

cannot write.
send.

-t5'~r3>'&> ........................... ..........

You cannot

M.

F.
~

IV.

. .....

They cannot

tell.

OF SYNTAX.
1 could
Thou
.............

167
sing.

couldst doit

He, she, or

could

see.

,cSb~<3)e-x> ............................... We could

write-

-88 ................................ You could sendM. ^

F.

N.

They could
to suffice,

tell.

co^)

to be able.

The
in the

affirmative

and negative

aorists of these

verbs are used, after

infinitives,

same manner

as the corresponding tenses of s ex>/fo

6^ & \&y A^)"^

and ~J$-&~

but
is

the infinitive being included in the

$u O f changed into ar* and the
t

tne

"^

of

"^ew

in conformity to rules 115 and 92. sb-'>Sc~ 'ex>&>?& ............... ... ............. / can sing.

**>'& into

~^r

Thou

canst do.
it

He, she, or

can

see.

.......... . ................ We can write.

You can
N.

send.

They can tell 1 cannot sing.

Thou
M.
F.frN.
.

canst not do.

........... He, she,

or

it

cannot

see.

We
M. #
F.

cannot write.
send.

23^050 .................... , .............. You cannot

N.

They cannot
2 can sing.

tell.

Thou

canst do.
it

He, she, or

can

see.

We
,

can

write.

..... (.,...

.Few can

send.

TELOOGOO GBAMMAR.
M. $ F.
N.

They

cm

tell

I cannot

sing-

Thou canst not do.

M.
F.

& N.
f[
)

s /l&) or

cannot

see.

\"3ff*

j&&~f$r*iS35& .................... .............

We

cannot write*

You cannot send.

M. # F.
N.
) ............................

They cannot

tell.

The

affirmative
infinitive,

and negative

aorists of 3crcSo to join are

all

sometimes placed

after an

and conjugated through

:

the persons, in the same

manner
;

as the corresponding tenses of ^ex>

they denote expediency rather than ability

is

but the use of the third person neuter only of these tenses
explained hereafter.

more

correct, as

442

Some

other tenses are formed by affixing to infinitives the third person neuter

only of certain tenses of a few verbs, used as auxiliaries. In this case the nominative only undergoes a change; the original verb remains in the infinitive, the auxiliary in the 3d person neuter of the singular number.
2f~3;5> or JJSJcOjS'a the third

and

person of the past tense, and SS"oc8c?& the third of of the affirmative the root ^Octfoo, when affixed to the infinitive aorist person or of a verb, imply obligation neecssify without reference to any particular time.

They may be

translated

by the English auxiliary must) and are governed by

in the

any of the three persons

do,

nominative case

thus, 13 .^"ScSbC
55"e3&>
is

")&> } must

&q)>^r8oT5''~3,3> you must enquire, "Srcbl5~

he must come.

The

third person neuter of the negative aorist of this verb

irregular,

namely

SS"e>J52&>

or S5"o&>,

more commonly

contracted into *>&>

It is
;

used negatively,

in the same

manner
it

as the affirmative tenses

above mentioned but, when affixed

has rather an imperative than an indicative meaning, and is therefore applied more frequently to the second and third persons than to the
to infinitives,
first; as,

$$)~&*&
it is

dont come, "5T'5b S^tf&J

first

let

them not go-

Interrogatively,

however,

sometimes used with the

person,

&'&~7yo )7&

must I not

come ?

OF SYNTAX.
These tenses of the verb
e;cC6o are also

169
the

occasionally added, in

same

indeclinable state, to nouns in the nominative case, to denote want or desire.

In this construction, the affirmatives 5~e3r&-<3'<ycO?53 an(] ^ccSSoor^invariably

take before
thus,
horse.

them the

infinitive "S"

but the negative

horse,
is

&> does not require

o;5'2> //<, not
co

it;

fcw$x>-zr*-^$~&> I want a
e9

/e3S&>-^ro
es
is

want a

The noun denoting

that

which

wanted

placed in the nominative

desires or wants
is

case, btit the

noun or pronoun denoting the person who

placed in the dative.

t^3&

or

t^&

the third person neuter of the past tense,

and tfX&> the

third person neuter of the negative aorist of the root &fc to be becoming, decent, are respectively used, after infinitives, to express propriety or Jit, proper, &c.
to any particular time, and impropriety, without reference

may be

considered to
after

represent the English auxiliary ought

infinitive, see rule 115.

the

may be changed

into

an

/ ought

to do.

to write. sro;cSocKa 9 o .............................. Thou ouqhtest ^^

or
~5os5bo'i9'

^^TxT^^CSSXa

......... . .............

He,

she, or it

ought

to read.
.

8*^)o3cS;Ca ............

.........

We ought to be

there.

X'a ................................ You ought

to stand.

They ought

to send.

I ought not to do,

fyc. fyc>

and ~S &>, the third persons neuter of the

aorists of the root
liberty or

T3

affirmative

and negative

^-&>^
liberty

to

come, are respectively added to infinitives to denote

want of

thus,

l^

"^05055" -v&\f3o .................................. I may do.

,

.....

Thou mayst
she, or it

urite-

or

&&-->&

&>\&> ................... He,

may

read.

...We

may be

there.

You may
.............

stand.
send,

They may

22

170

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
do.

~^;& :Cc*)o~<5" ?& .................... ............ I may not

v

),

sriCi3oT3"> 2fc ......... ...................

.

Thou mayst
He, she, or

not write.
it

may

not read.

We may
. .

not be there.
stand.

.You may not

They may
and

not send.

tf"5*&>, the third persons neuter of the affirmative

and nega-

tive aorists of the root

3cr2&

to

join are added to infinitives to denote, possi-

bility

or impossibility, the

being changed to
.

according to rule 115, thus,

do.

...........

I can

Thou
or

canst write.

9&T^>S5'c

*2&&3 ........

......... He, she,

or

it

can read.

We can be there.
You can stand. They can
send.

I cannot do.

Thou
or

canst notwrite.
it

^5a^255^C7SJ5D .................. He,

she, or

cannot read.

We 'cannot

be there.

You cannot standThey cannot

443
Various negative compound tenses
tenses of the verb
send.
affixing the several

may be formed by

&*&

to

go, to the negative verbal participle of

any verb

the original verb remains in the negative verbal participle, whilst the auxiliary
tsnses of
sfr*^>)

are conjugated through

all

the persons; thus,

..... ...........

I didnot
Thou

write.

..

..............

wilt not read.

to send.

Twill not fail

have already explained, under rule 441, that

O&

13^)

- ~<i$C<&

-l5^Dto
is

444,

v&>
infinitives as

$), the negative aorist

of the root Ifex)^,

ability,

an auxiliary, denotes want of

when added I as cannot &c. Put it

often used alone as an original defective verb, representing the negative of the

perfect tense of

&

o<Jfc>

to be

thus,

there... .........

&_&~3&>. .1 was not

.

there.

....Thou

wast there,

. ,

..W2T_1^).

TViow was/ wo/

was
,

there ......... <S?f_l5cc&.// e

z/
.

was not

there.

or

was there.&$_ &~326 s^, or

there.........
......

&$ r_&~$x>...W e were not there.

r

liou were there .........

^^_^"^5o...Fott were

not there.

M.

Sf

F.

Sf

F.

.....

They were there ........

W J_^lj5b... r^y were wo< ^ere.

N,
wo/ there.

N.

were

*fo?re ......

^^^"^^...r/j^ were
it's

In these two senses &&> agrees with

nominative in gender and number.

indeclinably, in two

l5&>, the neuter of the third person singular, is used other senses, as explained under the head " Particles."
Condition or contingency,

goo, by of the several affirmative tenses into

is expressed, in the superior dialect of the Teloo- 445 the final vowel of each of the different persons in the first forms changing
~=s
>

and

in the

common

dialect,

changing the termination

tense into ~w
;

8$

of the

first

person in the first

by merely form of the past

thus, in the superior dialect,

from

^koxSrsr ^) ...... I beat ............ comes. &* *&> &73*2j& ..... if I beat/ have
beaten ............

r*gS"^!D ............ if 1 beat.

I shall beat ................. ~~?o&!$!0 .......... I beat. if

I

eo

1 beat, did beat, t, f > j,

' , , '

or shall beat

...... S

&X5&o <3^
eo

(r\

if J I heat vv

if ld0t

I shall do ................ "3^>&~l3s ......... 7///o.

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
.I bless ..... .

I blessed. .......... .........

>o-a'&ls ...........

if I

bless.

Ishallbless ............. &SjG^>$lo<D .........

if I bless.

and

in the inferior dialect,

from

Ihavebeaten ..... comes...

S^g

ll ...............
'o
}

if I beat.

contracted by

rule

354

to

l5~t>

.Iblessed

&S>03~3 f
t
vaiies with the

'f 2 bless,&. do.

A

364

to ujoJ

&

0\

-"*

(O

446

The word ending

"^ in

numbers and

persons, thus

ri ......

...........

^ifo

................ if

I do.

Sing ......... <.2... ...............

f.3 J/. F.

fb8~a$ ................. ifthoudo.

she, or
it

$ N....^~^^ .................. if he,

do.

ifwedoI

2 ..... .... ......... "^^fgO^ ............... if you do.

but the word terminating in

-|f is

used for every person and number,

-S

~-8>j

means
447

if

I, tJiou, he, she, it,

we, you, or they do.

Although the above examples are translated in English by the present tense
of the subjunctive mood,
e

it is

to

be observed

that, in the

superior dialect, tho

g
.

present tense with

&

is

seldom used, the past tense with

often occurs in

a past, or future, as well as in a present conditional meaning; the future tense

with

>

is

used in a future conditional sense only, and the aorist with

;

in

a conditional sense, indefinite as to time

thus,

f TT'C
Present.
.

&

qo)

-SSoTJ^'C

1B )
V If he goes, he
icill

. .

-J
-

meet him.

(c?;&5b>&W& ......... J

SYNTAX^

Past..
j

^>7V^oXb5b ............
j

// the king governs

subjects icill be

the

kingdom

veil, his

happy.

\\f\

a present sense ......... j

J sJlould come to-morrow, I

will

speak

n a past sense

Future

O ^) 55 "S

J5 "S S)"

...!/ you
-

come to-morrow, I will give.

'

{
come to-morrow, I will give.

\
In the

common

dialect, this

form of the verb

is

not restricted to any time

but, according to the context, represents a present, past, or future conditional

meaning.
............. If
...... If
.......

I give, he

will come.
icill

I give to-morrow, he

come.

If

I had given

yesterday, he would have

[come'

By
^)o

using the conditional form of the verb Gs ocSb

to be,

commonly

written

448

co} with the present or past verbal participle of

any other verb, we give

that verb a present or past conditional meaning;

thus,

"S^^^^o 000

^^
if

S&oUC

o^dT'S355oo?5So^ ^cn'^)o"t3

^^5bo'o"to

sfcooJ&TT*

"-vfc^;&

Devaduttu, be

now going

to the

pearl fishery, he will arrive before

all the rest,

/]f

Europe ships had arrived

before this period, these articles

would not

have become so dear.

by rule 364, <x>0-5K

jnay be contracted into

174
449

TBLOOGOO GRAMMAR.
In the superior dialect, each of these conditional forms of the verb, by

affixino- c*&>,

represents the

English subjunctive with

the words

although,

notwithstanding prefixed to it; thus,

#!$$<*&> although I come,

came, or

should come.

The same meaning

is

expressed by the past relative participle of

f& in the superior diathe verb, with the addition of the indeclinable particle
lect,

and

So^^^or "7^^ in
or

the
1

common

dialect; thus

"^cb, ^-S^tf^.

o^^"^"7

^ ^

although he come, came, or should come,

~Z5~c
1

?^
*"

although he give, gave, or should give;

;

&>(^rJ

he write, wrote, or should write

the final
of the past relative participle
7

is

when "TVS $^ is added, *>- A lengthened; thus, "<^,

SS-3^

never

^^N^"

^^^; and
is

* the past relative participle itself, with the final

as,

thus lengthened,

often used in this sense;

TJ^C^b^^'Sr

although he

come, came, or should come.

450

The
dialect

conditional form of any verb

to
it's

may

also

be expressed in the

common

by adding
as

past

relative participle the particles ^>ox> ~Q an(j CO

-

--

or they do. ^c\x>

fc9ooo

composed of the
and

particle

^^ meaning
;

so as, as

if,

and

the conditional form of the root

9$) to become

&rc3o^r

is

com-

posed of the same particle first form of the past tense of

^^,

3<5?oivx>

the third person singular in the

&&,
-=5

with
is

it's final

o changed

into ~~.
it is

451

When
aorist,

the condition or contingency

of a negative nature,

expressed in
negative

the superior dialect

by adding

to the respective persons of the

and

in the

common

dialect

by

affixing to the negative verbal participle

to oe; thus, in

the

common

conditional form of

^) to go or ra oc

the supe-

rior dialect

we

say
if I do not beat, have not beaten, or shallnot beat.

dfthou dostnot do, hastnot done, or wilt not do.

ifJi e

does n0 f

bless,

has not blessed, or will not

bless.

and

in the inferior dialect.

GO

or
}

or

&3o-tfoo"t3 If I

thou, he, she,

-

it,

we, you, or they beat,

do,

or bless-havs

beaten, done, or blessed

oi\shall beat, do, or bless.

OF SYNTAX.
CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICIPLES.
VERBAL PARTICIPLES.

175

There- is no part of the verb of more frequent occurrence in Teloogoo than

the verbal participles, with the proper use of which, therefore,
it
is

of great

importance that the student should be well acquainted

they can never, like

the English participles, be used as adjectives, but must invariably be governed

by some tense of a

verb.

The

verbal participles are used in Teloogoo

when we wish

to

express any
in

452

minor actions of the person who performs the chief action mentioned
sentence.

the

The

verbal participles, denoting the minor actions performed, or

placed

first

in the sentence,

and are governed by the verb denoting the main

action, with

which the sentence elegantly terminates.

is

The

peculiarity in these participles, therefore,

action,
final

that they always refer to

is

453

some subordinate
nominative to the

performed by that particular agent only which

the

governing verb, and never can express actions performed

by

others.

If the minor action be simultaneous with the

main action

in the sentence, the

it,

454

present verbal participle

the past verbal participle
participle
is

is
;

used

if

antecedent in point of time to

we use

and

if it

be of a negative nature, the negative verbal

used.

The

following examples are subjoined in illustration of these rules.

P U E
sTie& ii>r r3o)r$boJr'
>

E N T.
)

>

&

co c

j^^^^iy raoax)ex)^e^] ^ol^^oawo'oT

Reducing
to

455

dust

the

arrows of his foes, piercing the bodies of his enemies with his oicn arrows,

exciting

a panic in the minds of the opponent's forces, and animating the

soldiers,

spirits

of

his

own

Arjoona ruled

the

battle-.

Fostering
subjects,

his

protecting the poor,

and honoring

the great,

Dhurmarajah conducted

the government.

176
efk>o2*>,55
kine,

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
,l$cl3;&
Playing, singing, and laughing with those ivho attended

Krishna arrived on the banks of the river Jumna.

PAST456
2)

^^p;^^Gr9cocDi^c3of &
;

'j^&r&i&to&^$&v&^ti$$&&o&$$&l$S& $&$~^

the chase, having sent

panied by hisfriends, proceeded

''
for his
^fS).

&

Vikramarka, having resolved

to

proceed to

charioteer,

and having ordered

T5"&o:5be;o'er
-

his car,
r*

accom-

to the forest.

So

Rama, having entered

t

Ceylon,

having killed the giants,

the

having installed

Vib hishana,
to

and having mounted

divine

car,

named

Pooshpuku, returned

Oude.

NEGATIVE457
So8a?&e>&> stops' #jfc eys-wsSboorfc

8otf Ytf tfsfca ri&/'K>

Without calling his
his

rB
ctf3'

^o^7^^e^^o^e>$d&cs&3g3$"i
without taking his
his enemies. singly fought with

&>.

retinue,

bow and arrows, and without putting on

armour* he

458

It will-be

placed

first in

observed that, in each of these examples, the verbal participles are the sentence, and invariably denote actions subordinate to that

expressed by the verb at the conclusion of the period,by which they are governed; thus, in the three examples given of the present verbal participle, ruled,
conducted and arrived, are the main actions expressed
reducing, piercing
fyc.
;

and the participles

singing
tyc.

fostering, protecting

T. playing,

are

all

minor actions subordinate thereto.

actions in question were
all

It will further

be perceived that the minor

is

performed by that agent only which

the nomina-

tive to the governing- verb.

Arjoona ruled, and

it

it

was he

also that reduced

and

pierced; Dhurmarajah conducted, and

was he

also that fostered and protected;

Krishna arrived, and

it

was he

also that played

and sung.

Had any one

else

performed these minor actions, the verbal participles could not have been used-

As
main

the minor actions of reducing and piercing

action of ruling, the fostering

were simultaneous with the

'

and protecting with that of conducting y

arriving, the

and the playing and singivg with that of

present verbal parti-

OF SYNTAX.
ciples are used, in these cases
:

177

but, in the

examples given of the past verbal

participle,

it

will

to the chase, his sending for his charioteer,

in point of time, antecedent to the

be perceived that the resolution of Vikramarka to proceed and his ordering his car, were all,

main action of his proceeding

to the forest

so also

Rama's entering Ceylon,

killing the giants,

&c were

actions performed

by him previously to
verbal participle
is

his return to
;

Oude

hence, in these instances, the past

used

and

in the last

example, because the minor actions

are of a negative nature,

we use the

negative verbal participle.

it is

As an

exception to the foregoing rules,

to

be observed that when we

459

speak of the time that has elapsed since any particular event occurred, the past
verbal participle

may be used

absolutely,

and then has a nominative of it's own,

;

independent of that of the

it is

final

governing verb
literally, 1

thus,

ten

days since I came,

is

having come, ten days have passed;

-,

here S'ST'ex) days

the nominative to the final governing verb 53ab<~& passed

to the

but ~$(fo /is the nominative

is

verbal participle

*^^

having come, which

used absolutely.

The

verbal participles always govern the same case as the verb to which they
" "a3

460

belong; thus,

^^^^"^

~sr2b having beaten him he camt\

"sr

^)

being

governed by the active verbal participle

""3

in the accusative case.

The

foregoing remarks will give the student some idea of the importance of
;

the verbal participles iu the construction of the Teloogoo

they are peculiarly

well adapted to a language that abounds in descriptive passages, and the Student
will occasionally find

them carrying on and connecting

meaning

the sense for pages

the full together, but suspending

until the conclusion of the period.

;

Hence,

in

some degree, the

rare occurrence of conjunctions in Teloogoo

for
is

the connexion between the subordinate and chief action in a sentence, which
often supersedes the use of them. implied by the verbal participles,

RELATIVE PARTICIPLES.
in Teloogoo, by certain Separate relative pronouns are rendered unnecessary

461

participles of the verb

which have the power of the

23

relative inherent in them,

178
and which,
like the

TELOOGOO GBAMMAE.

o#S&o

adjectives,

must always be followed by some

noun or pronoun.
462

The
belong
;

relative participles also

denote the action of the verb to which they

and the present, the

past, the indefinite, or negative participle is used,

according to the sense intended to be expressed-

463

The

peculiarity of these participles consists in the relative inherent in

them

invariably referring to the

noun

or

pronoun which immediately follows them,

denoted by them, unless the relative
SS

and which
participle
ex> the

is

also the

agent

to the action

stands between two nouns or pronouns; thus,

"S'C fo -ifcr^jo^ex) the milk that persons that are coming,

the

boils,

person that beat,

-o*>$$)&
talked,

the

tiger that

killed,

the parrot that talks,

writes, wrote, or will

or will talk,
sSbo

(^J

^-syocSb the
that
is,

man

that

write,

-i&r3>l53

the county

was, or will
not,

not be to be seen, ~&*&*~<D$>3$roSx> the country in which

there is

was

not,

or will not be a king.

464

If the relative participle of an active verb stands

between two nouns or

the agent to the action
it

pronouns, arid the

first

be in the nominative case,

it is

denoted by the
is

participle,

and the noun following, in whatever case

;

may

be,

the object affected by that action

o

thus,

~53~5bT;3"Oob?5^)> the tiger that they

Killed,

SXr&>-r >$-5yC&stheman
if

that you saw,

"S^a&lbD-otfsSbftlx the
in the accusative,
it

person that he called; but

is

the first

noun or pronoun be

the object affected

by the action which the

it

active participle denotes,

and the

following noun, in whatever case

the
tiger that
killed him,

may be, is the agent thereto; "^S^oab^^D 2toxx> ?5-c$cn>-u)r5'5ro CcSb the man that saw you,
that called him.
If,

"S^o^O-atfS&^oX
agent and

the person

independently of the

object, the relative inherent in an active participle, refers to the

it

instrument, place, or other subordinate correlative to the action which

notes, the agent
sative,
is

de-

placed.first in the nominative case, then the object in the accu-

next the relative participle,and finally the instrument, place, or other cor-

relative to

which

it

refers

thus

1ti>$)>$-o*)$3' _Q

or -8*bx> the-sword with

OF SYNTAX.
which, or the place in

179

which, I killed the tiger;

In these examples / and the king are the agents, and therefore in the nominative case, the tiger and the cow are the objects, and therefore in the accusative, and the sword, the place,
e^C'^b
the

bramin

to

whom

the king gave the cow.

and

the

bramin are the subordinate correlatives referred

tfie

to,

and therefore

placed immediately after

participle.

If the relative participle of a neuter verb stands

between two nouns or

465

nominative case, because neuter verbs pronouns, the fust must always be in the
cannot govern the accusative; and
ted
it is

also

always the agent to the action denothe subordinate correla<oo

by

the participle, the

noun following being merely

tive thereto; thus, I?&^)o<sr5'cooe>3 the house in

which I was, SXn'Sbc^^gb

the

road in which you walk,

-&*<:&&-&*- o&$#x>
slept.

the place on

which he

sat,

SDa^SoSoSfc^f^cooeX) the house in which you

The

will best explain the foregoing and following examples

manner

in

which

466

these participles supply, in construction, the cases of the relative pronouns, and

the mode in which they must be translated in English by corresponding prepositions.

N.

-sroeShSo&tf^)^ ............ Thetiger which

killed them.

The man who saw you.

The person who called him. G.

>o-)>A?5;&).x .............. The man whose

The
tree

clothes are torn.

of which theflowers are faded.

the wall
is

The house of which

The field of which

inclined.
is

the produce

ripe.

D.

ISifctf-O^SSfD ............... The b us iness or

w hich I came.

T^C&sto^ oe
Ac.
sr&tfoS>tf;g)l)

.........

The house

to

which he came.
killed.

.............

The

tiger

which they

The man whom you saw.

The person whom he Ab.
called.

jJ^B^ftR^g ........... The tree from which flowers

were yalhtral

180

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
The house
The
<>

in

which 1

slept.

knife with which the fruit was cut.

it

The house on which

rained.

467

It

is

not easy, by any general rule, to define on what the case of the relative
;

depends
?f_

in rule

464 the mere substitution of the word -^600 a

;

place,

for

a sword, changed the relative with which, into for ichich

)

and in rule 466

the substitution of ox> ^

a house, for 3& business, changed the relative for

which into

to

which.

In the examples given in 466 the relative participle concase, yet the relative itself,

stantly stands

between two nouns in the nominative

is

which

in
;

Teloogoo

inherent in the participle,

is

in the genitive, dative, or active participle

is

ablative

and

it is

curious that in Teloogoo

in
if

when an

placed

between two nominatives, the relative

(see examples of the accusative)
;

English must be in the objective case

the objective case inTeloogoo precede

while

an active participle, the relative in English must be in the nominative case (see

examples of the nominative).

bramin
to
is

In rule 464, the correlative

\^

{&? eaoc^b a

in the

nominative, yet from the nature of the verb

is

to give, the relative

whom, which

inherent in the Teloogoo participle,

is

in

the dative case

in

thus, therefore, the case of the relative

would seem

to

depend
;

some instances on the case

on the nature, rather than the case of the following word

of the preceding

in others,

word

and

in some,

on the nature of the verb

itself.

468

The common
same
say
s

indefinite relative

participle,
;

by

affixing

9&, has often the

signification as

an abstract noun
is excellent,

thus, using the abstract noun,

we may
relative

ex)q)35DO-)S service

or

we may
;

use the

common

participle with ^5S>,

and say g^OlSasfep-aa

but, while the

abstract

nouns

are declined and construed as substantives, the relative participles as well as the

verbal nouns (such as S^ew-C&xb an d

,

^o^$^X))

being integral parts of the

verbs,

verb, although declined like nouns, are invariably construed like

and

govern the same case as the verb from which they are derived
abstract

thus, using the

is excellent, SXn>
-

noun

^ex>q5) 5

we

say

&cr'~ ex>q$)35boS>a your service

;

being placed in the possessive case

but when we use

^OlSS

*~?ex>-t&k>

Or

OF SYNTAX.

181

s^>

SSSXXD,

we must

place the pronoun in the accusative case and say StoS&y o

1

"

iS

'^$

you, or the serving

you

is

excellent.

Nouns denoting
masculine, and

the agent

may

be formed from every verb, by adding to the

469

relative participles, either affirmative or negative, the

pronoun

"sn>C3Sc for the

^&

for the feminine

and neuter,

in the singular

number

and

for the masculine

us,
>'5r C(&b
t>

and feminine, and

beats,

^9<D for the neuter, in the plural;

CO
-

the

man who
o0^r5b

the heater,

^f^& SO
kill,

the

woman

or the

thing that beats,

the

the s

men or women
fcp

that

the killers, -^

woman

or the thing that

kills,

"src2w the
the

man who
or
the

does not beat,

has not beaten, or will not

beat,

i^J-^a

woman

thing

that

does

not beat, has not beaten, or will not beat.

"

&D

^cc ' nave '

rc

by some, been

called infinitives

but they are

470

no more

infinitives

than

"so"srC(3Sb or

T^O oO-rC<&>. They are merely, as

above stated, relative participles, with the pronouns "^r^C^o and 9& added to _ _ __S them; thus, wO eo~5FCuso is composed of we oo the common indefinite
.

relative participle of the root tf'o^S) to

_C

kill,

with the pronoun

~53"
.

GJ& added to

it;

and^o
it
;

ooS

is

composed of the same word

^o

f
>

with the pronoun ^5"

all

added to
the

such compound words

may be

declined through

the cases of

pronoun ~&~C3&) and M.

&&

in the following

manner.

SINGULAR.
N.ftF.-

G.

-es'a"^-'5To S)_-s3-^^ool

D.
Ace.

Ab.
P L

UEA

L.

M. 8fF.

N.

N.
G.

182
I).

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

Ace.

Ab.
So, also

may we

D decline t5'o^)T3bo^"sr C2Sb and

2& and

fiS'oS}c5a.-tfo55-sr>c2$b an(i -tfoS5fi>.

GENERAL RULES.
471

In Teloogoo, the word agreeing with the verb

case,

is

always in the nominative

and has generally the

first

place in the sentence, then follows the

word

denoting the object governed by the verb, next any intermediate explanatory
clause,

and the verb

itself closes
it's

the period.
;

472

verb agrees with

nominative in gender, number, and person

it

but when

two or more nominatives agree with the same verb,

is

placed in the plural

number, and agrees

in

gender with the masculine or feminine nominative, in

;

preference to the neuter

the lotus shone,

thus,
<

IT'S&tfc^'^ocX&jC^

^ ^o-8 the moon and

D
:

7Toex>SS

80q)ex>o5'-^8 the cowherds

it

and cows came

but such

forms of expression are very uncommon,

r

would be more elegant

to say

^^

zX)ZSm>$)Z)< ?)->\Qthe cowherds came loiththe cows ; and

to express in
all

Teloo-

goo that the king, the minister, their horses, and elephants,
city,
-5)8

entered into the

we never

should say

but "^toXKlfctf
horses.

otfoKOW^ySy^o-aQ

they arrivea

>

and
473

If two or

more nouns and pronouns,

of different persons, connected

by a

copulative conjunction are nominatives to the

same

verb, the verb

is

placed in

the plural number, but agrees with the second person in preference to the third,

and with the

first

in preference to

both; as ~$(&&rt>&~B~ Sfc!jbZx>

I}

you,

and he came*
474

Neuter verbs, from

their nature,.never

can govern a noun or pronoun jjwhen

as active verbs.

made

causal they are construed in the

same manner

Active

verbs govern substantives in the accusative case; thus,

we say

OP SYNTAX.

183
nouns denoting inanimate

Rama
objects,

killed

Ravana

but

all

when governed by active verbs, may be placed in the nominative, instead

;

of the accusative case

and, unless the use of the nominative would render the

is

meaning obscure,
or

this

the

more correct and elegant construction

he mounted the car,

thus,

&C}> lSyi>

?&>

T3">#o/<5&D?&

or
the

played at
:

chess,

~3&>o&>
)
)

or

S^o&efcn^S, / saw

mountain)

&*&~zr8&' \;l>&(63

or

"S^ "Sr ^37T*(J^b the gardener has planted trees.

ask,

The
win,

verbs 5b<&>o to milk,

&&>&to

o&X&cS&>

to amerce,
;

^^
but
if

to

475

*&

to rob,

with a few others,

may govern two

it

accusatives

one

of these accusatives denote an inanimate object,

native instead of the accusative case,
t>

may be

placed in the nomior

^ O3P~CF
D

rt>

q^)^>^r Or

o e;^j

the

cowherd milked the cow,

<S'

tff&;3cn>6b;S15"

o?&
~

he asked his master for one hundred pagodas,

:

SSl^offo or S5"O~ew2io2X'~ ^>r&

hundred pagodas, ~^o^^r
l)

tf/jg

magistrate
s

amerced the guilty one

t>
l>

^?5r
ro

5b^Tr

Of^) or
6o"^r
o

5S'T5'

ex>~^?^"53"
T)

c&

Iwonfrom

him one hundred pagodas,

8

5 oXew^

T>

e)e-?^^ s5M o^) or ^s&^exxS)

s

#Ae thieves robbed the travellers

of their jewels.
govern the noun which would 476 form in the instrumental ablative the noun
;

Active verbs,

when converted

into causals,

have been the agent

in their active

which would have been the object

tive, or, if it

in their active

form continues in the accusa;

denote something inanimate, in the nominative case

built

thus,

sr^
to

cxex>'4SixrD ^b/jg

eo

a house,

~^f^>-5cn>^" ^^cooew'43 ^><Q fn eo

:

caused him

build a house,

~^"sSb"(5b<bl) j6?f3&D

~53"

>"^>&>

my

son wrote the book, ~<3&>

to

.'jSg'sSwy^*; ow^R)
the tiger

J caused my son

write

the book,

killed the goat,

"^^^D^^^o^^b-^o^S
you
to

I caused

the

tiger

to

kill

the goat,

o^&axro^^e-SSb^^"^^ &8

mentioned this news,

SXro^^cxxr^^Cfg-^r*?^^)"^^^^ 7 caused you

to read, to sing, or to eat, with

mention this news.

But verbs denoting

perhaps a few others,

the agent

477

when converted

into causals,

govern the noun which would have been

184
in their simple

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
form either
in the ablative or accusative case;

ej?& or $5SC^l3^)j3s'&x>ex>-e$'<a

SolS^

#/ig

master caused his pupils

to

read books, -7Vc*5c3o<y&> or ~7Vo3oSool$&oSo Af sSbo-ro-S)9

songsters
to

^ ey

caused the

sing,

05*o&>

or

)3

^IS^

?5^o5bo

8iOlbol3<xb fo

caused children

to eat boiled rice.

478

When

a verb directly affects two nouns, the one denoting; a whole, and the

Other a part of that whole, the noun denoting the part stands in the nominative,

but the principal noun

5'
6

is

placed in the genitive case; thus, /"foesS&Doc3oo?f ~~U 6*9

cutting off the tails

'exfSan>^&

they

are

of

horses.

The

principal

noun may
principal

also stand in the dative; thus &>

in the accusative

e35&ooi&e^'ex>"1&r ~r5b, or the &9

;

noun may stand

Teloogoo,
to be,
is

thus, fo

^e^eT^wlfo-o^Sb
mode
of expression.

and

this, in

considered the most elegant

479

which so often occurs in the English language, is generally omitted in Teloogoo it may occasionally be used, but it is thought more elegant to dispense with the use of it- The mode in which it is omitted in
verb
:

The

Teloogoo when it is placed between an adjective and a substantive noun or pronoun, has been already explained (see rule 428), where it would intervene
in English

between a substantive pronoun and a substantive noun,

it

is

also

omitted in Teloogoo. Indeed, as the personal terminations of the verb are derived from the substantive pronouns, it does not seem strange that these

pronouns themselves should partake

in

some degree of

the essence of the verb.

In Teloogoo, when a substantive pronoun immediately precedes a substantive

noun, the latter has the force of the present tense of the verb

to be

inherent
certain

in it;

and

if

the pronoun be of the 1st or 2d person, the

noun assumes

affixes.

If the

pronoun be of the
9^

1st person, the affix to the

noun
for

is

in the singular,

&

for

nouns in
;

or ~^_,^(fo for
plural,

nouns

in
all

N3,

and

f^>

nouns of any other

termination
If the
S)

and in the

^&x> for

nouns.

pronoun be of the 2d person, the

in
;
s>

affix to the

noun
for

is

in .the singular,

for

nouns

or
in

2L

^^

for

nouns in
all

^ and 3b
nouns.

nouns in any other

termination

and

the plural ""& for

OF SYNTAX.
If the

I.S.")

pronoun be of the

third person, the

noun takes no

affix.

The

following examples will more

y

fully explain this construction.

(0<\x>?f)

am

a poet.
art a poet.

)q)S

)&
,

.Thou

He
,

is

a poet.

/ am a bramin.

Thou

art a bramin.

'....He is
....

a bramin.
is
is

This

a horse. a cow.
child. child.

This

cv>f&)b&> .....
...

.....

............................ . ............ I

am a

Go

Thouarta

He
s>

is

child.

or o5cr5s$bo?fq5)e;35bo ........................................

We

are poets.

Ye are poets.

They are poets.

"^03600 or

ofc><5x>(jX*J scr^eaoosSix)

...............................

W&are

bramins.

Te are bramins.
They are bramins.
are
X) ............................................................

These are

coivs.

or S&cfcfioOflSoSfcOu,
(AS
.

.........

?Fe are children.

.......

......

Ye are

children.
children-

ew ...................................................
It will

.....

TAey are

be observed that
to

^
it,

and 2d persons prefixed

3

a poet, with the singular pronouns of the 1st in the one case affixes >, and in the other >,

because

it

terminates in

but

^^/^s^Ci^b
in $s or

a bramin ends in

o and there}

fore affixes' *"&>

and

^,

or rather changes the final

into these

terminati-

ons

and O^S a child endiug neither

nor in

^, takes simply

and
24

186
Each of

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
these nouns, viz. sf> -(^3^3;r^?aDC<&>
it,

and d^, with the pronouns

of the 1st and 2d persons plural prefixed to

takes ^Zxx> and

^80

and none

of them,

when preceded by

the pronouns of the third person, take any affix

whatever.

480

One verb governs another

but the
infinitive invariably

that refers to

it,

or

depends on

it,

in the infinitive;
it

precedes the governing verb, instead of following

to

as in English; thus,

/ wish

conquer

my

foes

S^c^
481

5
,

1 hoped to

adore Shiva

When

the speaker states what another has said, he does not, as in English,

use the infinitive

the particle ^^

mood

having said ; thus, he told

he repeats the words of the original speaker, adding me to write, would in the Teloogoo
thou,

idiom

be rendered \3F^ctf:>3&<0 T3"l,j^?& namely (^^yc*5K>S&> write

Tfc"
1

having said,
_

*^^

he told; thus also, the sentence ~zr&>~~>X)'&>-tio fe or dered hi

km the
kill

snake, consists of the

9

words srD C5& h e -jr35c&> the snake, -tfo'Q)^

~5^
to

thou,

having said,

him,

q)_j5bq)

order.

o13^f&

gave-,

"^ctfoSSw and

preceding

&> are changed, by the rules for Sund,hi, to lictfbo>

common
dialect the
^o

respectively, for in the

is

before the sSw of the imperative

;

generally dropped in this construction, for the sake of alliteration

say

thus, also,

we

/ heard

that

Devadutta went ~S^a$e&oS^^o;3S)o&3!0

with ^>& either

Sec.

In

this

sense, the relative participles,

case, are

in the nominative or accusative

as,

sometimes elegantly used in Teloogoo

or the particle

"B^&

efoi^SjScxo^a or

S^cxotfTT'SO^po^^

T,

hereafter mentioned,
;

to the participles joined with

&&

in the

nominative case

may.be added ~% thus,

/ teard that Devadutta

went-, thus also,

we say
t

6 or e)^^8c-es'^r c^oca^S^-^-sr^5b or

hey affirm that an incarnation

of the

God
482
to

Vishnoo
is

is

about

to take place>

^^

used, in the

same manner, when we address

tell

to a

second person orders

be delivered to a third,

him

to

send oSoobotfi&<b"l;>S3j, literally

OF SYNTAX.
send thou,
to write,

187
:

&$

having said,
direct

~^^
him

tell;

\[*^c*5b35b" 3So^>
c.

tall

him

tf^3SbiO3

JS)O^

to read,

When we

wish to represent various minor actions

performed by others as

483

contemporaneous with the chief action performed by a particular person menti-

oned

in the sentence,, a

number of infinitives, denoting

these minor actions, are

placed together in the sentence, which terminates, in an elegant manner, with

the verb denoting the

main action placed in

it's

appropriate tense

thus,

While the
having arrived at the
city

rulers

of fifty-six

countries,

of Mid,hila, were

in attendance, while fair damsels

sported in the dance, while choristers chaunted songs, while they sounded the

great

drum and

other musical instruments,

while the gods

shoicered flowers,

while the bards

city

and

genealogists proclaimed panegyrics, while the people

of

the

were fitted with joy, the king Dasarad\ha celebrated the nuptials of his

son

Rama- Even

in familiar conversation this

mode

of expression

is

sometimes

usod.

If the infinitive of a verb with the particle

it

~5~

added

to

it,

be twice repeated,

484

denotes progression;

thus,

writing improves gradually

be understood gradually by

as we write,
reading,
shortens,

^vIx^Tew^^ci^"7V ^^do^T^So^So^) ^^^ A v T5")jf A U wex)r&r& it will

($3*~7?3&'7?'>tttf:)fojS3 as we
55"5xs~^x>o8cS5o'7 rD o8cOo'7TD :3?$)^)ex3
i

'

walk

the

road gradually
it

>oc&?& as

rains the lakes will be gradually filled.

to

The
is

root

$~&>

buy, conjugated through

all its

moods, tenses, and persons,

frequently added to the past verbal participle of another verb,

when

it

is

intended to restrict the action denoted by that verb exclusively

the agent
;

to the benefit of
9

and often

in the superior, but always in the inferior dialect, final

is

of the past verbal participle

changed to

^ when ^^0

js

thus added

as

188
~&>
or

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

~3&>^&
one's
53
v"
""/'

to

do for one's own

benefit
D
;

benefit,

(^2J^?&>
I
benefit benefit
;

or

to write

for
or

own

thus

we

say

\^y ^"^r^
;

wrote,

&^T'~zr f &>

wrote for

my own

"I3"r^x>

/ doyj^fe
he told,

&sT'o&y-t.^) I do for

my own

"%&&&
benefit.
;

or

"^So^^^T^cSb
added merely

he told for his own

Sometimes,

however

^&>

is

for the sake of elegance

thus

we may say
it

either 2Tsoo-cn=_o3> or

K~*ax>-<n>-l&^o3
verb to which

1 saw the
it is

letter; at

other times,

alters the signification of the

added

in a

manner scarcely

to

be defined

-^&-X$__

^b;r>b
it

he walks well,

-^>-$_-K*$&>&
3

he behaves well;
it

occasionally

makes

a neuter verb active 73"so

was understood

to

me, ~>r&~I3ex>s>D3'^o3
bring,

understood, <^cS&> to
3

draw,

to pull,

fe^<&

to

!^J^-

to

prostrate,

rScoyS^JT

to invoke

&c.
verbal participle of a verb prefixed to any tense of the verb
is

485

The present
j5"-&r^
to

come denotes that the action expressed by the participle

;

habitual or
the habit
to

of long continuance

thus, ^5^^ss5cn>oooo^3l55c^'^" i^?^> he

was in

of coming

to.

my

house, ~53-2&Tu$T

-/v^^b^s^oecvro^"^^)

he

continued

behave himself

icell,

o^ro^^ef^^^^lp?5g^X)^o2^^n'^^^3
this land,

grain

formerly used

to be

produced in

TP^^c&OT^-B^ZgSd^-oo^lS
kingdom in a just manner,
letters.

the

king continued to govern the

yon must continue sending

48G

It has already
infinitive

been stated that active verbs become passive by adding to the the verb 3<&> to fall, to suffer. By affixing this verb to the nominaneuter nouns, particularly to such as denote any bodily suffering compound verb is formed of a neuter signification and if
;

tive case of

or mental affection, a

the

noun end

in

o^>, this termination

is

may be changed
;

into c, or
thus, from
to fear
;

may be

dropped
fear
is

altogether; the latter

the

more common form

formed ^cOb&joSo<> or $*cSooXS;&> O r ^cfoSo^b

from

a blow comes

*3^c5o

to be

beaten

c.

But

if

instead of the neuter form

it

"^^o, the active form S>Q!K&

be added

to the

substantive,

makes an

active

OF SYNTAX.
verb
;

189
to frighten,

thus,

from

cCoStoo

ett r

comes 2?"(35o5b-i&
f<j

and from

r^.oesoXoSx)
to please.

gladness

comes

flOOo^&XS&i

be pleased,

and ^oe""^xo55b-v$3

The verb ^-^^ which properly signifies to own possession into that of another, although
by the verb
to give, is

deliver
it

any thing from one's

487

not

in

be translated in English with that English verb. It Teloogoo synonymous

may

cannot be used unless the thing'delivered

if

is

taken by the receiver

a bramin invites another to dine with him,

we cannot
:
;

in

example, Teloogoo say with

;

for

propriety that he gave

is

him

boiled rice

^$^%X)~ &^&>

because the boiled rice

not delivered into the hands of the bramin invited, but only placed on a leaf

before him.
him.

We

must

therefore say &5?^oSx)~l>~|o^

]ie

placed

rice before

But

if

he were to give the food to his palanqueen bearer,

who, being of
it,

an inferior

cast, is

not allowed to pollute the house of a bramin by eating in

rice before

he does not place the boiled

this case therefore

him, but delivers

it

into his hands,

and in
that

we might

say

^ "^j3r^2fc&<5%>
in

ocxref)^^Dol^^>
if

bramin gave

rice to 7tis

palanqueen bearer.
*

In the same manner,

)

you give

grass to a horse,

you cannot say

Teloogoo
,

grass

to the horse,

but ^^3/^0 "^^Sb

w ^^

co?q5)

'^^ax)jb> I gave ^J|p ^>_^^ I threw grass to the horse.

j*

OF PARTICLES OR INDECLINABLE WORDS.

There arc scarcely any proper adverbs

then, ^S>>j>2& when,

in Teloogoo, cxoSoy^Sb now,

^=^0

488

v&>

to-day,

^^^yesterday,

"8$) to-morrow, &c. are not

;

adverbs, but substantive nouns which are declined

adverbs however are easily

made, or rather

their

want

is

supplied,

by adding

to

any noun substantive or

which,
following a
;

adjective the infinitive ~3~% from the verb

&&
to

to

become,

nominative,
thus,

is

changed into ~^, according

the rules given in Chapter Second

from roo^>x>
>.
.

happiness... As derived,.. ..^>^>^>~^

..beauty
.great....

>

....

happily.

OcZSv^... .beautifully.

^^i'7^'

greatly.

190

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

$~7\* ...... from eS^tf ............... quickness... -Is derived...^ quickly. ^* Ov

................. cold .......... : ..............

^%~7V

........

coldly.

............... soft,
.......

slow .................... Offr^Ty ...... softly, slowly.

,

QcSog ..............

sweet ............

..........

fkxfcg-?^
3

.....

sweetly. Utterly.

............ bitter .....................

^^T^

.......

fa wind blows coldly,

*/ie

^.e9^8^^7C*ST&J&?jNa

horse goes slowly.

489

It is to

be remarked that

~A~

can never be added to the nominative with which

that

the rerb agrees, but only to an adjective or substantive qualifying

native.
salt I

nomi-

If I

would express
~K*,

that the water of the sea

is salt,

to the
.

word denoting
is
is

may add

and say

#^^^&^&y"7^5(?)?5JD
it

because salt

not the nominative to the verb,

the nominative.

only qualifies the water of the sea

which

But

if

wish

to state that there is salt

water

in the
it's

sea, the
;

sentence refers not to the essence or quality of the water/ but to

therefore without adding "A* I should say

existence

#^x>^ S*Kf*^g^J&*kP
but

W esay

^^5x^S^boex)'5r(^f^"7T ^)?^
assert that

T!

those flowers are fragrant,

when

we merely

there

is

fragrance in flowers

we

say

490

Besides converting substantives and adjectives into adverbs, "5^

to

when added
(QS5

them may denote

resemblance, similitude, &c. &J"&sSa3er^f53o-)-uTif mountains be viewed

^C^^ex3^^^5Sbo"7^e5^^^e^?5^p
tance, they appear
like

from

dis-

smoke.

491

The

infinitive ~5~%

added to the pronoun

of his

IT^,

also represents the,

English

expressions spontaneously, to die voluntarily by eating poison,if I wish to ascertain whether he died of any
disease, or of his

own

accord', for example, supposing a person

own

accord,! should say in f^>"^D ~^^S'^S\'^ , I or might

t>

T>

also say

is

liable

to equivocation, 'for
it

besides

meaning spontaneously in
that

contradistinction to forcibly,

may

likewise signify

he himself died in

contradistinction to any #thcr person,

191
is

Sometimes the past verbal

adverb
;

participle or infinitive of a verb

used as an 492

thus,
the
root

from

&5b^o

to turn... -..comes
fo

ts5bX

O rw8A
or35b$

again.

return

&^

again.

to fill

)o-c^>....oro&

muc h.

The

following Sanscrit particles cannot properly be termed adverbs,but they 493

enter so frequently into the composition of

^^)55b^words

that

some notice of
few observati-

them seems
ons which
I

to

be necessary

and

know not

that I can offer the

have to make respecting them in a more appropriate place.

They

are prefixes
derivation.

compounded with substantives, adjectives, or verbs of Sanscrit

denotes excess
i

as^r* sis-Joy,

\^j

r>&~

excess of joy,

$$xx>

wealth,

oOi

c^odS&o great wealth.

is

a privative implying opposition, reverse

as

Jct5oS&>

victory,

SJT^rc

bsSw defeat.
is

also a

privative

as

s&e~ fame,

f>Sos2)e-

infamy,

ctfbs$ix>

victory,

>X5JcCo>:xD
is

defeat, ^r^sSixD money, ^>'&?$&>C'&>

apoor man.
;

an incrementive denoting also goodness, or connexion

as
X>

adored,

<3s5b--&>cb

ivell

adored,

-sr*&x>

declamation,

argumental dispute.
r^>

signifies

after,

near, each,

every,

as

"cS&raS&o going,

following,

>>>x>

garden,

9f&^f5xx> ^ear a garden,

^5f&)&?0c6oo every day.

>'

is

privative,
;

meaning
i

also

below, as '^S'raS&D going,

rtfo?w
;

descending

^eS"^

m^

t9^?5"ef S5w i e ;j;

^cn>?55xo

honor,

dishonor.
are,

privatives,

meaning
;

also ^om^/ through, the whole

as,

juiceless

y'TT

;S5bs5:x)

village,

^\s^^

s"S5boc 2^ba /

man

through a village

>J|S$;x>

gn'yen,

^fiff"_^^^uwi

altogether.

192
>cJ
>

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
ill}

bad, reverse; as,

j3^S$x> business,

passable)

&Xe-S&o

2&3&k_Sr3Soo bad business

impassable.
;

signifies excess,

variety, badness

it

also

denotes opposition

as

victory, victory-, S)^^x> manner or method, S^SoSSco various methods; form, )&>^Soix> deformity ; "ST^S&o

S&ctfbsSbo a $rea

talking,

>-r>&S&D a quarrel; ZbvzSx) fiUh, S)55be)S5oo^ M nVy. signifies as ya?- a;?, from, every where ; as, ^5o^55oo

as/ar as /fo
<0

ewa*
;

SCbcn>o^x)

Me

ewe?,

3oes5oo

roo^, ?35&>croo55;x)y>-<7m <Ae roof.

excess, within

as

sS-^r^Sco
;

torturing,

^oO^tS'^^o

killing.

means
any thing
in
;

above, excess

as,

^c &&> sitting, ^"^C^bofo^b

ybo^ over.
is

silting

upon

^n>^^

a/oo/, ^9^^^)

most Sanscrit words adopted into Teloogoo

much, beyond moderation
;
;

mere expletive.
sweet,

means
very sweet

as,

3SDcj>&s5cxD

so

limit,

^59"Se;^c

beyond the limit;

&&2^&$Zxx>
>

eating immoderately.

good, well
sition,
<5>

as,

So^S^o a

n>a</,

io3o3^S^o

good road

/fcrasSbo^e dispo-

JoD^o?93^M a good disposition or temper.

;

denotes wp, beyond

as

^^^> held,
l3e;
/z'?z7,

&&\$$S)X> held up
beyond the
before the

~
;

moving,

GsTjT'jS'Sxx) r i 5z'/j^r

,-

^"S^osSw
3&>^3$M

limit.

before;
SMW,

as

S^sp^M a

/ace,
sz/w.

face

^e e5f)^r>^g^xD fo/bre

^/

again, in return, back, each, opposite,

in exchange, toivards

as

a garden,
S&tf

<i&Z>x>

each garden
;

5S5~3~#<&>o kindness,
$ /

\&.&>
defendant;
Vishnoo,

a return

of kindness

^R

a complainant,
5bo

8'5yS a
;

toivards the sun

S)SSpqg)

a second Vishnoo.
So8
signifies we//';
as,

Ser

-t5'(S'

consideration,

XffZU^-Xtf considering

well, deep reflexion

;$>$>

trial,

SoQ'o

^?5 ^g//

nW.

^S3 near

as

r?^

;55bJ5bo

a country,

l55(~7Vj 55bs5>D environs*

494

Conjunctions are seldom used in

Teloogoo
is

works on science, whei;e a chain of reasoning

they are necessary chiefly in required for the elucidation of

OF SYNTAX,
some
position
;

193

but

in short

detached maxims regarding moral conduct, and in

literature, the

poetical compositions,

which form the principal part of Teloogoo

frequent use of conjunctions would destroy that simplicity and elegant conciseness of phrase, which
is

the great characteristic of the language.

In the superior

dialect, <3&> is equivalent to the

English conjunction
or

and, 495

but

it is

added only

to

words ending

"
in

This particle being

is

included in the class of words termed drootuprucrootica,

liable to
to

all

the

changesmentioned
description.

in the

second chapter of this work as peculiar

in
is

wordsof that

If the

word end
affix

any other vowel than those abovementioned,

added
-

the drootuprucrootica
conjunction

<&

to

it,

instead of

cSSx>,

to express the
bullock,

and;

thus,

~^ <sc*&>
^
-

^^^^^S^cJ&o
^^are added to
to

a carriage, a

and a

sheep.

In the
~*
;

common
-

'

dialect

^L
is

or

words ending

in

5 or

496

and ?&

fSx^ or f&rfo^ to words in any other terminations, to express our

conjunction and; r&^however

seldom affixed
5

any nouns except

it

to those in
9
;

O; S^if affixed

to a

word ending in long requires

to

be shortened into

and

>->>^as well

as^-^^^always lengthen
woccS^-rt^S^ 2T7V
;

the final vowel of the

$-tF>ti)&>
C

word

to

which
a.

"T

they are affixed; thus, i^cfifc-fg&jfc^

whip, and a stick;

|^&;&^ a
cart

staff,

^)^

the.

and

the.

carriage

are

in

good

order

Tro$&ffr^w,& <

ew&

jfr^c*&a<5

SSw

! 3 8 Rama and
the

Lutchmana fought.
final

terminational emphasis,

or the lengthening of
;

vowel,

is

also

equivalent to the conjunction

stick
>

as

^cOoC

""#-F "lb
13

staff,

whip,
55

and a

"^tfer*

ok^fo

ocr

;6<3Sx>e>J

2oo"eccxr^
are
all

Z$x>txr*

P^ ^)'^

elephants, horses, camels,

and

cars

in the

army, cooo<&r

^*eoexr Sf*&3-

"5oex)

dr*oo

wS^J) houses, gardens, go-

downs, and lands, are sold by auction'

The abovementioned

particles

which are equivalent

to the

conjunction and 497

;

may be affixed to

all,

to any, or to

case last mentioned, the final

none of the objects enumerated but in the vowel must be lengthened, or pronounced with
<

emphasis

thus "^cfo&^TT*

<o>^

tri&iife&>^&$00'69
25

^i^OSto

or

194

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
or

o-

eo

1 and my friend went

to Trevatoor*

498

When we

wish particularly to mark the nature, rather than the number of the
;

not saying, for example, two hills, but these are both hills objects enumerated,
then,

some of the

participles

abovementioned must be added to the word denolaid

ting the

number, or the emphasis must be

on the

last syllable of it
ro
-

thus,

&&7^&X^&fc&&&$^&&~8o2fcl&~ ^Qr
both mountains that appear yonder like smoke
;

~32&3"
said

o3e>3 those are

e>3 it

if

we

~3o3o i^oS*

would mean that there are two mountains, not that

both are mountains.

participles

499

When we allude

to the

whole of any number of objects, some of the

abovementioned must

be added to the
;

word expressing the

were
to say I

object, not to the

word expressing the number

thus, if I

am wounded
I

in

one of
;

my

hands, one

is

not here a complete

number, because

have two hands

therefore, without adding the particles abovementioned, I

must say "ST^EuS"^

Sef^T^cXjoi^X) {S^OrSa

but

if

both

my

hands were wounded, then I must

add some of those

particles

to

the Teloogoo
;

word denoting hands

did not add
if I

thus,

lvrHgo^^e&oer^^r$^7rci5o9$boeA>c^S
it

for if I
:

^A,

here,

would be understood

that I

had more than two

thus also,

say

"ST

a>

e7^er^7^ex>^/&w^ew38~^_^ST*a
*&^
is

W j5>

Qur /lorses j-

ran ont O f my
;

stable, as

not added,
all

it is

understood that I have yet more horses

I

for if these

four were

that belonged to me, then

should have added

r^3

^, and

said

60

600

>Q

and

its

synonymous

particles

abovementioned often represent the English

this also
is

words
added

also, even

&c

thus,

c cxw^'sr a

mine.
follow,

Hence,
it

if

^ be
the

to the

word ~^)'3 one

;

thing,

and a negation

expresses

English word nothing thus ST^fr^iScSfclfc I will do nothing; in other words I will not do even one thing. These particles followed by a negation,
are likewise equivalent to our negatives neither^nor &c.
;

thus,

55bo-aa^"T*
are

jftflBCa^rgre^
any

it is

neither

good3 nor bad.

or

If these particks

added

to

interrogative

pronoun

adverb

beginning with the letter A, more

OF SYNTAX.
commonly
3a

185
j

written c3o,

they
:

denote

universality

thus, A-j^J*
J av>J

where

SSrSij&N every where

;

o^S^So

who
?

JS &d<&<2ll

Aow

cO&r^cSsJw^
is

any how, at any rate

case

o^^^tvhen

^^^^>^always

Sec.

This

also

the

when

these particles are added to the past relative participles of verbs, with

B an interrogative pronoun prefixed; thus, TTe i!&^|^^^o&~sr <&?&^ where-

soever

he

may

be,

"53^<&ci^^\i3'y73^^<&^
that in
this

howsoever he
the
final
<$

may

write,

&c.

It will

ba observed
is

construction

of the past

relative participle

lengthened
list

to

"*3".

The

following

is

of

the most

common
/-as

interjections

inTeloogoo.

501

express
;

53c&J-o\

&c
a ias
/

...
|

pain, grief, or compas- <

$&~Jb

73-0^5

his

tj??

^ m,^..
j

.......

...>
or

ah

how

{fortunate have

been to meet you*

/-as

or

Vv^o^wOo-'
! the
is

pshaw
a

go

\.

cSo

pshaw

fellow

rascal.

.praise, excellence

j v

Sb^otfXg
clever

^"^y coo oooe^ 5cb c?v' o3~2S6 bravo 2boCX&3 5^2fc br

how

and

expert expert he

is> is-

**
,

hush

! silence !

( <

^J&SocCo^OiS
such a noise*

hush

do not make

admiration

(as

^^^oo^ ~i$
!

how

de-

*)lightful

how charming

In Teloogoo there are three

*~
all

final significant letters,

which may be added

to

502

words
"*

and
"""*

to denote interrogation, namely to mark emphasis.

;

to express

doubt or ignorance,

is

bs purely interrogative, and should always

is

affixed

to the

word

503

denoting the object respecting which the question

aaked, For example,

196

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
may wish
to ascertain

In crossquestioning a witness, a person

whether he did,
:

or did not go to the house of the complainant on a certain day

in this case

he

would ask, go
last

&^)ooo;5 53&-^- S^^^^aowoeSis^cxx)-^-^

to the

did you
to

Sunday
place,
s

house of the complainant

but

if

he knew that he went

some

and

wished to

ascertain particularly
this case
it

whether

it

was

to

the

complainant'
*r*
(

house or not, in

he would ask &^yZF*aNt$fe$& ^r^Sxx)

to the

J&^a<^o<^^S^cco'sro 3) Was

house of the complainant that

you went last Sunday'? Supposing he house of the complainant,

is

aware that the witness went to the

ascertain

but

wishes to

the

precise

day,

he

would

in that case ask,

^^oootfa"^tf ^7^T^^aooooe3S^<>T3^eg)
that

Was

it

on Sunday

last,

you went

to the

comqlainanf

house

Again he

might have learned that some one went be desirous to ascertain whether
ask &
went
STD
it

to the

house in question, but might

not,

was the witness or

he should then
it

^ooo^e3a"53^5'sSoo7c^3&5r^&cxx)0^^pooTT ^) was

you

that

to the

that to .words

complainant' s house last Sunday ? It is however to be observed which are already of an interrogative nature, such as the
letter <^,

pronouns beginning with the

"

more commonly

written o3o^ the

significant

lelter

is

never added.
particular

504

denotes

ignorance or doubt, and must be added to the

are ignorant, or of which doubt
is

word
:

expressing that of which we

instance, supposing
I

entertained

for

am

in

doubt whether you have, or have not given

I

me

money

to the affirmation
:

you have given

but
if

am

and say ^q^lT certain of having received some money

it

add the particle

from you, and

am

in

doubt respecting the quantity, not recollecting whether

c

was Fanams, or Pagodas that you gave me, then the

the verb, because I have

must not be added

;

to

no doubt but you gave something

it

must be added

both to the word expressing Fanams and to that denoting Pagodas, because
I stand in doubt respecting both,
if I

fe^TT"&^^er*tf T^er^opo^T^qg)
to the

jagain,

am aware

both of the payment, and of the amount, and only doubt whether

you gave it to me, or to some one else, then I add the to me fc^T^S^^S'wax^-sr^: lastly, if I am certain

word denoting
myself received

that

OF SYNTAX.
the money, but

197
it

am

in

doubt whether

I received

then the

from you, or from another,

^). In this

is

added to the word thou &

^J'l^^e^^ex) ow-O^^r
is

manner, the peculiar object of doubt or interrogation

in

at

once clearly defined

Teloogoo.

The
in
5,

particle

added

to the

common
affix
it

conditional form of the verb ending

505

with the drootuprucrootica

if,

becomes

S"

and represents our

phrases but

.on the contrary, should

-

&c. &e. thus, SS&e-S&o&QcSoS's^li

23&>ex>s3o<i&>5b

&-^&d^~&^K&>vol&spx)& sfco&C&Sb
;

If it does

not rain the people will suffer severely

but if

it

rains they will be happy.

In Teloogoo there are

many

interrogatives, especially
,

among

the pronouns,

506

which commence with the

So who?

letter

or as

it is

J&r* how?
is

>&j-% where? &c.

if

commonly

written c^o; thus, <^oS

be added to these words the

interrogation
asks another

converted into an affirmation of ignorance or doubt.

A
f^

person

9^r_2c^oJ55b
in doubt icho

who

is there

the answer

may be ^S^S
we say

Ida

not
3*

know, or

am

lie is.

In the same manner,

"sr2$bc&3?f
<S

*^~ I do

not know, or

am in doubt where he is,

not

^^^^^5^,
to

.^-^^T^Jo

some people
r

whom I do

know are

sleeping here.
is

&

is

used to express emphasis, and

added

any word on which particular

as the significant letters

507

stress is intended to be laid, nearly in the

same manner

and

r>r

*; thus,

l^^^tf^^T^^^So^^iJ'^^^^^ call the

with us that day to the garden;
G ~srCjSb3&'<>3~ c&ro/fov C 3s

eery

man who came

3)8

he

is

indeed a worthy man, wherefore did you strike

S)

him? ^^)

thou in particular art

a patient man, why

Zfc
is

didst thou quart-el with

him?

co?&^V^cO at the very time you went to the fort 1 came here. This particle also used when we wish to select one out of many objects; for instance, supmany
ripe

posing that theye are

is
I

mdngoes upon a

tree

from which the gardener

plucking them, and that I ask for one, but that he throws
did not want,
I

down another which

mangoe

reject

it,

and pointing with

my finger to

the particular

198

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
x>

which 1 wanted, say alS^jj 3 ~3

not say this
if

C ut

and throw me
the tree.

this

very one.

could

there were only one

"*

mangoe on

508

The

final significant affix

in the latter part of a sentence, in the former part of

it,

preceded by

the final significant letter

have the correspondence

of the English as and so;, thus,

as you directed, so have

cO !0

done

as you said, so have

I written.

509

v&

the negative verbal participle derived from ~&&> the negative aorist of
;

the root ^ew/fo signifies without

and

"S"

the negative verbal participle

;

derived from

"S"

^ the negative aorist of the root &$) signifies besides

without

thus,

Wci^^MOJlj^,j^^o;&ox>o#A<^^;Sb
>0

arms

it

is

impossible
besides

to

conquer

enemies-,

^og>e5
is

i3ex>~r

'5

vr)

'^_s5K)^ooe^q^)?^a

houses

and gardens how much

GSOP

there in ready

cash? Both

^"

and

by

the addition of

the infinitive of the root oso^So to be frequently

become

"32oo3 or 1TD 3oo3

without any alteration in their meaning.

? It

510
first

^oo

-,

means why

may be

placed either before or after a verb

it's

if

placed
;

the verb' agrees in person, number, and gender with

><0

nominative

thus,

why

did I look? o3^x&n> 2)73^0^0 why did he look?

look?

o&O
it

why did they

But

if

this particle

follows

the verb
<

13

takes placed in the infinitive, which, being a drootuprucrootica,

n before the

&of<&^, and

it

is

thus used promiscuously for

T

every person, number, or

did I, he, or they look?
it

gender; thus, coi&'SP'CJgb or 5y5b-ur

>^o
.

why

"^^>fcq^-SP>5ba &c.
come, go,
fyc.

-CPlSoS^o & c w ]iy

did I, thou, they, she, or

$c.

?
S3

S0?5?5>

or

^^^^
if

t,

the forms of the root

&$)

denoting although

It

thou, he,

fyc.

become,

placed at the
<

commencement
>

of a sentence, represent

the English
is

word

nevertheless; SDr^S5 ^^3i^^"53^ 2^b^^b^)H~2Sb nevertheless he

clever

man.

But

if

either of these phrases

will

is

placed after two or

more

words

in the

same sentence, it

have the

effect of the disjunctive

conjunctions

OF SYNTAX.
either, or
;

199

thus,

we

say

# tfloJ
The same
particles if not repeated, but following
;

^0o<& or 7-a</y money'

one

word only in a sentence

ffioemeat
least

signify at least

thus,^^^^^^oao^^^^cooS)^o-J5b

ten

Pagodas.

Lastly, if any of these phrases are added to

<J

interrogatives beginning with the letters

<^k,

or

\ more commonly written c3o O r

they give such words a peculiar signification which will be best under-

stood by the following

examples; o^&ff
soever;

>3

in

what manner

^S)cft'13or555^

$3!$^ in what manner

eJS5^<5&

^j^
soever
:

hoto ? c^&jtfSr^eSilO^ h ow

soever-,

when?

^^

*&&) when

the

power

of these phrases differs

essentially

from the power of

<&^

&c.

added

to similar

words
of all,
;

both imply
in-

universality, but these phrases restrict the

meaning

to one

^^ &c.

clude all collectively

thus,

*f^3k*&

always, at every time

^^J^f^^^i
where

K^

at

what time
;

soever

*
;

&

^ ^ ^~p^S5\&3^;^ &&>(&>^every where,

soever

^^^^^ every

one,

^^"^.^^S^^A. whosoever.
"w^used,

Besides the two senses in which

the aorist of the root

t)^).

oc^b

ej^b

..

l^

"^Sb,

512

^ew^o

is

as explained in rules
is

441 and 444,

the neuter of the third person singular

1st, placed after a

used in two other senses.

nominative of any of the three persons and the infinative of

with
:

a verb,

it is

a simple negative participle denying the action of the verb,

reference to the past time

only; thus, ~$<& &c. "^ScCo

o&> I ^c.

did not do

this use of the third person neuter

must be distinguished from that of the whola

tense before mentioned

....I
......

thus,

cannot do ............... *'(&~:3>3&~>....I did not do.

:

Thou canst not do ....... .b&~ <3&~>....Thou

<

didst not do.

cannot do ............... src^b"ScOb <u&>He didnot do.

cannot do ............... "stoOol:&>..JFe didnotdo.

cannot do ............... S^5o'
:

r cBol5&>l 0M did not

do.

cannot do ...... . ..... "5T*

&l$c&~e&> They

did not do.

200
in the one case the

TELOOGOO GMAMMAB,
auxiliary ejr& &c. agrees with
;

it's

nominative in gender,

number, and person

2ndly.

in

the other v&>

is

indeclinable.
itself as a

&>

is

used independently by

simple negative particle

denying

existence, applicable to all persons,

without reference to any time, and

opposed

to "5^2^D

which denies

essence, quality

&c

the contrary of the

first is

the irregular third person singular of the affirmative aorist of the root
;

the contrary of the second

is

the word S'q)&>, the third person singular

If I
if

of the affirmative aorist of &$)

to become.

ask is
is

there
is

a house here

and the answer, enquire respecting existence,

there

one,

&&

if

not O-!&.

But
its

if

I see

something at a distance, and, doubtful not of its existence but of ~~

is

essence or quality, ask,

that

house,

the

answer,

if it is

not,

is

&>

if it is,

>&.

513

&$)c$j indeed

may be

considered to represent the English word yes, being

constantly used as an affirmative reply to questions of all kinds, and not restricted like its negative ~5~*> to a denial of essence or quality ; for example,

y es may be used

in

reply to any ofthe following interrogations.

he

has

returned

from

the country?
this

would rain be seasonable at

is this

time?
r

King
learn

virtuous

S^so^g-tf

&>,^ "Scte^'oO&^fS^-zy do you

D

desire

to

science?

S^J^"^^55bo^^5'5\e-s5w^5^g-7V
in your country ?

o8 S S"2r
<

have
"sro
;

you had abundance of rain

c^^rslsS

55boJ&>"^"S5^

reached the southern districts ? s5~s$boS5'^?575~ have the freshes ofthe Cauvery

514

^^C^&S^S^oScroSbCT^z's he your son ? Notwithstanding CS^jfo may thus be used

as a general affirmative, its use

;

is

properly confined to affirmations respecting quality or essence only

ask, is there rice in the house ? I enquire about the

thus, if I

existence

of

something,
say
if,

not respecting
'

its"

quality

therefore,

if

there

is,

although we may

9q)?&
seeing

yes, it will

be more correct to answer ^&>, or

it,

^)f^ a

there is

but

a basket with something'in

it is rice,

ask,

is

(hat rice in the basket ? 1

its

enquire resif

pecting the essence or quality of something, not regarding

fc9q)c& y es
\s

existence,and

^\ le

on ]y p ro'per answer

if it is

not,

OF SYNTAX.
Such
is

201
515

the use of these words

follows a

when used independently by themselves, but

when 5q)f&
it
is,

noun
be
:

in the

common

dialect,

it

does not signify yes or

it

but

it

will or

may
if

and

if

used in speaking of the present time,

is there ?
I

also

implies doubt; thus

it

to
is

my
the

question, what

they answer)cCx)?35:>^5);&

may
I

be rice

this

same

as

saying,
it is

cannot speak with certainty,

but

think, or have understood, that

is

rice.
if

The

particle

^>&

it

{$

said or
?

they say,

often used in this sense

is

thus,

I ask, is

Gooroomoorty here
not know, but

and

the answer

that he is gone home.

may

they say used in speaking of any future event, the word imply either doubt or certainty for example, should I ask "5T<&>

oooo&3isfrcxx>*r>5i6o this means, 1 do

When

-iS'^^)r o"to~Sex)?6er
will he
it

^^b^e-^^-sr'
Teloogoo,

if

he take pains

and read,

become well versed

in

and

am answered

<v>S5b$OE~*q5)rvX>

means

either that he will certainly become well versed in

well versed in Teloogoo
:

Teloogoo, or that he

may perhaps become

a prevaricating witness
this

may

often

attempt to shelter himself under the equivocal meaning of

word.

This phrase represents the English word

if you
give
it,

otherwise',

S^5b7^$^axTl^o9

516

'tis

well,

v&8^&&vc&^-r^&M^o^7^\&>
It consists

otherwise, I will take

it

forcibly.

of the negative verbal participle

t*)fc }

u*

derived from

e><& the negative aorist of

prefixed to the conditi-

onal form of the verb &*$) to go, used here merely as an expletive.
eo

These words imply a

case,

term, or

limit,

they are generally used in the dative

;

517

and often with the conjunction

until;
as

^^
;

thus, 55<5o or Sfrtf0&^ and

or

Sfc^&tf)^ signify

-&>X&c&8$;>

or

tf

tf&jfc^

sfoko

or

$$ may also be used in SfetoJ&tf^ tive; thus, ^tftfer*-sr^^-&fc 7 never saw him m
until this hour, hitherto

the local abla-

this

me

wo
.

say also
that
;

^o^^>^)o

this

muck> thus far

t

Woff sfo4a3&

that mltch) Qs faj

^o^^D^wSo

/tow

muc f

how far

$c>

,.
oj

This word

Applies to

all

computation, whether by number, weight,

26

202
measure
;

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
thus,
is

o>r*s*o^er3o^tfg^o&3$w what quantity

this field!

of grain

produced in

o^wo-A^Sb^oo&Sfc-'^S&D
tfjS&o

what
this

is

the

iveightof this gold!

oaj^&c^^^otfS&ra
o x>

how much
f,s5bo

is

rice?

how long?

~3S*ex>^c^ooe$'5&n>i
6

how broad?
deep ?
T

how high

? er' <>&>c3oo&';&r9
;

^.^oo how

The

word c^ootf alone

is

also

used in the same sense

.

thus, cxxro)o'A >5b63oO(5' .

as

cocr^tfe;$wc^oo&->b'4)ako&' & c but

collective

so far
;

regards

number, the

pronouns often represent c&>o

?

&c.

thus,
?

many persons
years
?

tf^'S'eWcSoS^ fow; many fanams

519

The

participle

"S"

from the root &$)

to

become, according

to

circum;

stances represents the English words either, or, unless, only, except, although
as

lJ'<fej^o^j^S^^^"rD A^^^^7ro

fe^^axj

wr ite

either
this

on cadjans, or
business

on paper;

^&or^l^^|j"^TSPk)oxroS-g^"3^&
come here;
to

cannot

be effected, unless he

o*^^j^^&~i"5^-sr^C;&
him
;

give this book to you only, not

business cannot be well done except by

him

although you push him by the neck, he will not go. It will here be observed that

when ~^^>
into

follows words belonging to the class drootuprucrootica

it is

changed

"7^$
5
.

and when

it

means

either^ or, or although,

the final

is

lengthened

into

PPE ND
OF NUMBERS.
1st.

IX.

CARDINAL NUMBERS.
may,
like

The

cardinal numbers in Teloogoo,

adjectives,
:

be prefixed

to

substantives, or like nouns, be used independently

by themselves

in either state,
is

each of them, except the

masculine
cardinals

first,

has two forms; of which one

to

applicable 'to

or feminine,

the

other

neuter objects.

1 shall give the neuter

first,

as the others are derived

from them.
Neuter Name.

English Figure.
1

Teloogoo Figure.

....................................

2 .................................... -5>
3
>t

................................. 3

4 .................................... b"
5 ....................................

&
-

6 ....................................
7 .................................... ^

8 .................................... o~ 9 .................................... F~

10 ................................... oo
11 ................................... oo

12 ......... , .......

.................

o_s

13 .................................... 03

14 ......
15..

<.

.............................

otf

^
English Fiyure.

APPENDIX.
Neuter Name.

Ttlooyoo Fiyure.

16 ....................................

o_

..................................
__

17 ..................................... o 18 ....................
19... ........ . ........................

.................................... Soft

or ........................... *

20 .................................... _so ...................... ; 30 .................................... 3o

40 .................................... tfo 50 .................................... tfo

60 ....................................

-0

70 .................................... ^o ...................... 80 ..................................... 0~o..... 90 ...............

.

.................... F"o ...... . ...........

'.

100 ........................
200. ...............
>

<~>oo

................

..................

_9oo
3oo

300 .............

.....................

400
500
600 ........................ 700 ..............
,

-00
00

..........

800 ................................... <J~oo

900 .................................. f~oo

1,000 .................................. oooo
10,000 .................... ................... ooooo
100,000 ................... . ............ oooooo
10,000,000 ............................ oooooooo

and feminine genders are derived from the foregoing neuters in the following manner. The numeral &>$ one, when used as an adjective, is the same for all genders
to the masculine
:

The forms common

wlieu used as a substantive,

it

has a separate form for each gender

viz,

TELOOGOO
for the neuter,

till

AM MAR.
and 2o'13
fur

O
the feminine.

2o5fcb

for

the

masculine,

Tin-

neuter
i

oO<5&> two,

whether

used as
;

an

adjective, or as a substantive,

becomes

n the masculine and feminine

the neuter
all

3&orob

three

becomes S&og>5b,
whether
used

four
substantively
particle

becomes tfexj^Sb,
or adjectively,
.

and

the other neuters,

or

become masculine
Jive ,

feminine
six,

by

affixing the

Sfcoa
Sec-

tnuSj

ef>

ooo>55boa

Seso55boa

<x><5&S5boa

8even

&c. &c.

la addition

to these

forms,

the

neuter numbers

noted below admit, in the

masculine and feminine gender, of some irregular forms

six may
'

in the masculine"

and

feminine' form become.

t5ftX3^)2x) or

seven ......................... . .......................... oi&q5)?o or

eight ..............................
.

a .......... nine ....................................

ten
........ twelve

.fourteen

................................................

The

neuter cardinals
as substantives,

~3o2sb

^
in

0}

S&cro&o Mree,

and

?5crefX3
.

hundred,
_

when used

make

in

the singular inflexion ~3o&3

3&xr$3

respectively,

and are
masculine
1st

declined
2o?fk_C<Sb

the

same manner as the

declined
&>?fk_~l
like

irregular

noun

the

one

is

the regular
y

nouns of the
with
all

declension, the feminine

and the neuter 2o^_63 one

other cardinal numbers, when used as substantives are declined according

;

to the rules for the third declension

except masculines and feminines ending in

/^o5b,

which

in

the singular inflexion

change that termination into

to

^9

thus,

nomi native rSex^Sb four,

2d.

inflexion ?^ex)^o8, dative r^ex)^b8

four

&c- &c.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.
changing
dialect,

The

ordinals are formed by

inio

the

final

vowel of the neuter cardinal

numbers

^^

in

the superior

and into

iu the

common^

dialect,

4
the
in
first

APPENDIX.
cardinal

number excepted, which

in the cardinal

form, becomes

both dialects, as shewn below.

Neuter cardinal

Ordinal number.
superior dialect.

number.

common

dialect.

first.

........
.

second-

'

---- third.

sr o ex>X';5' .............. ^ex>

K* ......... fourth.
.fifth.

e>ooo> .............

<i5>coo&;5

.............. 9000.5^ ........

...............

&

............. seventh.

a.
6
<S

Soft ................. Soao^bSS" ..............

^ 53* ............

tenth.

3d.

FRACTIONS.
to a

The

subdivision of unity

is

carried

great

extent, in

common

practice,

among the peopleof Telingana. Their fractions descend by fours; in the same manner that our decimal fractions descend by tens, and the four thousand and
ninety sixth part of an integer often occurs in a

common Teloogoo
Name.

account.

The

following table exhibits the subdivisions of an unit.

Teloogoo Figure.

English Figure.
i

or

5-

or

APPENDIX.
T?
3

TTe

or

It will

be perceived that the subdivision of an unit into fourths

lines,

is

marked by
either case,

perpendicular
the

and that into sixteenths by horizontal

lines

in

number

of these lines corresponds with the

number
| (or
)

of fractional
;

par{$
1

in-

tended to be represented.
(or |)
;

Thus,
i

is
|

is

and l^ |

is

T T,

^ TT>
of
is

and

*-'

fV

an ^

n tne further subdivision of unity,

the

number

fractional parts

fractions we term the numerator) (which in English vulgar

denoted, in the same manner, by a corresponding

number

of lines, alternately

perpendicular and horizontal.

The

of parts into which the integer itself particular kind

is

is

divided,

which

in

our vulgar fractions

the

called

the

denominator,

is

marked

in

Teloogoo,

much

in

same way

as

in

our decimal fractions; namely, by

%

the distance of the

thus,

perpendicular and horizontal lines from the integer number;

1

ou^_

i-L{

I T_ TT
'

-5-^3-

and Tsh-'

^ w ^' nere ^ e observed that the lines next

to

the integer
sixty

are fourths, those a degree- further

fourths, next,

the right,

sixteenths,

then follow

two hundred and

fifty sixths,

and so on. But when fractions are written

is

separately from the integer number,

all

the denominator

marked by prefixing

to

the lines, except those of the

first

subdivision, a contraction

of the Teloogoo
;

word which expresses the

particular subdivision to

which the fraction belongs

6
as
S>

TELOOGOO GRAMMARfor
>($3Sbo

before the second subdivision,

for

"T&

before those of the

third subdivision, as specified in the foregoing table.

In accounts,

if

the whoje of one

subdivision

be wanting, the deficiency

lines
<~>

is

marked by
and

substituting for the perpendicular

,

the

mark 9

called

^v,
first

for the horizontal lines

or a

cypher

Thus,

2^-

MI TV T -STT tne

9 shews

that fourths are wanting, the second

9 denotes

that sixty fourths

fifty sixths.

are

o shews the deficiency of two hundred and wanting, and the

Accounts of money are kept
of these are represented in the
in

Pagodas or Rupees, and Fanams

as

the fractions
unit,

same manner

the fractions

of,

any other

but those of a Pagoda as far as sixty fourths, those of a Rupee as

far as a sixteenth,

and those of a Fanam

as far as quarters,

have names different from the general

fractions of an unit before specified.

The
9

fractions of a

Pagoda

as far as sixty fourths are respectively

named.

\fhs of a

Pagoda ...........

I or i ........ do ..............

i .......... do. ;

..........

TT ......... do .............
GJ

T\...or i.....do ............

*9^
*2

.....

tV .......... do .............. *l ............ do ................

A or 3V- ---do
those of a

...............

TV ............ do ...............

Rupee

as far as a sixteenth are called,

?ths of a

Rupee ............

T or

2-

..... do ..........

rV ...... do ..........

tfn>2__
termed,

and tho?e of a Fanam

a. far as quarters arc

APPENDIX.
|Ms
f or

of a fanam

^
5"

u\
L|

do
do

5~
|

In English

accounts, Pounds,

Shillings

and Pence are marked by the

letter

letters

1)

in

Teloogoo,

Pagodas are distinguished by the

,

^; Rupees by

the syllables &> or

^n>

and Fanams by

5"

prefixed to the integer

number.

OF MEASURES.
Measures, in Teloogoo called S&^oSSbD, are divided
SS8s5cn>r935oo -

into three
is

sorts

viz.

&"S3^

3"3*>

and

EO&XD.

\XjZxr*

The

first

that

by which the

quantity of grain

and
;

the

like

articles is ascertained,

measure of capacity
refers
to

the second,

that

which

relates

to

and may be termed the iveight ; and the third

the

measurement

of extent, or to the length, breadth, or width of any

thing.
1st.

OF

S56^cn>ras5bo

OR

THE MEASURES OF CAPACITY.

is

The chief measure

the largest of
three, or

of this kind
called

that
is

by

which grain

is

usually

measured,

which

is

and ^)^3, CO

marked thus 4\
figures,
*P
- -S) c.

If there be one, two,

more such measures, the numeral

thus,

Secis

are affixed to

the

4>,

and written

. sp

._s .

The $)& GO

divided

into as

twenty smaller measures, called ^J^^Swcw, which are named and marked
follows
:

sp

o
|

o
I

o
ip

o.

01 _o

o
sp

27

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
The 3xr>bo
marked
again
is

divided into four

^OiSfcfrwo

which

are

named

and

in the following

manner.

The

o-tfs&o i s divided into four

Snoo

thus,

is

subdivided into four $*e;oo

thus,

...........

The $*v

is

divided into four

^CX3

; '

thus,

2-

2rf.

O.F

"SJ?
1>

^^600

OR

WEIGHT.
is

The
to

greatest

Teloogoo weight

is

^3^50^ or a Candy which

equivalent

twenty Sfca>?6ex3 or maunds.

.

Every

SftraD/fo

contains eight
five

Every
Each ^^>
seer
is

^oo^- or

divided into quarters, which are marked thus,

"5

69'2S.vdb

"I o n

Every ^T
is

^)"^

contains two tf^&r'soe

O r ^osSwex), and each

equivalent to three c&er'ew.

3(7.

OF ,.:&* ra&o OR EXTENT.

is

The

greatest

measurement of extent

a c&crczs^Sxx),

more commonly termed

cosses.

355b3, which consists of four

So&^CX> or ^crfwo3, termed by us

1,000 ?So$5;5wex>.
.2

Each
do.

c&>

or S53b/to

is

equivalent to
.to

,o<s5ix)
.

do .....

...

... .^y^ex)
i

or fathoms.
.
.

do.

^ U(J

...,,. do

.to

.... 2 ,,

.K'cjp$ooX)

,or

APPENDIX.
Each...>v3
......... is

equivalent. ..to ......

2...3$xn>Sex> ............... or culits.

ftet.

..............

.do ......... to ....... U...^^b?6 .................. or

c

.......... do ......... to ........ 2..

.................... or

spans.

do... .&S&fo ............. .do ......... to ...... 12... zsofc ^sSboex> ........... or
do....
?S ................... do ......... to ....... 9....^oftosfs5boejo ........... or
............

inches.

do....*9o/6$fs$

do ......... to ........................................ one

of which consists of fifty Sootbexx

inch.

One

^^

has eight

^"^ew each

OF THE DIVISION OF TIME.

The people
divide what
to

of Telingana, following the astronomical system of the

infinity

Bramins,

they term the

of
;

time into four great ages, which they

these they denominate cfccoXs&Dew, or

suppose

be

in

constant

revolution

conjunctions

been calculated, by the Bramins, as ; periods, which seem to have the probable dates of some remote conjunctions of the heavenly bodies, which
assist

they assumed merely to

implicitly adopted

astronomical
real eras.

computations, but

which have been

by the vulgar as
is

The

first

of these four ages

is

named

^5c*&>X'3&o referring, apparently, to

at the

some conjunction which

for,

supposed to have taken place

&&

creation

the Supreme Being created the world in the according to the Hindoos,
It consists of

first

age of this name.

"ef.l^dCooXS&o,
.called,

1,728,000 years.
the

The second
or three

is

denominated
so

the

conjunction of

\j~&*

sacrificial fires,
is

* because the great sacrifice in which these

this period,

fires

are used

supposed to

have been introduced during

third
is

which contains 1,296,000 years.

of

The
next,

named TS^C^^cCwX^

compound

&

two and fc35tf the

* These
>O5boSbo

three fires
first is

are

severally

named

~A"T'S^~SoeCSxo -

<"$<!* "TO*

A^

and
celebrates

The

lighted, with particular ceremonies, in the west.

fire,

The person who

being
kept
alive

the

sacrifice is

considered particularly to preside over this

which

during

his

life, serves to light his funeral pile.

From

this
in

fire,
it

also,

the other two are lighted; one of them

deity
;

is

placed in the south, and offerings are

mnde

to

the

of Fire, to the
the other
is

manes

of the Pitris,

or certain progenitors of mankind, and to a few

offerings are

other

deities

placed in the east, and

all

made

in

it

to the principal deities presiding over the sacrifice,

and to

the other gods.

10

TELOOOOO GRAMMAR.
first, viz.
is

that which followed the two

the third

this

comprises 8,04,000 years.

of

The

fourth

or

present

age

known by
this

the

name

S^cJ&oXs&o, properl y
period
in the

signifying

vicious or sinful', to

age

they
If
is

assign a

of 4,32,000
fourth age be

6 are already years, of which 4,91 doubled, the number of those in

elapsed.

the

years
;

the
if

third

given

if

multiplied by three, the

the

length of the second

length of the first age.

is

found

and

multiplied by

four,

product

is

the

Besides

this

grand division of time,

another

common to all
it's

Hindoos, the people of the

Peninsula have

epoch which takes

name from an

ancient prince

named
78;

ro
''3

e)"sro

^ f^C^b
T>

Shalivahana, and commences about the year of Christ

is

the present year 1816

therefore the 1737-8 of this epoch.

It is said that

Shalivahana subdued Vikramarka

(Bikramajeet) whose era

is still

used

in the

north of

Hindoostan,

and

substituted his

own

era for

that of his

conquered
strarv

enemy.
or "J^o

The
a

vulgar derive the

name of Shalivahana from

and
"5TB ^-o?5

u
)

a heap of

certain kind

of

free,

a car

viz.

he whose car was a

heap^of straw or the

^o

tree.

In some

encounter with Vikramarka, say they,

Shalivahana was obliged to mount this

tree, or

heap of straw

but

all

traditions

are obscured in the most extravagant fables. respecting this prince,

The

people of Telingana class the years

giving to

of the two
sixty an

epochs above mentioned

appropriate name, as shewn

in cycles of sixty,

each of the

below.
.....is the ...... 1st year of each
cycle

......... is the-

-loth year of each cycle.

.................. do ......... 2d
..................... do... ...... 3d

do .........

^$tf

......... do ...... llth

do.

do ......... M3n-$~*r5 C....do ...... 12th do.

XJ

.........

do ......... 4th

do ......... i&&r*& ......... do ...... 13th do.

......... do ......... 5th

do .........

\3&
>#

......... do ...... 14th

do.

..

.............. do ......... 6th

do ......... S)s5p ............. do ...... I5th do.

do.. .......

..'. ............

do ......... 7th

^>ti> ..... do ...... 16th do.

..................... do ......... 8th

..: .................

do ........ .X>\^&> ......... do ...... 17th do. do ......... l^^rs..,

...... do ..... 18th

do ......... 9th

do-

APPENDIX.
is

11
is

the.t.lDHi yearofeach cycle

J^TT^^^f
oSsS'oX'

the

4ot!i

year of

i-aeh

cyi-1.-.

do
do,

l2oth

do do

do
do

41st do.

21st

IwS"

42d do.
43d
do.

do
do

22d

do.......^5&>g

do
do

23d

do

^TFtfra
3S^$?r;y>>
S3

44th do.
45th do.

3 ^8
3>c5
tf

do

24th do 25th do.

do
do

do

6^8

46th do.

do do
do
,

26th do
27th do 28th do
29th do

,ZjSSr&&
<J3?5o&
~?T><&

do...... 47th do.

do

48th do.

do
do

49th do.
50th do.
51st do.

do

#o
sboX$"

do
>

30th do
31st do

do do
do

do

-S^dCooJ
P>TS$e-

52d do.
53d do.
-.54th do.
. .

do

32d

do

do

33d do
34th do 35th do
36ih do 37th do
38th do

~&
CO

tfe

8
.

do
.do

^\^J &$^&
&>o&>lp

d'
do
;
.

.55th do.56th do.

SSsS'.

do.

do do

5b^5^-^6

do

57th do.
... .58th do.

do
>

X^?^ j[3 ^^
^cC5
years,

do

do ... .59th do.

do

39th do
these

do ... 60th do.

of the
cycle
of sixty, of
to

In Teloogoo, the whole of

Shalivahana, or
of
the

whether

Caleeyoogum, are calculated

according

the lunar

method of system, which appears to have been the most ancient

in India
;

computing time

and each

year consists
not from
full

of twelve lunar

months, reckoned from new

moon

to

new moon,

moon

to full

moon,

as

is

the

practice at

Benares.

The

ecliptic is divided into

twenty seven

Nutchatras

or

constellations,

each

12
containing
13' 20",

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
and every lunar month takes
is

it's

name from

the particular
full.

Nutchatra near which the moon

observed to be generally at the

the

The

following are the

names

of

lunar months,

and

their corresponding

Nutchatras.
Mouths,
Nutchatras.
.-O

#,-"fr"C
cO

^csSbo

p55(ob

The moon
month
derives

is

not

always
;

full

in

the particular Nutchatra from which the

that

it's

name
it.

but either in
is

Nutchatra, or in the one which

follows or precedes
in

This
three

the utmost extent of the variation; nevertheless,

whichever of the

the

moon

is

full,

the

name
full in

of the

month reman.: named

\t$j&ti.

unaltered.
SS"

The moon
&>&)> or

of the
in
is
"^ r

month ^_\&J may be

,

the Nutchatra
is

J?$

or in

but the
into

name
two

of the

month

always

^
r

Each lunar month

one
is

divided

portions termed

5<Mx3$w, of
the

which
dark

named 3o?f

or

$60
these

the bright

half, the other

^&

or wsSro?
c-Saew

half; and each

of

two portions

contains fifteen

which may be

termed lunar days.

The

bright fortnight
is

commences
or

with
1st,

the

new moon,

of which the

&^

or

lunar day

called

-&*&%

the

and

continues until

$)$&>

or the

APPENDIX.
full

13
same manner, with a

moon

the dark fortnight then begins, in

the 1st,

the

or

lunar day

named -p>S*CV3 O r \J
it's

and ends with &&r=-zrX>? O r the change, YJ

when the moon, by

thus,

conjunction with the sun, concludes the lunar month;

The bright half or increase

The dark half or decrease

of the moon, termed ^\^S a>F3
./

of the moon, named

SD^&S&D
or>

new moon.
second lunar day.
third.
.fourth.

-oS^^g^
)&05o

firs t

unar aay O f
second.
third.

the

dark

[fortnight,

e^SoOo
TS'^)9

.fourth.

.......

.jljlh.

o^o-CS&d,,,., .......,,,,.,. fifth.

sixth.

5xx
<6

sixth.

seventh.

SSSo

seventh.
eighth.

e-j

eighth.

e>XxSX>

ninth.
tenth.

tf^Sfc
25?f Sto

ninth.
tenth.

eleventh.
1

<~~&&'V

eleventh.

twelfth.

thirteenth.

T5^# y^^r3$
->ti*r$
e>;Scr>-5r#g

twelfth.
thirteenth.

.fourteenth.

.fourteenth.

.fullmoon.

...lunar

day

of the

[moon's change.

A 9^
Hindoos

or lunar day by no means corresponds with the solar day

it is

according to the

that period during which the

moon

travels

through twelve degrees

of her path,
midnight,

it

may commence

in the

morning, at noon, in the evening, or at

of
XGocSfcex),

and contains a

number

or

Teloogoo hours of 24

English minutes each, varying from 54 to 66 according to the length of the &$.

Although the lunar day

is

of variable length,

it's

subdivision,

the

Teloogoo

hour, docs not vary, but consists precisely of 24 English minutes.

The people

''

14
measure
there
is

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
this space of

time by an empty vessel of a certain size placed in water

the bottom of the vessel,

a small hole at

through which the water

is

is

allowed to enter; and the size both of the hole and of the vessel
that, if care

so proportioned,

be taken, the vessel sinks at the termination of every 24 English

minutes.

The orb
of these
is

of the

moon

is

divided into sixteen phases,

named

Jf^ex)

but as one
revolve

considered constant, and the other fifteen are supposed to

flowers on a
string, each

round
to a

it,

like a garland of

revolving

corresponds

>^ or lunar day.

it

Twelve lunations form a lunar year, but

to

requires only about

354

solar

days

complete

this

period
1 1

so that the lunar falls behind the solar year (of 365 solar

days) more than

solar days every lunar year.

To

adjust the

lunar
is

time to

the solar computation intercalary months

assigning to each of the lunar

are inserted,

and

this

regulated by

months a particular corresponding sign of the

zodiac as explained below.

months.

Corresponding sign of the zodiac.

......

,.SSbo.

......

sk&S&o ............

.Aries.

Taurus.
G
. .

..Gemini.

;5bo .............................. g'^e-kg'sSbo ..................

Cancer.
Leo.

Virgo.

Libra.
Scorpio.
Sagittarius.

Capricornus.

Aquarius.
.

.Pisces.

So

often as the sun remains in the

same sign of the zodiac during (wo

or days

of the moon's change, the

month

to

which the

last

APPENDIX.
belongs
is

15
considered

named

twice over
is

it

is

first

$3' or intercalary,
it's

and after being completed

for

reckoned over again, under

proper name;
^>S6cn''SP>K5(?

example, supposing t^ c sun to have entered the sign Aries on

the last lunar day of the lunar

month

^
the

\&j&x>,

and

to

continue in the same sign

during

5f>^rT>^n>

^C

the last lunar day

of the next lunar

first

month ^_ "^^sSbo,
fcPbF*'Sf
}
p

the lunar

month intervening between

or

and the
n
~j&_

last

*<$g would
as
it

be termed <jf>$"13_ tf^s&o

intercalated

~^ ^o^x)

and so soon

expired, 13_ "'JT'^S&o proper would

commece anew.

within the space of one year

twice.

In the course of a certain number of years, two intercalary months occur in other words, two months are reckoned over
;

In

this case,
ffie

the

proper month intervening between the two

is

is

called

&cSoS>b-<v>Sw

was tea month, and

entirely

omitted from account.

In

every intercalary lunar month the sun does not enter into a
zodiac
;

new

sign of the

in the course of the

wasted month, he enters into two

j

signs.

The new moon

13
i

or ^~3QSto

n the

bright

fortnight

of

the

lunar

month

,o&o is the first

^^

or

commencement of

the lunar year.

Besides the lunar years, months, and days, the people of Telingana use that subdivision of solar time which we term the week, the days of which they reckon

from sun
Jupiter,
t

rise to

sun

rise,

and name

after

the Sun, f

Moon, Mars, Mercury,

Venus and Sajurn,

in the following

manner.
of the Planets, as enumerated in

I subjoin for the information of

the reader a

list

Teloogoo

Books.

the Sun-

tfo

2&>

C#b

the

Moonthe son

Mars,

of the earth.
of the moon by
the

Mercury,

the son

Hyades-

Jupiter, son of

Anger asa one of

the seven great sages,

and

the

Venus, the son of Bhrigu,

Saturn, the offspring

and

\preceptor of the gods. the preceptor of the giants-

of

the

sun by Ctfhayu shade.

Son of Sinhikttjtke moon's ascending node,reckoned the 8th planet.

,....v.

The moons descending

28

node, reckoned the 9th planet.

*

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.

tf^tfw .............. Sunday.

-tS"o

\&,-zrtfx> ......... Monday.

......

Tuesday.

Wednesday.
Thursday.
Friday.
.

........

Saturday.

In a few of the most southern

districts, the

people of Telingaha, from their

their solar

intercourse with the inhabitants of the

Tamil Country, have adopted

of which, therefore, some, brief notice seems to be computation of the year,

necessary.

Every Tamil
follows
:

solar year

has

twelve ~3oex>

or months, which

are

named

as

April.

^3
^Qsr

............ .........

October.

May.
.June.
.July.

.................... November.

December.
coo .......
.

............. January.]

.August.
..September.

February.

March.
the

The Tamil

calendar
;

is

not adjusted by intercalary da*js according to

European method

these months, therefore, do, not correspond entirely with

the

English months by which they are represented.

the sun's entrance into Aries, and each

The Tamil
*

year commences on*

as

month properly contains

many
civil

days,
solar

and fractional parts of a day,

as the

sun remains in each sign.

at

The

month, however, always commences

rise in the

sun

rise,

and continues

until the first

sun

following

month

and

to dispose of the fractional parts of a

day, the

A star is termed ............. ....... ...... ............... <xi<i A planet ................ ................. ........... ..... ..... yX
.

.'.

An

eclipse

........... ......

......

........

^C.

3
\

APPENDIX.
following computation
is

17
sign

adopted.

If the

sim should enler a new

is

of

the

Zodiac between sun

month

but

if

and midnight, the day of his entrance he enters a new sign between midnight and sun
rise

the

first

of the

rise,

the

month

commences

at the following

sun

rise.
is

a?fc$x> or solar
is

day of 24 English hours

to

divided
:

into

each of whidh

equivalent
hours,

twenty four

minutes

seven

sixty X<&cOoex>

X&cSbex)

and a
Sanscrit

half, or three English

make one ^~^x>

the corruption

of

the

word

The

solar year is

also divided into

it

two

9cOorS^xiex>, each of

which

consists

of six solar months;

of two

has also six *2^X) e>q)eA3 or seasons, each of which consists

>3>o?$ bdX)$)$)
(

months

viz.

the

spring comprehending

^i^ and
j

SS"cX$cne^,

\\ &

'toCX3Sb3>) the hot season

J

comprizing
1

W$

and W&, S'&e-'WM &b^)

the

the rainy season including

&>?% and

"eotf&r*?!

$f#2^<i&q)
(

sultry

season
season

comprehending
containing

9$)^

and "S^Ss"!,
,

~ir

o o5boe

&XV)|&>q)

the

winter

S&~X&-0 and ~^_ cxx> and

%$&'&&&) the
it

cold season

compre-

hending 55ir$ and SSo/^o^.

When
SoTSqeX)
;

day
thus

is

used in contradistinction to night

<5&

is

expressed in Teloogoo by
nighf.

T5^i^^w-'aS>"?3~
is

he read day

and

day of four
but
these

and twenty hours

terms are not synonymous

expressed by a?5s^
;

the

words

&$x>
a

or "Sj^tfs&D,

implies

simply
thus,

day,

without reference

either to the date or the day of the

week;
is

&&t5s$;o~^' 55^73-^ ?fo

week only;
to set out for

1 will come
for instance,
>

after ten

days;

so^S'^bo

of the applicable to the day

were I
I

to ask,

on what day of the week you intend

.Combaconum,
and
if

should say in Teloogoo

use

instead of i^SsSbo, I were to

as&>,

this

instance, the person

to

meant addressed would not understand that the day of the week was
expressed.

be

de&S-g^osSbo or

~S"5^8

means

the

dawn,

the the

morning,
night,

midday,

noo?i>

-^cSoo^OSfco

the evening,
,

~&

\j

and

midnight,

lg
I
sliall

TELOOGOO GRAMMAR.
conclude the appendix with a
list

of the principal points of the Compass,

over each of which a particular genius

POINTS OP THE COMPASS.

is

understood to preside.
GUARDIANS.

North. ,.&Cfi&...... The god of riches.

>l\F3S5bo ...............
,$b w /^....c853&3C&b ...... Regent

of death, andjudye of depart[ed souls-

................ East ......

^o ,0,

&>.... Regent

of the

sly.

West ...... # 5be*>C&b ...... Regent of water.

...iV;

West...... 'S^'cOaD^) ..... The ruler of the wind.

East ...... -&>~TPf&0&>... The destroyer and reproducer.
West....
.

>...2V'.

"13

g^S^yrpo ...... S.
.

.~^_^

..... Prince

of demons.

S.

East ......

^^

......... The genius offire.

FINIS,

14 DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED

LOAN
This book
is

DEPT.

due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall.

DEC 2 8 1964

'.

''

rV,

"*